Physical Design Concept PDF

Physical Design Concepts 1
Contents
1. Inputs and outputs of Physical Design

2. Checks and care about before starting the Design
3. Floorplanning
4. Power planning
5. Placement
6. Clocktree synthesis - CTS
7. Clocktree Optimization - CTO
8. Routing
9. Design Rule check - DRC
10. LVS
11. Parasitic Extraction
12. Power Analysis
13. Crosstalk Analysis
14. Electron Migration
15. Timing Analysis
16. Chip Finishing (DFM or DFY)
17. Low-power Techniques
18. Designs Executed (Projects)
19. Multi-Voltage Design
20. Physical Design objective type questions and answers
21. ASIC Design check list
22. Companies interview questions
1. Inputs and outputs of physical design implementation
The inputs required for any physical design tool is summarized in Table (1) and the outputs
generated from the same are listed in Table (2).
Data Input Requirements for Physical Design Tool
Input data Required for Physical Design

File Format File Content
Technology file (.tf in synopsys format and It describes the units, drawing patterns, layers
.techlef in cadence format) design rules, vias, and parasitics resistance and
capacitance of the manufacturing process
Physical Libraries (In general Lef of GDS file Contains complete layout information and
for all design elements like macro, std Cell, IO Abstract model for placement and routing like
pads etc., and in synopsys format .CEL, pin accessibility, blockages etc.,
.FRAM views for the above)
Timing, Logical and Power Libraries (.lib or Contains Timing and Power info
LM view -.db for all design elements)
TDF file (.tdf or .io) Contains pad or pin arrangements like order
and location of the same. For full chip the
instantiation of VDD and VSS pads Power Cut
diode etc., (Whichever is not available in
verilog netlist)
Constraints (.sdc) Contain all design related constraints like Area,
power, timing
Physical Design Exchange Format –PDEF Contains, row, cell placement locations etc.,
(optional)
Design Exchange Format –DEF (optional) Contains, row, cell placement locations etc.,
Output data from Physical Design Tool

File Format File Content
Standard delay format (.sdf) Timing Details (Except load info)
Parasitic format (.spef, .dspf) Resistance and Capacitance info of cells and
nets
Post routed Netlist (.v) Can be of flattened or Contains connectivity info of all cells
hierarchical
Physical Layout (.gds) Physical Layout info
Design Excahnge format (.def) Contains, row, cell, net placement locations
etc.,
Libraries in Physical Design
Technology libraries are integral part of the ASIC backend EDA tools. Important two libraries are
briefly explained below.
Technology File Libraries
Technology file defines basic characteristic of cell library pertaining to a particular technology
node. They are units used in the design, graphical characteristics like colors, stipple patterns, line
styles, physical parameters of metal layers, coupling capacitances, capacitance models, dielectric
values, device characteristics, design rules. These specifications are divided into technology file
sections.
Units for power, voltage, current etc are defined in technology section.
The color section defines primary and display colors that a tool uses to display designs in the
library. Stipple pattern are defined in stipple sections. Different layer definitions like its current
density, width etc are defined in layer section. Fringe capacitances generated by crossing of
interconnects are defined in fringe cap section.
Similarly several other specifications like metal density, design rules that apply to design in
library, place and route (P&R) rules, slot rule, resistance model are defined in their respective
sections.
Standard Cell Libraries, I/O Cell Libraries, Special Cell Libraries
A standard cell library is a collection of pre designed layout of basic logic gates like inverters,
buffers, ANDs, ORs, NANDs etc.
All the cells in the library have same standard height and have varied width. These standard cell
libraries are known as reference libraries in Astro.
These reference libraries are technology specific and are generally provided by ASIC vendor like
TSMC, Artisan, IBM etc. Standard cell height for 130 TSMC process is 3.65 µM.
In addition to standard cell libraries, reference libraries contain I/O and Power/Ground pad cell
libraries. It also contain IP libraries for reusable IP like RAMs, ROMs and other pre-designed,
standard, complex blocks.
The TSMC universal I/O libraries include several power/ground cells that supply different
voltages to the core, pre-drivers and post drivers. Internal pull-up or pull-down is provided to
some cells in I/O libraries.
2. Checks and Care About Before Starting the Design
The goal of the HandOff environment is to provide early checking capabilities to ensure that once
the design is routed and has converged in timing on the optimization environments, the SignOff
of the design will produce no surprises. Among surprises that are safeguarded by the HandOff
environment are:
- Naming issues among the different SignOff environments tools: extraction, DRC, LVS.
- LVS issues with respect to power/ground proper definition.- Bad clock implementation
planning.
In case latency are not budgeted properly, it is common to ends-up re implementing the design
from scratch with updated latency/clock definitions.If lucky, it’s only a matter of redoing CTS
and all the routing phase.
In the worst condition, the design is hacked with ECOs on the clock trees to fix timing using large
skews with potential silicon failure.
- Bad optimization through constraints checking. Same consequence as above if not done
properly.
- Bad interpretation of High Fanout nets requirements.
Note:
Failure to budget high fan-out nets(HFN) and clocks can cause full placement re-spin
because of incorrect pre-cts optimization.
In this flow the following information are obtained by the users and validated:
•Inter clock relation ship of the clocks must be aligned together

•Basic checking of constraints in the Zero WLM
• defines all clock roots
• defines all high fanout nets
• budgets all clock latencies and insertion delays of high fanout nets(HFN). The min insertion
delay must be equal to the max insertion delay (known problem).
• if a scan chain description is available, user validate that the budgeted latencies does not cause
too large skews on the scan chains
• user validate that all “create_clocks” have an equivalent clock root in , user validate that all high
fanout nets are defined
• user export pre-cts clock latencies.
•In Unix, user updates the uncertainty definitions of pre/post cts files.
•It is recommended
Note:
Failure to budget high-fanout nets and clocks can cause full placement re-spin because of
incorrect pre-cts optimization.
Multi Voltage design

Definition: A multi voltage design is a hierarchical design with some blocks being supplied with
a different voltage than the top level. The flow today only support a single voltage per place and
route partitions, but by combining the partitions together, to have indeed multiple configuration.
Check:
As buffers are connected to the periphery of the circuit, it is a good design practice to put them at
the top level.
A net with more than one driver is reported.
A driver is an input top port or an output pin.
A top level port of a block cannot be left unconnected
A top level port of a top design pad cell cannot be left unconnected.
A pass output of a cell having a input pad must be connected only with cells of celltype interface.
Every unbuffered package (with a pass output) pad input must be buffered (of celltype interface).
ClockTree Check:
Vth Consistency:
The clock tree must use cells from the allowed Vth list. Today, that list of Vth correspond to all
Vths available and there is no limitation set.
The clock tree must be using the same Vth or oxide thickness. The check report only the first
instance with a different Vth. This is to ensure different branches of the clock are seeing the same
variation with respect to average power supply, temperature, process.
Max Drive:
It is not allowed to have cells which have a too large drive. There is 2 reasons for this. First
reason is to limit electromigration risks. Second reason is to limit the configuration with large
miller capacitances.
It is not allowed to have cells that are too weak. This is to limit the amount of variations.
It is not allowed to have delay cells in the clock tree. Delay cells have very particular layout and
there is a risk of large pulses being filtered by the delay cell.
It is not allowed to have a too long string of cells with a fanout of 1. If this is the case, it is
possible that the CTS engine compensated wire delays with cells delays. In such case, you can
activate cross corner signoff to ensure signoff is still valid and ignore the error.
difference in cell depth between two branches of the clocktree

It is not allowed to have a very long clock tree branch and a very short one in the same clock
tree, or between different clock roots. This error is reported for branch belonging to the same
clock root. If this is the case, the skew computed during delay calculation or timing analysis is not
guaranteed. If this error is reported between clock roots, you can waive the issue by ensuring that
there is no path, or that the full OCV margin is applied to the timing check, or that deskewing
latches are present.
The clock tree must use cells from the allowed Transitor L list. Today, that list of Transistor L
correspond to all Transistor L available and there is no limitation set
sdcCheck:
To check the alignment of the timing constraints and the netlist. The following checks are
performed:
Consistency checks between constraints and netlist.

The get_nets statement should not be used in constraints, since net names may be
modified by the implementation flow.
Clocks and generated clocks are created on physical pins or ports in the netlist, not on
hierarchical levels.
load/driving_cells on ports
input/output delays on ports
Clock Latencies:
In “post cts mode”, the file will contain updated “set_clock_uncertainty” commands and
“set_clock_latency” for the virtual clocks eventually used to define the input delays and output
delays of the design.
Define clock uncertainty to be equal to the jitter of the PLL in the post cts file. It is usually not
necessary to take additional margins in setup with respect to Signoff. For pre-cts implementation,
add additional margin depending on the design to ensure reasonable convergence.
For the modes where CRPR is enabled in signoff, define inter clock uncertainties for HOLD
that will ensure CRPR based signoff will not violates. These holds will be fixed pre-cts.
Define intra clock uncertainties of 0.0 for hold in pre-cts. It is not needed to try to fix holds intra
clock holds in pre-cts as most of them will be false. Define clock uncertainty for hold in post cts
to be equal to your target uncertainty in Signoff (if no CRPR is used), or to a reasonable number
if CRPR is enabled in Signoff. One way to define a reasonable number is to find the amount of
violators to fix in the post-cts physopt prior to running the fix.
set_clock_latency must be defined for all clocks and all gating element. The enable signals of
clock gating components are severely under constrained during any pre-cts optimization if no
latency are defined. The figure 2 shows an example of setting clock latency on clock gating
components. This assumes that clock gating components are connected directly to CP pins of flip-
flop and have a small fanout.This ensure that clock tree synthesis will not put any buffer after the
gating component. The creation of this information is not automatic and should be done by the
user
virtual_clock do not necessarily require uncertainty depending on how the input/output delay
are defined.
When a block is packaged during Signoff, only the block exceptions are exported because it
contains the only information useful to time the block on the top level.
create_clock #create_generated_clock should be in exceptions set_input_delay set_output_delay

set_max_delay set_min_delay set_clock_gating_check
For PrimeTime sign-off, constraints should be described in single operating condition mode. This
means that -min, -max, -setup, -hold options are not present in PrimeTime constraints. For
implementation tools (Astro, Physical compiler) constraints need to be in min/max mode. This
means that -min, -max, -setup, -hold options are required on constraints, when applicable.
Validate that no unexpected issues will happen when the design is placed in propagated mode. In
this task, the clocks are ideal and correspond to what the Synthesis user has specified. When we
will perform the Signoff timing analysis or the post-cts optimization, propagated clock will
be used. It can happen on complex designs that 2 flip-flops that do have a constrained path
are not aligned when implementing the clock tree. Because of the miss alignments a large
amount of violations may appear after clock tree-synthesis while the pre-cts optimization
was clean. This typically happen with chains of generated clocks that are difficult to trace. The
task report to the user the clocks that do have paths together and the clock generation tree. Again
if false paths are missing between clocks, the user can update the constraints set based on the
information available here. All this information are usually invisible during the synthesis where
all the registers are usually assumed to be synchronised together which is not necessarily
reasonable from a clock tree implementation stand-point.
set_clock_latency on the virtual clocks to match the clock tree insertion delay in case of a
block level implementation. It is possible to leave unchanged values if the estimated latencies is
reasonably close to the implemented clock tree insertion delay. In case of a top level
implementation, input/output delay might not change at all with respect to the chip internal
insertion delay. This is highly dependant on the IO logic involved.
set_clock_uncertainty that must not include margin for clock tree implementation any more
(but typically still include PLL jitters for setup, and functional hold margin with respect to
substrate noise).
set_clock_latency and set_clock_transition on real clocks should be removed. The flow

scripting automatically removes the spurious set_clock_transition, set_clock_latency and put the
clocks in propagated mode automatically in Physopt flow.
CTS options:
•Max transition: maximum slope allowed at leaf pins.

•Max skew: maximum skew targeted among leaf pins
•Names of buffers allowed for insertion.
•Names of inverters allowed for insertion.
•Routing rule: specific routing rule used for routing clock tree nets.
•Routing mode: select the CTS mode.
3. Floorplanning
1. What is Pad limited design and core limited design. Is there any difference in
approaches to handle these?
Pad limited design:
The Area of pad limits the size of die. No of IO pads may be lager. If die area is
a constraint, we can go for staggered IO Pads.
Core limited design:

The Area of core limits the size of die. No of IO pads may be lesser. In these designs
In line IOs can be used.
2. How will we decide chip core area?
Sandard Cell Area

Core Size = + ( Macro Area + Hallo)
S tan dared Cell Utilization
Die Size= CoreSize+ IO to CoreClearance+ Areaof Pad(Including IO Pitch Area) + Areaof BondlongestPad
I/O-core clearances is the space from the core boundary to the inner side of I/O pads(Design
Boundary)
How to arrive at the value of utilization factor and aspect ratio during initial floorplan?
Utilization Percentages:
The Assumption is that the Standard Cells occupies 70 % of Base Layers and the remaining
30 % is utilized for Routing. If the area of macros is more then utilization can be increased
accordingly
Chip utilization, flat
Area of [ Sandard Cell + Macro + ( Pad , PadFiller , CornerPad )]

Chip Utilization =
Area of Chip
Blockages, macros, and pads are combined in the denominator of the effective Utilization.
The effective utilization definition is that all standard cells are placed outside of the blockage
areas. This includes buffers, which (for the purposes of computing utilization) are assumed to be
placed outside of non-buffer blockage areas.
Best Aspect Ratio:

Consider a five-layer design in which layers 1, 3, and 5 are horizontal and layers 2 and 4 are
vertical. Usually, layer 1 is occupied by the standard cell geometries and is unusable for routing.
Metal layer 2 often connects to metal layer 1 pins through vias. These vias tend to obstruct about
20 percent of the potential vertical routing on metal layer 2. If routing pitch is the same on all
layers, the ratio between horizontal and vertical layers is approximately 2 : 1.8. This means that
the available vertical routing resource is less than the horizontal routing resource, which dictates
a chip aspect ratio that is wider than it is high.
Using the ratio of horizontal-to-vertical routing resources, the best aspect ratio is 1.11;
therefore, the chip aspect ratio is rectangular rather than square and is wider than it is high:
W Horizontal Routing Re sources

AspectRatio = =
H Vertical Routing Re sources
Next, consider a four-layer design. metal layer 1 is not usable for routing, and metal layer 2
is 20 percent obstructed by vias connecting layer 1 andlayer 2. Layer 3 is horizontal and fully
available, and layer 4 is vertical and fully available. For this case, there is 80 percent more
vertical routing resource than there is horizontal resource. Therefore, the ratio of horizontal to
vertical routing resource is 0.56, and the vertical dimension of this chip is larger than its
horizontal dimension.
The assumptions is that metal layer 1 is unavailable for routing and that metal layer 2 is 20
percent obstructed by vias.
4. What is an HALO? How is it different from the blockage?

Block halos can be specified for hard macros, black boxes, or committed partitions. When
you add a halo to a block, it becomes part of the blocks properties. If you move the block, the
halo moves with it.
Blockages can be specified for nay part of the design. If we move the a block, the blockage will
not.
4. What is the best place to put an HARD macro if it is a power hungry device and
dissipates lot of heat?
By placing Power hungry macros near the boundary of core, the required amount of current
can be supplied, hence avoid dropped voltage supplyied to std cells and avoid Electron migration.
4. Is there any thumb rule to be followed for deciding the assignment of different layers?
The top most layers have to be may be power
4. How will you do floor planning for multi supply design?

• Create Voltage Regions
•
4. What is the minimum clearance (placement and routing) around macro?
-That will vary between macros, we need to check the Macro data sheet and decide.
4. How is floorplanning done in hierarchical flow?
• Partitioning
•
4. How to decide on the shape of the floorplan for soft macro. Explanation with case study
is helpful.
4. How to Decide pin/pad location?

To meet
• Top level requirements (If it is block ) Timing
• Timing and congestion
• Board design Requirement or standard
• Area and Power
4. How much utilization is used in the design?

There is no hard and fast rule, even though if the following values maintained then the design
can be closed without much congesstion
Floor Plan - 70 % Placement - 75 %
CTS - 80 % Routing - 85 %
During GDSii Generation – 100 %
4. What is the difference between standard cells and IO cells? Is there any difference in
their operating voltages? If so why is it.
• Std Cells are logical cells. But the IO cells interact between Core and Outside world.
• IO cells contains some protection circuits like short circuit, over voltage.
• There will be difference between Core operating Voltage and IO operating voltage. That
depends on technology library used. For 130 nm generic library the Core voltage is 1.2 v and IO
voltage is 2.5/3.3.
4. What is the significance of simultaneous switching output (SSO) file?

SSO: The abbreviation of “Simultaneously Switching Outputs”, which means that a certain
number of I/O buffers switching at the same time with the same direction (H ! L, HZ ! L or L ! H,
LZ ! H). This simultaneous switching will cause noise on the power/ground lines because of the
large di/dt value and the parasitic inductance of the bonding wire on the I/O power/ground cells.
SSN: The noise produced by simultaneously switching output buffers. It will change the
voltage levels of power/ground nodes and is so-called “Ground Bounce Effect”. This effect is
tested at the device output by keeping one stable output at low “0” or high “1”, while all other
outputs of the device switch simultaneously. The noise occurred at the stable output node is called
“Quiet Output Switching“ (QOS). If the input low voltage is defined as Vil, the QOS of “Vil” is
taken to be the maximum noise that the system can endure.
DI: The maximum copies of specific I/O cell switching from high to low simultaneously
without making the voltage on the quiet output “0” higher than “Vil” when single ground cell is
applied. We take the QOS of “Vil” as criterion in defining DI because “1” has more noise margin
than “0”. For example, in LVTTL specification, the margin of “Vih” (2.0V) to VD33 (3.3V) is
1.3V in typical corner, which is higher than the margin of “Vil” (0.8V) to ground (0V). DF:
“Drive Factor” is the amount of how the specific output buffer contributes to the SSN on the
power/ground rail. The DF value of an output buffer is proportional to dI/dt, the derivative of the
current on the output buffer. We can obtain DF as:
DF = 1 / DI
4. Explain Floor planning, from scratch to end?

Floorplanning is the process of:
• Positioning blocks on the die or within another block, thereby defining routing areas between
them.
• Creating and developing a physical model of the design in the form of an initial optimized
layout
Because floorplanning significantly affects circuit timing and performance, especially for
complex hierarchical designs, the quality of your floorplan directly affects the quality of your
final design
• Calculation of Core, Die size and Aspect Ratio.

• 70% of the core utilization is provided
• Aspect ratio is kept at 1
• Initializing the Core
• Rows are flipped, double backed and made channel less
•
• If we have multi height cells in the reference library separate placement rows have to be
provided for two different unit tiles.
• Creating I/O Rings
• Creating the Pad Ring for the Chip
• Creating I/O Pin Rings for Blocks
• Preplacing Macros and Standard Cells using Data Flow diagram and by fly-line analysis.
• Prerouting Buses
• The core area is divided into two separate unit tile section providing larger area for Hvt
unit tile as shown in the Figure 3.
•
• Creating Placement Blockages
Figure -3. Different unit tile placement
First as per the default floor planning flow rows are constructed with unit tile. Later rows are
deleted from the part of the core area and new rows are inserted with the tile “lvt_unit”. Improper
allotment of area can give rise to congestion. Some iteration of trial and error experiments were
conducted to find best suitable area for two different unit tiles. The “unit” tile covers 44.36% of
core area while “lvt_unit” 65.53% of the core area. PR summary report of the design after the
floor planning stage is provided below.
PR Summary:
Number of Module Cells: 70449
Number of Pins: 368936
Number of IO Pins: 298
Number of Nets: 70858
Average Pins Per Net (Signal): 3.20281
Chip Utilization:
Total Standard Cell Area: 559367.77
Core Size: width 949.76, height 947.80; area

900182.53
Chip Size: width 999.76, height 998.64; area

998400.33
Cell/Core Ratio: 62.1394%
Cell/Chip Ratio: 56.0264%
Number of Cell Rows: 392

14
Placement Issues with Different Tile Rows
Legal placement of the standard cells is automatically taken care by Astro tool as two separate
placement area is defined for multi heighten cells. Corresponding tile utilization summary is
provided below.
PR Summary:
[Tile Utilization]
============================================================
unit 257792 114353 44.36%
lvt_unit 1071872 702425 65.53%
============================================================
But this method of placement generates unacceptable congestion around the junction area of two
separate unit tile sections. The congestion map is shown in Figure 4.
Figure 4. Congestion
There are two congestion maps. One is related to the floor planning with aspect ratio 1 and core
utilization of 70%. This shows horizontal congestion over the limited value of one all over the
core area meaning that design can’t be routed at all. Hence core area has to be increased by
specifying height and width. The other congestion map is generated with the floor plan wherein
core area is set to 950 µm. Here we can observe although congestion has reduced over the core
area it is still a concern over the area wherein two different unit tiles merge as marked by the
circle. But design can be routable and can be carried to next stages of place and route flow
provided timing is met in subsequent implementation steps.
Tighter timing constraints and more interrelated connections of standard cells around the junction
area of different unit tiles have lead to more congestion. It is observed that increasing the area
15
isn't a solution to congestion. In addition to congestion, situation verses with the timing
optimization effort by the tool. Timing target is not able to meet. Optimization process inserts
several buffers around the junction area and some of them are placed illegally due to the lack of
placement area.
Corresponding timing summary is provided below:
Timing/Optimization Information:
[TIMING]
Setup Hold Num Num
Type Slack Num Total Target Slack Num Trans MaxCap Time
========================================================
A.PRE -3.491 3293 -3353.9 0.100 10000.000 0 8461 426 00:02:26
A.IPO -0.487 928 -271.5 0.100 10000.000 0 1301 29 00:01:02
A.IPO -0.454 1383 -312.8 0.100 10000.000 0 1765 36 00:01:57
A.PPO -1.405 1607 -590.9 0.100 10000.000 0 2325 32 00:00:58
A.SETUP -1.405 1517 -466.4 0.100 -0.168 6550 2221 31 00:04:10
========================================================
Since the timing is not possible to meet design has to be abandoned from subsequent steps. Hence
in a multi vt design flow cell library with multi heights are not preferred.
Floor Planning
Floor plan determines the size of the design cell (or die), creates the boundary and core area, and
creates wire tracks for placement of standard cells. It is also a process of positioning blocks or
macros on the die.
Floor planning control parameters like aspect ratio, core utilization are defined as follows:
Aspect Ratio= Horizontal Routing Resources / Vertical Routing Resources
Core Utilization= Standard Cell Area / (Row Area + Channel Area)
Total 4 metal layers are available for routing in used version of Astro. M0 and M3 are horizontal
and M2 and M4 are vertical layers. Hence aspect ratio for SAMM is 1. Total number of cells
=1645; total number of nets=1837 and number of ports (excluding 16 power pads) = 60. The
figure depicting floor plan-die size (µm) of SAMM is shown beside.
16
Top Design Format (TDF) files provide Astro with special instructions for planning, placing,
and routing the design. TDF files generally include pin and port information. Astro particularly
uses the I/O definitions from the TDF file in the starting phase of the design flow. [1]. Corner
cells are simply dummy cells which have ground and power layers. The TDF file used for SAMM
is given below. The SAMM IC has total 80 I/O pads out of which 4 are dummy pads. Each side
of the chip has 20 pads including 2 sets of power pads. Number of power pads required for
SAMM is calculated in power planning section. Design is pad limited (pad area is more than cell
area) and inline bonding (same I/O pad height) is used.
How do you place macros in a full chip design?
o First check flylines i.e. check net connections from macro to macro and macro to
standard cells.
o If there is more connection from macro to macro place those macros nearer to
each other preferably nearer to core boundaries.
o If input pin is connected to macro better to place nearer to that pin or pad.
o If macro has more connection to standard cells spread the macros inside core.
o Avoid crisscross placement of macros.
o Use soft or hard blockages to guide placement engine.
Differentiate between a Hierarchical Design and flat design?
o Hierarchial design has blocks, subblocks in an hierarchy; Flattened design has no

subblocks and it has only leaf cells.
o Hierarchical design takes more run time; Flattened design takes less run time.
4. What are constraints you consider for floor planning of Standard Cells?
4. What is SITE? How to specify IO constraints?
4. How do we calculate the die size from cell count of our design?
4. How different is the floor-plan approach if we go for the flip-chip approach?
4.
17
4. PowerPlanning
1. How to do power planning?

Total Core Power = 1.5w
Worst case core Voltage = 1.2V
Current drawn by core = (Total Core Power / Worst Case Voltage)
Width Of the Core (Wcore) = 0.005 m

Height Of the Core (Hcore) = 0.007 m
Sheet Resiatance of Metal6 = 0.043 ohm
Sheet Resiatance of Metal7 = 0.043 ohm
Metal Layers Used For Core Ring and Strap Metal-7 and Metal-6.
Current Density of Metal-7 = 0.002 A/um
Current Density of Metal-6 = 0.002 A/um
I/O VDD Pad being used = PVDD2DGZ

I/O VSS Pad being used = PVSS2DGZ
Core VDD Pad being used = PVSS1DGZ

Current handling ability of PVDD1DGZ = 0.045 A
Current handling ability of PVSS1DGZ = 0.04A
18
Thumb rule Ratio to be used for IO Power/Gnd calculation = 40 / 40
Thump Rule is: 1Power/Gnd pad for every 4 OR 6 IO pads.We have followed as per Old Nile
Design IO Power/Gnd pad.ie We would have taken 1 Power/Gnd pad for every 8 IO pads
Number of sides =4
Core Power Pad for each side of the chip = (Total Core Power / (Number of sides * Worst case
Core Voltage * Max.I of Powerpad) = 6.94
Total Core Power Pad = ( Core Power pad for each side of the chip * Number of sides) = 28
Total Core Power Pad = 35
Core Ground Pad for each side of the chip = ( Total Core Power / ( Number of sides * Worst case
Core Voltage * Max.I of Ground pad) = 7.81
Total Core Ground Pad = ( Core Ground pad for each side of the chip * Number of sides) = 31
Total Core Ground Pad = 42
Core Ring Width Calculation

Core ring width for Metal6 = ( Current Drawn by core / ( 2 * Jmetal6 * Core Power pad for each
side of the chip)) = 45 um
Note: Current into Core ring Splits into two branches. So we put multiply by 2 in the
denominator part
Core ring width for Metal7 = ( Current Drawn by core / ( 2 * Jmetal7 * Core Power pad for each
side of the chip) )
Core ring width = D41 = 45 um
Mesh Width Calculation
Itop = Ibottom = ( Icore*( Wcore / (Wcore+Hcore) ) ) / 2 = 0.2604167 A
Iright = Ileft = ( Icore * ( Hcore / ( Wcore + Hcore ) ) ) / 2 = 0.3645833 A
Wmesh-vertical = ( Wmesh-top = Wmesh-bottom ) = ( Itop / Jmetal6) = 130.20833 um
Wmesh-horizontal = ( Wmesh-left = Wmesh-right ) = ( Ileft / Jmetal7 ) = 188.90328 um
Mesh Count = 60
Each Mesh Width for vertical Direction = ( Wmesh-vertical / Mesh Count) = 2.2 um
Note :e the Mesh Count is 60. Total mesh width is bifurcated into 60 and we got the result is
4.5um. So Consider Each mesh width is 4.5um
Each Mesh Width for Horizontal Direction = ( Wmesh-horizontal / Mesh Count ) = 3.1
um
EM RULE CALCULATION
Wmesh-vertical ( Max.allowable ) = ( Icore / Jmetal6 ) = 647.66839 um
Wmesh-horizontal ( Max.allowable ) = ( Icore / Jmetal5) = 647.66839 um
IR Drop Calculation
Lmesh < ( (0.1* VDD) / ( Rsh *Jmetal4) ) = 1395.3 um
Note : Mesh Length is
Derived from R= (Rsh*L /A)
Rmesh = ( ( Rsh * ( Lmesh / 2 ) ) / Wmesh ) = 0.230400 ohm

Resistance of the Mesh is
19
Note : from R= (Rsh*L /A)
Vdrop = Imesh * Rmesh < 5%VDD = FALSE
Note : TSMC Recommedation, if the IR drop Problem increased beyond 5% vdd inside the chip
then we should increase the Mesh width or increase the power pad in the corresponding location.
If the Result is False We ought to increase the Mesh Width.
Wmesh-vertical(Max.allowable) > ( ( Itop *Rsh *Hcore ) / ( 0.1 * VDD) ) = 0.000653 m
Note : If Mesh Length is More than 2946um, increase the Mesh Width in Vertical Direction if IR
Problem Dominates.If the IR drop Problem Dominates more than 5%VDD drop inside the chip,
then we can increase the Mesh width upto 647um.
Wmesh-horizontal(Max.allowable) > ( ( Ileft * Rsh * Wcore ) / ( 0.1 * VDD ) ) = 0.0006532 m
Note : If Mesh Length is More than 2946um, increase the Mesh Width in Horizontal Direction
if IR Problem Dominates.If the IR drop Problem Dominates more than 5%VDD drop inside the
chip,then we can increase the Mesh width upto 647um
Mesh Width =D64

Mesh Count = 60
Each Mesh Width = ( Mesh Width / Mesh Count ) = 0.00001089 m
Note : We take the Mesh Count is 60.Total mesh width is bifurcated into 60 and we got the
result is 11um.So Consider Each mesh width is 11um if IR problem Dominates
Power Planning
There are two types of power planning and management. They are core cell power management
and I/O cell power management. In core cell power management VDD and VSS power rings
are formed around the core and macro. In addition to this straps and trunks are created for macros
as per the power requirement. In I/O cell power management, power rings are formed for I/O
cells and trunks are constructed between core power ring and power pads. Top to bottom
approach is used for the power analysis of flatten design while bottom up approach is suitable for
macros.
The power information can be obtained from the front end design. The synthesis tool reports
static power information. Dynamic power can be calculated using Value Change Dump (VCD)
or Switching Activity Interchange Format (SAIF) file in conjunction with RTL description and
test bench. Exhaustive test coverage is required for efficient calculation of peak power. This
methodology is depicted in Figure (1).
For the hierarchical design budgeting has to be carried out in front end. Power is calculated from
each block of the design. Astro works on flattened netlist. Hence here top to bottom approach can
be used. JupiterXT can work on hierarchical designs. Hence bottom up approach for power
analysis can be used with JupiterXT. IR drops are not found in floor planning stage. In placement
stage rails are get connected with power rings, straps, trunks. Now IR drops comes into picture
and improper design of power can lead to large IR drops and core may not get sufficient power.
20
Figure (1) Power Planning methodology
Below are the calculations for flattened design of the SAMM. Only static power reported by the
Synthesis tool (Design Compiler) is used instead of dynamic power.
• The number of the core power pad required for each side of the chip
= total core power / [number of side*core voltage*maximum allowable current for a I/O
pad]
= 236.2068mW/ [4 * 1.08 V * 24mA] (Considering design SAMM)
= 2.278 =~ 2
Therefore for each side of the chip 2 power pads (2 VDD and 2 VSS) are added.
• Total dynamic core current (mA)
= total dynamic core power / core voltage
Ö 236.2068mW / 1.08V = 218.71 mA

Ö
• Core PG ring width
= (Total dynamic core current)/ (No. of sides * maximum current density of the metal layer used
(Jmax) for PG ring)
=218.71 mA/(4*49.5 mA/µm) =~1.1 µm
~2 µm
• Pad to core trunk width (µm)
= total dynamic core current / number of sides * Jmax where Jmax is the maximum current
density of metal layer used
= 218.71 mA / [4 * 49.5 mA/µm]

21
= 1.104596 µm
Hence pad to trunk width is kept as 2µm.
Using below mentioned equations we can calculate vertical and horizontal strap width and
required number of straps for each macro.
• Block current:
Iblock= Pblock / Vddcore
• Current supply from each side of the block:
Itop=Ibottom= { Iblock *[Wblock / (Wblock +Hblock)] }/2
Ileft=Iright= { Iblock *[Hblock / (Wblock +Hblock)] }/2
• Power strap width based on EM:
Wstrap_vertical =Itop / Jmetal
Wstrap_horizontal =Ileft / Jmetal
• Power strap width based on IR:
Wstrap_vertical >= [ Itop * Roe * Hblock ] / 0.1 * VDD
Wstrap_horizontal >= [ Ileft * Roe * Wblock ] / 0.1 * VDD
• Refresh width:
Wrefresh_vertical =3 * routing pitch +minimum width of metal (M4)
Wrefresh_horizontal =3 * routing pitch +minimum width of metal (M3)
• Refresh number
Nrefresh_vertical = max (Wstrap_vertical ) / Wrefresh_vertical
Nrefresh_horizontal = max (Wstrap_horizontal ) / Wrefresh_horizontal
• Refresh spacing
Srefresh_vertical = Wblock / Nrefresh_vertical
Srefresh_horizontal = Hblock / Nrefresh_horizontal

22
2. Is there any checklist to be received from the front end related to switching activity of
any nets to be taken care of at the floorplanning stage?
Yes. The Switching activities of Macros will be available in checklist, it contains the power
consumption of each macro at different frequencies are also available.
3. What is power trunk ?

Power trunk is the piece of metal connects the IO pad and Core ring.
4. How to handle hotspot in an chip?

Increasing the number of power straps or increasing the width of power strap will help us to
reduce hot spot created by voltage drop and to maintain the voltage drop less than 10 %.
5. What is power gating?

Power gating is one of power reduction technique. This helps by shutting down the particular
area of chip from utilizing power.
6. Whether macro power ring is mandatory or optional?
For hierarchical design the macro power ring is mandatory. For flat design the macro power ring
is optional.
7. While putting the mesh what are the problems are faced in the Design?
8. The VDD and VSS for Macro-1 is tapped from another macro power strap instead of core
power strap.
If you have both IR drop and congestion how will you fix it?
a. -Spread macros
b. -Spread standard cells
c. -Increase strap width
d. -Increase number of straps
e. -Use proper blockage
Is increasing power line width and providing more number of straps are the only
solution to IR drop?
f. -Spread macros
g. -Spread standard cells
h. -Use proper blockage
5. what is tie-high and tie-low cells and where it is used
Tie-high and Tie-Low cells are used to connect the gate of the transistor to either power or
ground. In deep sub micron processes, if the gate is connected to power/ground the transistor
might be turned on/off due to power or ground bounce. The suggestion from foundry is to use tie
cells for this purpose. These cells are part of standard-cell library. The cells which require Vdd,
comes and connect to Tie high...(so tie high is a power supply cell)...while the cells which wants
Vss connects itself to Tie-low.
23
Inserting Tap Cells
Tap cells are a special nonlogic cell with well and substrate ties. These cells are typically used
when most or all of the standard cells in the library contain no substrate or well taps. Generally,
the design rules specify the maximum distance allowed between every transistor in a standard cell
and a well or the substrate ties.
You can insert tap cells in your design before or after placement:
• You can insert tap cell arrays before placement to ensure that the placement complies
with the maximum diffusion-to-tap limit.
• You can insert them after placement to fix maximum diffusion-to-tap violations.
Adding Tap Cell Arrays
Before global placement (during the floorplanning stage), you can add tap cells to the design that
form a two-dimensional array structure to ensure that all standard cells placed subsequently will
comply with the maximum diffusion-to-tap distance limit.
You need to specify the tap distance and offset, based on your specific design rule distance limit.
The command has no knowledge of the design rule distance limit. After you run the command, it
is recommended that you do a visual check to ensure that all standard cell placeable areas are
properly protected by tap cells.
Every other row – Adds tap cells in every other row (in the odd rows only). This pattern
reduces the number of added tap cells by approximately half, compared to the normal pattern.
The distance value should be approximately twice that of the distance value specified in the
design rule.
Fill boundary row/Fill macro blockage row – Fills the section of a row that is adjacent to the
chip boundary or the macro/blockage boundary to avoid tap rule violation (the default). When
deselected, the section of the row adjacent to the chip boundary or the macro/blockage boundary
might need to rely on taps outside the boundary to satisfy the tap distance rule.
Stagger every other row – Adds tap cells in every row. Tap cells on even rows are offset by
half the specified offset distance relative to the odd rows, producing a checkerboard-like pattern.
Make sure you enter the offset distance to be used.
The distance value should be approximately four times that of the distance value specified in the
design rule.
Boundary row double density/Macro blockage row double density – Doubles the tap density on
the section of a row that is adjacent to the chip boundary or the macro/blockage boundary to
avoid tap rule violation (the default). When deselected, the section of the row adjacent to the chip
boundary or the macro/blockage boundary needs to rely on taps outside the boundary to satisfy
the tap distance rule.
Normal – Adds tap cells to every row, using the specified distance limit.
The distance value should be approximately twice that of the distance value specified in the
design rule.
24
Control the tap cell placement using the following options:
• Ignore soft blockages - Ignores soft blockages during tap cell insertion. The default is
false.
• Ignore existing cells - Ignores any standard cells already placed. The default is false.
When this option is selected, tap cell placement may overlap existing standard cells.
• At distance tap insertion only - When selected, tap cells are inserted at distance d or at d/2
only. The distance specified with the -distance option is d, and the default is false.
With this option, tap cells are placed uniformly but might cause DRC violations.
Tap distance-based
This method is typically used when the internal layout of a standard cell is not available. The
command uses a simple distance model where the specified distance from a standard cell to a tap
cannot be violated.
Type the tap distance limit, or keep the default.
DRC spacing-based: This method is used when the internal layout of a standard cell is
available. The command reads the well, diffusion, and contact layers of the standard cell layout
and, by using the intersection of the given layers, identifies the p- and n-transistor diffusion area
and the substrate and well contact locations. Also, a tap inside a standard cell or tap cell can be
used by the transistor diffusion area of another standard cell. This method makes the most
efficient use of the taps and results in fewer taps being inserted.
Specify the maximum distance design rule from a p- or n-diffusion to a substrate or well tap.
Select the name of the following layers, as needed: n-well layer, n-diffusion layer, p-well layer,
n-diffusion layer, and contact layer.
• Freeze standard cell – Does not move standard cells. In this method, a higher number of
tap cells might need to be inserted, and the resulting placement might not be free of DRC
violations.
• Allow moving standard cells – Moves standard cells to avoid overlapping with tap cells.
In this method, the timing can sometimes be affected.
9. Which one is best? interleaving or non-interleaving for power planning?

10. Why is power planning done and how? which metal should we usefor power and ground
ring & strips and why?
11. What is the use of bloat blockage?

12. How halo rule used in power planning ?
13. How is the power planning for a hierarchical design done?
25
5. Placement
1. What are the placement optimization methods are used in SOCE and Astro Tool
Design?
- PreplaceOpt - Inplace Opt
- Post Place Opt - Incremetal Opt
- Timing Driven - Congestion Driven
2. What is Scan chain reordering? How will it impact Physical Design?

Grouping together cells that belong to a same region of the chip to allow scan connections only
between cells of a same region is called scan Clustering. Clustering also allows the degree of
congestion and timing violations to be eliminated.
Types of scan cell ordering
- Cluster based scan cell order -power - driven scan cell order.
- Power optimized routing constrained scan cell order.
Power driven scan cell order

• Determining the chaining of the scan cells so as to minimize the toggling rate in the scan chain
during shifting operations.
• Identifying the input and output of the scan cells of the scan chain to limit the
propagation of transitions during the scan operations.
If scan chain wire length is reduced, it will increase the wireability or reduces the chip die area
while at the same time increasing signal speed by reducing capacitive loading effects that share
register pins with the scan chains.
After scan synthesis, connecting all the scancells together may cause routing congestion during
PAR. This cause area overhead a and timing closure issues.
Scan chain optimization- task of finding a new order for connecting the scan elements such that
the wire length of the scan chain is minimized
Placement
Complete placement flow is illustrated in Figure (1).

26
Figure (1) Placement flow [1]
Before the start of placement optimization all Wire Load Models (WLM) are removed.
Placement uses RC values from Virtual Route (VR) to calculate timing. VR is the shortest
Manhattan distance between two pins. VR RCs are more accurate than WLM RCs.
Placement is performed in four optimization phases:
1. Pre-placement optimization
2. In placement optimization
3. Post Placement Optimization (PPO) before clock tree synthesis (CTS)

4. PPO after CTS.
Pre-placement Optimization optimizes the netlist before placement, HFNs are collapsed. It can
also downsize the cells.
In-placement optimization re-optimizes the logic based on VR. This can perform cell sizing,
cell moving, cell bypassing, net splitting, gate duplication, buffer insertion, area recovery.
Optimization performs iteration of setup fixing, incremental timing and congestion driven
placement.
Post placement optimization before CTS performs netlist optimization with ideal clocks. It can
27
fix setup, hold, max trans/cap violations. It can do placement optimization based on global
routing. It re does HFN synthesis.
Post placement optimization after CTS optimizes timing with propagated clock. It tries to
preserve clock skew.
In scan chains if some flip flops are +ve edge triggered and remaining flip flops are -ve edge
triggered how it behaves?
For designs with both positive and negative clocked flops, the scan insertion tool will always
route the scan chain so that the negative clocked flops come before the positive edge flops in the
chain. This avoids the need of lockup latch.
For the same clock domain the negedge flops will always capture the data just captured into the
posedge flops on the posedge of the clock.
For the multiple clock domains, it all depends upon how the clock trees are balanced. If the clock
domains are completely asynchronous, ATPG has to mask the receiving flops.
What you mean by scan chain reordering?
Based on timing and congestion the tool optimally places standard cells. While doing so, if scan
chains are detached, it can break the chain ordering (which is done by a scan insertion tool like
DFT compiler from Synopsys) and can reorder to optimize it.... it maintains the number of flops
in a chain.
Answer2:
During placement, the optimization may make the scan chain difficult to route due to congestion.
Hence the tool will re-order the chain to reduce congestion.
This sometimes increases hold time problems in the chain. To overcome these buffers may have
to be inserted into the scan path. It may not be able to maintain the scan chain length exactly. It
cannot swap cell from different clock domains.
What is JTAG?
Answer1:
JTAG is acronym for "Joint Test Action Group".This is also called as IEEE 1149.1 standard for
Standard Test Access Port and Boundary-Scan Architecture. This is used as one of the DFT
techniques.
Answer2:
JTAG (Joint Test Action Group) boundary scan is a method of testing ICs and their
interconnections. This used a shift register built into the chip so that inputs could be shifted in and
28
the resulting outputs could be shifted out. JTAG requires four I/O pins called clock, input data,
output data, and state machine mode control.
The uses of JTAG expanded to debugging software for embedded microcontrollers. This
elimjinates the need for in-circuit emulators which is more costly. Also JTAG is used in
downloading configuration bitstreams to FPGAs.
JTAG cells are also known as boundary scan cells, are small circuits placed just inside the I/O
cells. The purpose is to enable data to/from the I/O through the boundary scan chain. The
interface to these scan chains are called the TAP (Test Access Port), and the operation of the
chains and the TAP are controlled by a JTAG controller inside the chip that implements JTAG.
1. What is cluster based design? Describe about cluster based region?

2. What are the problems are faced when placing long net of FF to FF path and Short net
of FF to FF path?
3. Is timing driven placement advantageous over the functionality based placement?
Explain briefly.
4. Explain In Place Optimization and Timing Delay?
5. How to do Congestion optimization and balance slew?
6. Clocktree Synthesis - CTS

29
1. What is CTS?
Clock tree synthesis is a process of balancing clock skew and minimizing insertion delay in
order to meet timing, power requirements and other constraints.
Clock tree synthesis provides the following features to achieve timing closure:
• Global skew clock tree synthesis

• Local skew clock tree synthesis
• Real clock useful skew clock tree synthesis
• Ideal clock useful skew clock tree synthesis
• Interclock delay balance
• Splitting a clock net to replicate the clock gating cells
• Clock tree optimization
• High-fanout net synthesis
• Concurrent multiple corners (worst-case and best-case) clock tree synthesis
• Concurrent multiple clocks with domain overlap clock tree synthesis
2. What are the SDC constraints associated with Clock tree ?

If there are no create_clock statements in the SDC file loaded, CTS will not run. Make sure
you have at least one create_clock in your SDC file. If you define create_clock on a pin that is
not present physically and is only present in the hierarchical netlist, CTS will not be able to run.
It is good practice to have set_clock_transition, set_clock_latency, and set_clock_uncertainty
also defined.
Clock tree synthesis has the following clock tree constraints:
• Maximum transition delay

• Maximum load capacitance
• Maximum fanout
• Maximum buffer level
3. How are the number of Buffer (logic) levels determined during CTS?
In block mode, the number of buffer levels is calculated based on the target load capacitance
(0.3 is the default) and the distance between the clock source and clock pins.
The clock tree analyzer (CTA) will calculate the optimal value for the load capacitance
during CTS. It will use the value it calculates, or the values you specify for transition, fanout, and
load capacitance constraints.
30
The tool will take the more limiting of these and then convert it to a load capacitance that will
drive CTS.
4. Which is better compared to buffer and inverter? If so, Why?

Inverters, Since the Transition time is less for Inverters. It reduced current flow between
VDD and VSS rail and hence Power reduction. Better to use both with all drive strength to get
good skew and insertion delay.
One other advantage of using inverters in a clock tree is the reduction of duty cycle
distortion. The delay models for a cell library are usually characterized at three different
operation conditions or corners: worst, typical, and best. But, there are other effects that are not
modeled at these corners. You can have clock jitter introduced by the PLL, variances in the
doping of PFETs or NFETs, and other known physical effects of a manufacturing process.
5. While Doing CTS which buffer and inverters are used in the Design?
Clock tree synthesis uses buffers or inverters in clock tree construction. The tool identifies
the buffers and inverters if their Boolean function is defined in library preparation. By default,
clock tree synthesis synthesizes clock trees with all the buffers and inverters available in your
libraries. It is not necessary to specify all of them explicitly in the Buffers/Inverters
6. How will you built Clock tree for Gated Clocks?

Historically, separate trees are built for any net that drives clock gating elements as well as
clock leaves. The two trees diverge at the root of the net. This typically results in excessive
insertion delays and makes the clock tree more susceptible to failure due to on-chip variation
(OCV).
By default, the clock tree synthesizer attempts to tap the gated branches into a
lower point in the clock tree, sharing more of the clock tree topology with the non-gated
branches. It attempts to insert negative offset branch points earlier in the main tree.
31
In many cases, this results in fewer buffers being inserted as well as lower clock insertion
delays. Sharing the clock tree topology between gated and non-gated branches typically also
reduces the local OCV impact on timing. You should disable the clock tap-in feature if too many
buffers are inserted or if the clock tree insertion delay is too large.
7. How will you built Clock tree for Generated clocks(Divided by 2 clock)?
Historically, balancing a generated clock with its source was a manual process. In addition,
there was no good way to specify groups of pins to be balanced separately from the main clock
tree, or to balance one clock tree to another.
A common application of skew grouping is found in circuits that contain clock dividers. Any
generated clocks in the design is balanced with the source clock that is generating them.
Consider a simple divided clock example. Here are the waveforms that are created by these two
clocks
In the normal case, you want to make sure that the rising edge of CLK2 occurs at the same
time as the rising edge of CLK at all endpoints. Because these are two clocks, if nothing special is
done, they are each balanced separately and have no relationship to one another.
The both edges of the generated clock CLK2:R and CLK2:F into the skew phase of the rising
edge of the source clock CLK:R. This is done because the rising edge of the source clock triggers
both edges of the generated clock, due to the division taking place.
32
A skew anchor or Sink point on the clock pin of the divider circuit has to be defined. This is
done to alert the clock router that this pin is not to be treated like a standard clock endpoint during
the balancing of the clocks.
The presence of a skew anchor in the default skew group causes tool to treat that anchor like
a clock gating pin rather than an endpoint. It detects that there is another downstream clock tree
from this point, and this clock pin is tapped into the main clock tree early to attempt to
compensate for the anticipated additional delay in the CLK2 tree.
The final constraint takes the falling phase of the root clock CLK:F and places it into the
skew phase CLK:R. With the addition of the generated clock phases into the CLK:R skew phase,
the CLK:F skew phase contains only the CLK:F clock phase. In many common configurations,
not doing this can result in very different arrival time requirements on the rising and falling
edges of clock pins in the CLK:F and CLK:R clock phases.
This happens when the CLK:R skew phase arrival time is generated by a late arrival in the
CLK2:R or CLK2:F clock phase. This late arrival is propagated to all clock phases in the CLK:R
skew phase (remember, CLK:R, CLK2:R, and CLK2:F are all in the
CLK:R skew phase.) When the arrival time for the CLK:F skew phase is calculated, it only has to
examine the CLK:F clock phase, which might not be very “deep.” So, the CLK:F skew phase
required time is created without knowledge about the CLK:R skew phase arrival time. The
discrepancy is removed by moving the CLK:F clock phase into the CLK:R skew phase, and all
arrival times are generated in a consistent manner.
Complex Generated Clocks

This example contains several additional structures that can be found in many complicated
clock divider circuits. In this example, you add multistage generated clocks as well as a more
complicated state machine divider.
Consider the following waveforms:
Generation of these clocks is accomplished by a two-register state machine (that generates the
divide-by-three clock CLK3) and a simple divide-by-two clock (that generates CLK6 by dividing
CLK3 by 2). Assume that the registers generating CLK3 are called I_DIV3_0 and I_DIV3_1. The
register divider generating CLK6 is called I_DIV6.
Notice one of the key differences between this example and “Simple Generated Clocks”.
One of the generated clocks (CLK3) is created by a state machine of more than one register.
An important concern is that the two clock pins that comprise this state machine should be
skew balanced to each other. The register that drives the actual generated clock (I_DIV3_0) must
33
have its clock pin placed in the CLK tree early to account for its downstream delay. Because the
other register in the state machine (I_DIV3_1) needs to be balanced to I_DIV3_0, it must also be
in the tree early. To achieve this, you must create a skew group.
Astro CTS understands generated clocks so you need not convert create_generated_clock into
create_clock.
You can specify the source clock and Astro CTS will traverse through the generated clock
definition point and balance the generated clocks's sinks when balancing the source clock
Clock Tree Synthesis (CTS)
The goal of CTS is to minimize skew and insertion delay. Clock is not propagated before CTS as
shown in Figure (1).
After CTS hold slack should improve. Clock tree begins at .sdc defined clock source and ends at
stop pins of flop. There are two types of stop pins known as ignore pins and sync pins. ‘Don’t
touch’ circuits and pins in front end (logic synthesis) are treated as ‘ignore’ circuits or pins at
back end (physical synthesis). ‘Ignore’ pins are ignored for timing analysis. If clock is divided
then separate skew analysis is necessary.
Global skew achieves zero skew between two synchronous pins without considering logic
relationship.
Local skew achieves zero skew between two data dependant synchronous pins while considering
logic relationship.
34
If clock is skewed intentionally to improve setup slack then it is known as useful skew.
Rigidity is the term coined in Astro to indicate the relaxation of constraints. Higher the rigidity
tighter is the constraints.
In Clock Tree Optimization (CTO) clock can be shielded so that noise is not coupled to other
signals. But shielding increases area by 12 to 15%. Since the clock signal is global in nature the
same metal layer used for power routing is used for clock also. CTO is achieved by buffer sizing,
gate sizing, buffer relocation, level adjustment and HFN synthesis. We try to improve setup slack
in pre-placement, in placement and post placement optimization before CTS stages while
neglecting hold slack. In post placement optimization after CTS hold slack is improved. As a
result of CTS lot of buffers are added. Generally for 100k gates around 650 buffers are added.
Global skew report is shown below.
**********************************************************************
*
* Clock Tree Skew Reports
*
* Tool : Astro
* Version : V-2004.06 for IA.32 -- Jul 12, 2004
* Design : sam_cts
* Date : Sat May 19 16:09:20 2007
*
**********************************************************************
======== Clock Global Skew Report =============================
Clock: clock
Pin: clock
Net: clock
Operating Condition = worst

The clock global skew = 2.884
The longest path delay = 4.206
The shortest path delay = 1.322
The longest path delay end pin: \mac21\/mult1\/mult_out_reg[2]/CP

The shortest path delay end pin: \mac22\/adder1\/add_out_reg[3]/CP
The Longest Path:

====================================================================
Pin Cap Fanout Trans Incr Arri Master/Net
--------------------------------------------------------------------
clock 0.275 1 0.000 0.000 r clock
U1118/CCLK 0.000 0.000 0.000 r pc3c01
U1118/CP 3.536 467 1.503 1.124 1.124 r n174
\mac21\/mult1\/mult_out_reg[2]/CP
4.585 3.082 4.206 r sdnrq1
[clock delay] 4.206
====================================================================
35
The Shortest Path:

====================================================================
Pin Cap Fanout Trans Incr Arri Master/Net
--------------------------------------------------------------------
clock 0.275 1 0.000 0.000 r clock
U1118/CCLK 0.000 0.000 0.000 r pc3c01
U1118/CP 3.536 467 1.503 1.124 1.124 r n174
\mac22\/adder1\/add_out_reg[3]/CP
1.701 0.198 1.322 r sdnrq1
[clock delay] 1.322
====================================================================
Figure (2) Clock after CTS and CTO
8. Explain Clock tree Options for building better Clock Tree?

Five special clock options are available to address this situation. They greatly expand your ability
to control the clock building.
• Clock phase:
⇒ A clock phase is a timer event that is associated with a particular edge of the source
clock.
⇒ Each clock domain created with two clock phases:
(i)The rising edge
(ii)The falling edge.
⇒ The clock phases are named after the timing clock with a :R or :F to denote rising or
falling clock phase.
⇒ These phases propagate through the circuit to the endpoints, so that events at the
clock pins can be traced to events driven by the clocks defined.
⇒ Because Tool is capable of propagating multiple clocks through a circuit, any clock
pin can have two or more clock phases associated with it.
36
⇒ For example, if CLKA and CLKB are connected to the i0 and i1 inputs of a 2:1
MUX, all clock pins in the fan-out of this MUX have four clock phases associated
with them—CLKA:R, CLKA:F, CLKB:R, and CLKB:F. (This assumes that you
allow the propagation of multiple clock phases).
• Skew phase:
⇒ A skew phase is a collection of clock phases.
⇒ Each clock phase is placed into the skew phase of the same name.
⇒ When a clock is defined, skew phases are also automatically created. They are
created with the same names as the clock phases that are created.
• Skew group
⇒ Clock tree skew balancing is done on a per-skew group basis.
⇒ A skew group is a subdivision of a clock phase.
⇒ Normally, all pins in a clock phase are in group 0 and are balanced as a group.
⇒ If you have created a set of pins labeled as group 1,
For example,
⇒ Then the skew phase containing these pins will be broken into two skew groups: one
containing the user-specified group, and one containing the “normal” clock pins.
⇒ This feature is useful if we want to segregate certain sets of clock pins and not
balance them with the default group. We can now define multiple groups of pins and
balance them independently.
• Skew anchor or Sink Point

⇒ A skew anchor is a clock endpoint pin that controls downstream clock tree.
⇒ For example, a register that is a divide-by-2 clock generator has a clock input pin that
is a skew anchor, because the arrival time of the clock at that clock pin affects the
arrival times of all the clocks in the generated domain that begins at the register Q
pin.
• Skew offset
⇒ The skew offset a floating point number to describe certain phase relationships that
exist, when placing multiple clocks with different periods or different edges of the
same clock different phases into the same skew phase.
⇒ Use the skew offset to adjust the arrival time of a specific clock phase when you
want to compare it to another clock phase in the same group.
9. How does a skew group relate to the clock phase and skew phase?
⇒ A skew group is a set of clock pins that have been declared as a group. By default, all
clock pins are placed in group 0. So each skew phase contains one group.
⇒ If the user has created a group of pins labeled by the number 1, for example, then the
skew phase that contains these pins will be broken into two skew groups:
⇒ (i) The “normal” clock pins
⇒ (ii) The user-specified group.
⇒ This is useful for segregating groups of clock pins that have special circumstances
and that you do not want to be balanced with the default group.
⇒ Skew optimization is performed on a skew-group basis that takes place after the basic
clock is inserted
37
Why to reduce Clock Skew?
⇒ Reducing clock skew is not just a performance issue, it is also a manufacturing issue.
⇒ Scan based testing, which is currently the most popular way to structurally test chips
for manufacturing defects, requires minimum skew to allow the error free shifting of
scan vectors to detect stuck-at and delay faults in a circuit.
⇒ Hold failures at the best-case PVT Corner is common of these circuits since there are
typically no logic gates between the output of one flop and the scan input on the next
flop on the scan chain.
⇒ Managing and reducing clock skew in this case often resolves these hold failures.
Cluster-based approach eases clock tree synthesis
The physical realization of the clock tree network directly impacts the control of clock skew and
jitter.
Crosstalk from the clock grid affects circuit speed. And the speed and accuracy of the clock net
directly contribute to the minimum cycle time of the chip.
The speed of a design is often its costliest component. But clock skew is an important factor in
deciding a clock Period. The skew should be reduced — or, alternatively — utilized to the
maximum extent possible within the defined cycle time.
In deep sub-micron (DSM) processes it is a challenge, as it is difficult to control the delay in the
clock path due to process variation.
The role of skew in a design, the types of clock trees used in current technology, the effective use
of customized cluster based clock-tree synthesis (CTS), the merits of cluster based CTS for skew
controlling and, finally, realistic delay consideration for static timing analysis (STA).
Deep submicron effects
A shrink in the feature size, a reduction in operating voltage, dual threshold libraries, multi-
voltage or multi-clock domains, diminished gate oxide thickness and manufacturing inaccuracies
are examples of technology changes that lead to big challenges in achieving the desired
performance.
The interconnect delay now contributes 70~80% of the clock Period. Even so, the faster
transistors provided in each successive process generation have led designers to expect that clock
period will shrink with each new process.
the supply voltage at each new process node has been reduced to save the power and protect the
increasingly thin gate oxides. With each reduction, problems such as ground bounce, cross talk,
glitch propagation and so forth were exacerbated because of low noise margin and increased
leakage power. These problems, in turn, can force designers to slow down the slew rates and
clock rise/fall times in their circuits.
38
Role of skew in a design
Any factor that contributes delay to a clock net — a mismatch in the RC delay or buffering the
clock network, for example — can contribute to skew. Variations in manufacturing also can
contribute unwanted skew in the clock network. The unwanted skew caused by process variation
becomes the bottleneck for improving the clock frequency in high-frequency designs.
The clock delay of a register is the time needed for a clock-edge to propagate from the clock
source to the register. Because of the net delays and/or buffer delays (together here called
"insertion delay"), the clock edges reach the registers at different times. That is, each register
receives the clock with a different insertion delay.
By definition, the clock skew is the difference between the longest insertion delay and the
shortest insertion delay of a clock network. If dl and dc are the clock arrival time of launch and
capture registers, then dl > dc leads to negative skew and dl < dc leads to positive skew. To make
sure the clock operates within the required cycle time,
(dc – dl) must be no more than (min logic delay + register delay – hold) for hold
And
(dl – dc) must be no more than (cycle time – (max logic delay + register delay + setup))
for setup
To meet these constraints make the skew as close as possible to zero. But to achieve zero skew,
the design needs to have a huge amount of buffer insertion and wire sizing, to make the insertion
delay equal at all registers. Clearly, this may lead to unwanted area and power consumption.
Alternatively, a design may accept a small amount of skew in order to avoid blowing up area and
power consumption. Controlling such non-zero skew is the critical part of clock tree synthesis.
This article explains cluster-based clock tree synthesis, which delivers an optimal result on skew
control.
Types of clock trees
There are many clock tree structures used widely in the design industry, each of which has its
own merits and demerits.
1. H-tree (figure 1)
2. Balance tree (figure 2)
3. Spine tree (figure 3)
4. Distributed driven buffer tree (figure 4).
39
Figure 1 — H-tree, Because of the balanced construction, it is easy to reduce clock skew in the H-
tree clock structure. A disadvantage to this approach is that the fixed clock plan makes it
difficult to fix register placement. It is rigid in fine-tuning the clock tree.
Figure 2 — Balanced tree makes it easy to adjust capacitance of the net to achieve the skew
requirements. But the dummy cells used to balance the load increase area and power.
40
Figure 3 — The spine tree (Fish bone) arrangement makes it easy to reduce the skew. But it is
heavily influenced by process parameters, and may have problems with phase delay.
Figure 4 — Distributed driven buffer tree. Distributed buffers make it easy to reduce skew and
power. Clock routing may not be an issue. However, since buffering is customized, it may be a
less area efficient method.
Cluster based CTS
A better plan in principle would be to individually balance and distribute the clock from the
source to each of the logic elements. If we were simply to lay out the logic and then route a clock
signal to each logic element, using constant wire width and no buffers, then obviously the register
furthest from the source will receive the clock with the greatest delay.
Delay can then be equalized by adding buffers/repeaters or lengthening the wires in the shorter
nets so that the clock reaches all the registers at the same time. But this is not always true in
practice, because in real life routing the clock directly from the source may not be possible in
high speed and multi clock domains. A practical approach for such problems can be customized
cluster-based clock tree synthesis.
41
In a customized cluster-based clock tree plan, the logic elements operated in a single clock
domain or the logic with the same input timing registers are combined together to form a group.
A reference register for each group is selected to establish a reference arrival time.
Initially these clusters are placed to meet the latency requirements based on the clock insertion
delay from the source. These clusters can be individually optimized to minimize skew, so that the
skew will be within the allowable range for the desired cycle time.
The cluster level routing can use any of the routing topologies mentioned above, based on the
priorities of the design. For example, a cluster sensitive to skew can use H-tree or balanced-tree
designs.
Obviously, the trade off between power, area and amount of buffers added into the network are to
be preplanned before selecting a method for each group. It is not advisable to limit the
performance based on the clock tree topology.
Advantages of cluster based CTS
In a deep submicron process, millions of gates and very high frequencies — sometimes multiple
GigaHertz — are becoming normal. In order to achieve such high frequency requirements, the
clock tree network needs to be very well planned and elaborated. The designers should be able to
plan for the skew requirements to achieve the minimum cycle period, instead of trying to force
the skew to zero in the presence of perhaps poorly-characterized process variations.
One of the biggest advantages of doing cluster-based CTS is that the delay due to voltage drop in
the interconnect can be modeled or incorporated into static timing analysis. A voltage drop of
10% of Vdd may lead to more than 15% delay variation in nanometer technologies.
Typically the voltage drop will be more severe at the center of the chip, so the standard cells
characterized for either worst case or best can not give accurate delay values — they cannot
account for voltage variations that are happening on the fly. Though simultaneous, mixed min-
max or on-chip variation (OCV) kinds of analysis are derived for such situation, there is
unfortunately no static timing engine that considers the delay of standard cells due to the variation
in the voltage. A cluster near the center of a chip, for example, may not receive 100% of Vdd, so
the delay also will vary at the center since the voltage of those standard cells are less than Vdd.
When we use a cluster-based customized clock tree synthesis method, we always treat the cluster
based on its priority within the chip. If the voltage drop at the center of the die is a potential
problem, then the clusters at the center would always have timing priorities with setup and hold
margins sufficient to prevent the voltage drop from causing timing problem. There always needs
to be a trace-back analysis with actual voltage drop numbers to define the setup and hold margin.
In such cases, the clusters can be operated based on the weighting of timing, area, power, and
other factors.
Conclusion
For many designers, timing closure is the major issue in high-speed designs, which leads to any
number of iterations and schedule-consuming tasks. At 350nm or 250nm technology, the EDA
companies understood timing closure issues and they updated their tools to a certain extent to
meet the designers' needs.
42
But in the current scenario, timing closure is the major part of the design cycle. Because of time-
to-market pressure, new design methodologies at the system integration level like system on chip
and network on chip are using on-chip buses and multiple clock domains. This kind of design
requirement pushes designers to use new design tricks like timing driven placement, useful-skew
concepts, or customized cluster-based CTS.
Since there are plenty of IP cores available in the market, simply designing an SoC may not
consume much time. But after the blocks have been selected, the physical implementation into
hardware consumes more time and effort. We may have to develop a customized design flow for
each and every stage of the design cycle to address the current challenges in chip implementation.
Clock tree synthesis is a case in point. As we have discussed throughout the paper, the designers
should not be limited to any fixed topology of clock routing algorithms. Rather, they should be
encouraged to mix up any of the described clock routing schemes into a single chip. This
customized cluster-based clock tree synthesis utilizes the best topology to meet requirements like
skew, area, and power at every stage, and it improves the top-level system performance.
Handling Clock Gating Cells with Non-Integrated Clock Gating Cells
Clock gating cells are used in many designs to reduce power consumption. Tools liked power
compiler will insert gating cells automatically. One type of clock gating is done using a Latch and
an AND gate. There may be hundreds on instances of this gating “Cell” spread throughout the
design.
The master clock is defined at the top cell port and the output of each clock gating cell drives
several flip flops. The clock connects to the G port (clock of FF) of the latch and the B input of
the AND gate. Clk2 is the output of this clock gating cell(output of AND gate), which will be
connected to the FF or other clock gating cells depending on the implemented clock gating
structure. Net-1 is coming from another gate (D Input of FF) which is usually has the test inputs.
The requirement for this type of design is for the clock to arrive at the A and B ports of the AND
gate at the same time. To achieve this, the clock tree – when built –should not synchronize the
latch with other FFs, If CTS synchronizes the latch with the FF, the clock gating check at the A
and B inputs of the AND gate will fail because the clock will arrive early compared to its arrival
at the clock ports of the latch and the FFs. Astro CTS will synchronize the latch with other FFs
when there is no integrated clock gating cell in the library. For integrated clock gating cells, CTS
is supported automatically.
Soultion:
1) Get the clock go through the latch – not taking the G pins as a sync port.
2) Define the latch as a clock cell in the cLF fiel –this will let the clock to go through it.
43
What are all the Checks to be done before doing CTS?
• Hierarchical pins should not be defined as a clock source
• Generated clock should have a valid master clock source

A generated clock does not have a valid master clock source in
the following situations:
- The master clock specified in create_generated_clock does not exist.
- The master clock specified in create_generated_clock does not drive the source pin of
the generated clock.
- The source pin of the generated clock is driven by multiple clocks, and some of the
master clocks are not specified with create_generated_clock.
• Clock (master or generated) with no sinks
• Looping clock
• Cascaded clock with an un-synthesized clock tree in its fan-out
• Multiple-clocks-per-register propagation not enabled, but the
design contains overlapping clocks
• Clock tree exceptions should not be ignored.
• Stop pin or float pin defined on an output pin is an issue.
What are all the Best Practices of Clock Tree Synthesis (CTS)?
Avoiding Clock Tree Synthesis (CTS) Pitfalls.
Here, some common problems are discussed that many design engineers today face when they try
to run CTS.
The suggestions and steps you can take to avoid these problems are discussed.
It is always a good idea to invest the time at the beginning to understand the clock structure and
the clock gating in your design.
You should also know where your gating elements are placed and the topology of your floor plan
including the location of sync points.
That will ensure that you are building clock trees that will give you good timing results. This
knowledge will also help you make clock tree decisions that will help CTS build better quality
clock trees.
The following list provides suggestions for dealing with problems you may encounter.
A. Big insertion delays.
Some of the things you can check if you have big insertion delays are:
1. Are there delay cells in the design?

44
Check to see if there are delay cells in the netlist that are present in the current
design. These could be causing delay that cannot be optimized and CTS is building
clock trees which match all other paths to this worst insertion delay.
2. Are there cells marked "don’t touch" in the design?
There could be cells in the design that are marked "dont touch" which prevents CTS
from deleting them and building optimal clock trees.
3. Can the floor-plan be modified to be more clocks friendly?
Sometimes it helps to consider CTS (and timing) as a constraint for floor-planning.

Long skinny channels leading to more long skinny placement channels will give both
timing optimization and CTS problems.
Consider using soft blockages or refloorplan.
4. Can you define new create_clocks that will assist CTS (divide and rule)?
Many times running CTS on the main clock pin is not the optimal way to build clock
trees. It may help to divide the clock tree based on the floorplan and the syncpins and
build sub clocks, then define the sync pins and build the upper main clock.
5. Are the syncPins defined correctly for macros?
It is a good idea to check the syncPins file to see if the sync pins make sense. Also
check that the numbers are accurate and that the time units are correct.
6. If there are ignore pins in the design are they defined as ignore pins?
If there are ignore pins in the design, make sure you define these as ignore pins
before running CTS.
7. Have you used varRouteRules and propogated by astMarckClockTree?

Defining varRouteRules helps to reduce the insertion delay.
Define shielding, and double or more width rules for clock nets,
and propagate them using astMarkClockTree.
8. Are the CTU buffers marked as "dont use"?
Some technologies use clock tree buffers. Make sure you are using these only for
your clock tree. Also make sure they are not marked "dont use".
9. Be creative and use different CTS intParams to get better results.
There are several CTS options in the form that you can try to change to get better or
more desireable CTS results.
10. Use the Block option in CTS in the first attempt.

45
This usually gives better insertion and skew results. If your design is less than 5%
std cell utilization try the Top option.
11. CTO is designed to work on skew and will not reduce insertion delay once it
is built.
Try providing a higher skew goal during CTS.
12. Use inverters only to build the clock tree if possible.

13. Define variable route rules with greater than default widths and clearance
and also shield the clock nets. Then propagate these rules using
astMarkClockTree. This will help insertion delay.
B. Unreasonable skew.
Some of the things you can check if you have unreasonable skew are:
1. All the above except A(11).
All the issues discussed above also apply to skew debugging.
2. Do you have derived clocks that do not need skew matching?
If you have clocks that get divided and some branches do not need skew balancing
with the rest, then build clock trees for them separately and do not allow skew
calculation between them.
You can define sync pins or ignore pins at cross-over oints.
3. Look closely at your worst path(s) for possible culprits.
It is quite likely that some of your worst paths have an issue which is preventing CTS
from optimizing them and is causing all other paths to get delay added to match the
insertion delay or better skew.
4. Use intParams areaBased and ECOWinSize to help the Overlap Removal

(OV) engine.
C. CTS doesn't run properly.
Some of the things you can check if CTS doesn't run properly are:
1. All of the above.
For general quality of results issues, all the above points should be checked.
2. Are the SDC constraints loaded and is create_clock defined?

46
If there are no create_clock statements in the SDC file loaded, CTS will not run.
Make sure you have at least one create_clock in your SDC file.
It is good practice to have set_clock_transition, set_clock_latency, and

set_clock_uncertainty also defined.
For the SDC latency values to be honored, the intParam axSetIntParam "acts"
"clock uncertainty goal" 1 should be set.
CTS uses constraints in the CTS form as first priority, then it uses the constraints
in the intParams, and then it uses SDC constraints.
Having these in the SDC file will also enable the timer to account for your skew
and insertion delay in optimization steps.
3. If you have multiple create_clock statements in a path, did you set the
"define ataPropagateClockThruCreateClock" correctly?
This is a new define parameter in the 2003.06 release and it needs to be set correctly.
4. Build the clock tree on lower clocks, then define the sync pins and run CTS
on next level up (divide and conquer).
This is a good practice when building clock trees. Always remember to define sync
pins if you need them.
5. astSetDontTouch ?clock_buffers.list? #f done?
If your CTS buffers have a "dont use" property in your library, you need to set that to
false.
6. Are the clock nets marked "dont touch" or is set_case_analysis defined?
Occasionally you may end up with a "dont touch" property on your clock net as a
results of your analysis. Make sure you reset this using the astmarkClockTree
command.
Also if your SDC constraints have a set_case_analysis defined that disables the
clock net, CTS will not build clock trees.
7. Is create_clock defined on a non-physical hierarchical pin?
If you define create_clock on a pin that is not present physically and is only present
in the heirarchical netlist, CTS will not be able to run.
8. Try different CTS options and use the one that gives the best results.
47
As always, it is a good idea to experiment and try out different CTS options and
intParams to get the best result.
Clock Timing Constraints for Synthesis, Clock Tree, and Propagated Clock Timing
Question:
What are the timing constraints in Design Compiler that can cause problems
in the backend, clock tree synthesis, and propagated clocks?
Answer:
Certain clock constraints are acceptable in Design Compiler but can cause
problems in the backend during clock tree synthesis and propagated mode
timing analysis.
Because all clock insertion delays are zero during synthesis, many incorrect
definitions don't cause problems during synthesis but cause serious clock
tree synthesis and propagated clock analysis problems.
Ideally, Primetime signoff constraints must be used throughout the flow:

synthesis, clock tree synthesis, and during signoff timing analysis with
Primetime. If this is not possible, at least the clock constraints must be
consistent throughout the flow.
These critical clock constraints are discussed below.
(1) Root pin of Create Clock and Create Generated Clock
(2) Should it be Create Clock or Create Generated Clock?
(3) Clock waveform
(4) Clock Latency: source and propagated
(5) Master (Source) of Generated Clock
(6) Create Generated Clock: div_by 1 or -comb
(1) Root pin of Create Clock or Create Generated Clock?

========================================================
Ideal Case
==========
Make sure that the root pin of the create clock constraint is one of the
following:
(a) input port
(b) output pin of a hard macro block such as PLL or analog block
48
Make sure that the root pin of the create generated clock constraint is
the output pin of a register.
Non-Ideal Case
==============
If the root pin of a clock is anything other than the above, make sure that
you are aware of the ramifications in the propagated clock mode and during
Clock Tree Synthesis.
If the create_clock constraint is defined on an internal pin, be aware of

the following:
(a) Every create_clock constraint becomes the startpoint for insertion delay
calculation in propagated mode. Try using the create_generated_clock command.
(b)Every create_clock constraint triggers a new clock tree during clock

tree synthesis. Every create_clock constraint automatically becomes the sync
pin for any upstream clock traversing to that point. Try using the
create_generated_clock command.
(c) Every create_clock constraint overrides any other clock present at that
point unless the -add option is used. Try using the
create_generated_clock command.
(d) Every create_generated_clock constraint overrides any other clock present

at that point unless the -add option is used. Try defining multiple
create_generated_clock. Note that the create_generated_clock command enables
insertion delay calculation from the master (source) clock, unlike the
create_clock command.
(e) A create_clock constraint defined on a hierarchical pin is not supported

during clock tree synthesis. Clock tree synthesis requires input port or an
instance pin as the startpoint of a clock.
It is highly recommended that you do NOT synthesize the clock logic.

Instantiation is best. Besides unpredictable logic and clock glitches, it
may not be possible to define the start, sync, exclude and ignore pins
during clock tree synthesis.
For example:
Four clocks go to two 2-input MUXes. It is best to instantiate these MUXes.
If synthesized, the resulting logic may not have MUXes at all. Logic gates
could be shared along with the input pins. That is, A and B pins of the MUXes
cannot be identified.
It is no longer possible to propagate a particular clock through one MUX and

not the other, because the input pins are not identifiable.
49
(2) Should it be Create Clock or Create Generated Clock?

========================================================
Normally create clock should be defined for all the clocks from input ports
and output pins of hard macros such as PLL and analog blocks. For any
internal pins, the create_generated_clock constraint is best.
When create_generated_clock is defined, latency (insertion delay) of this

clock is calculated from its master (source) clock. When create_clock is
defined, latency (insertion delay) of this clock is calculated from the
point where it is defined.
For example, assume that a create_generated_clock constraint is defined at

the output pin of a MUX with a source clock defined. This implies that the
insertion delay of the generated clock needs to be calculated from the
source clock through the MUX and to the sync pins of the generated clock.
If a create_clock constraint is defined instead at the output of the MUX,

then the insertion delay is calculated from the output pin of the MUX and
NOT from the source clock.
Double check that all the create clock definitions that are defined on the
internal pins of the design. They might have to be changed to the
create_generated_clock constraint.
(3) Clock Wave form

===================
Incorrect
=========
For simplicity, assume that a PLL generates two clocks of the same frequency.
create_clock -name CLKA -pin PLL/CLKA -waveform {0 5} -period 10

create_clock -name CLKB -pin PLL/CLKB -waveform {2 7} -period 10
There is an insertion delay of 2ns coded into the waveform of CLKB.
It is difficult for paths from CLKA to CLKB to meet timing, therefore, this
insertion delay is included with CLKB to provide an additional 2ns time.
This insertion delay is expected to be added by the clock tree synthesis
tool.
This intention of the designer is not evident from the waveform shifting and
the create_clock definition. This constraint adds an additional 2ns even
afterclock tree synthesis add the 2ns delay, causing incorrect timing
analysis in propagated mode.
Correct
=======
set_clock_latency -clock CLKB 2ns

50
The above set of commands defines a network insertion delay of 2ns. In ideal
mode, this constraint is obeyed. In propagated mode, this constraint is
ignored and actual insertion delay is calculated.
The intention of the designer is clear in this case.
(4) Clock Latency, source and propagated

========================================
Use the set_clock_latency command to define the estimated network insertion
delay OR inherent source delay as follows:
set_clock latency -clock CLKA 2ns

set_clock_latency -clock CLKA 1ns -source
The first constraint specifies that the predicted insertion delay for clock
CLKA is 2ns and is used to shift the CLKA waveform in "ideal" mode. This
constraint is ignored in propagated mode. It is not necessary to define or
estimate network insertion delay for a clock, unless the design needs it to
meet timing as discussed above.
The second constraint specifies that there is an inherent insertion delay

of 1ns for the clock CLKA. This is present BOTH in "ideal" AND "propagated"
mode. Assume this source latency to be coming from outside of the chip or in
the above PLL case, arriving from the PLL itself.
The clock_latency constraint can be applied to generated clocks as well.
(5) Master (Source) of Generated Clock

======================================
For every create_generated_clock, the timing tool tries to find a path to the
source (master) clock. If it cannot find the path, CTS issues an error and
the timing tool might give unpredictable results.
Nested Generated Clocks

=======================
The master (source) of a generated clock can be another generated clock or
a create_clock constraint. In the case of several nested
create_generated_clocks, it is better to define each
create_generated_clock constraint with respect to the previous
create_generated_clock. Although doing so seems cumbersome, it is a
recommended approach.
The reasons are as follows. By default, for every generated clock defined,
timing tool tries to find a path to the source (master) clock by tracing
backwards. Recall that most generated clocks are defined at the output of
div_by registers. So, in trying to find a path to the source clock, the
timing tool allows itself to jump one sequential cell (such as a register).
Defining nested generated clock source as the previous generated clock helps
the tool find the right sequence of registers to calculate insertion delay.
51
Consider the following example.
create_clock -name CLKA -port CLKA -waveform {0 5} -period 10
create_generated_clock -name CLKB -source CLKA -div_by 2 core/div_by_2_reg/Q

create_generated_clock -name CLKC -source CLKB -div_by 2 core/div_by_4_reg/Q
create_generated_clock -name CLKD -source CLKC -div_by 2 core/div_by_8_reg/Q
The above sequence of commands is better than defining all the

create_generated_clocks with the source as CLKA. The reason is that, in
propagated mode, the above nested definition helps the timing tool calculate
the insertion delay correctly along the following path:
port CLKA ---> div_by_2 ----> div_by_4 ----> div_by_8 registers.
Instead, if all the create_generated clocks are defined with respect to the
main CLKA source, then the timing tool may find some other path other than
the above to calculate the insertion delay, resulting in incorrect timing
numbers.
How many generated clocks are needed?

=====================================
Note that the create_generated_clock constraint at a pin removes any other
clock definition at that point unless the -add option is used.
Consider an example in which two clocks, CLKA and CLKB, traverse to a MUX.
The output of the MUX goes to a div_by_2_reg.

----> goes to A pin of MUX
----> goes to B pin of MUX
Assume that the MUX goes to the CK pin of core/div_by_2 register, that is,
MUX ---> core/div_by_2_reg.
create_generated_clock -name CLKC -div_by 2 -pin core/div_by_2_reg/Q -source CLKA
This create_generated_clock definition will prevent CLKB from traversing

through the MUX.
That is, during timing analysis, CLKB is never seen after the div_by_2_reg.
During clock tree synthesis, only CLKA is balanced through the MUX and
div_by_2_reg and CLKB stops at the same register and treats that as a
SYNC pin. If CLKB is also desired to trace through the div_by_2_reg, then
add the additional generated clock as follows to the above constraints:
create_generated_clock -name CLKD -div_by 2 -pin core/div_by_2_reg/Q -source CLKB -add

52
(6) Create Generated Clock: div_by 1 or -comb

=============================================
By default, for every generated clock defined, the timing tool attempts to
find a path to the source (master) clock by tracing backwards. Recall that
most generated clocks are defined at the output of div_by registers. So, in
trying to find a path to the source clock, the timing tool allows itself to
jump one sequential cell (such as a register).
Consider the case when the generated clock is a -div_by 1 clock. This could
allow the tool to find a path to the source by jumping through a register
or through a combinational path. This may not be appropriate, if the correct
path from the source is combinational. In such cases, define the
generated_clock as -comb so that the tool is forced to find the combinational
path.
The following command is useful to get the full details of how the clock
latency is being calculated and the path it finds from the source clock to
the generated clock.
report_timing -type full_clock_expanded
10. Handling of the PLL to pad connection while building CTS.
11. Explain Clock tree Options for building better Clock Tree?
Five special clock options are available to address this situation. They greatly expand your ability
to control the clock building.
• Clock phase:
⇒ A clock phase is a timer event that is associated with a particular edge of the source
clock.
⇒ Each clock domain created with two clock phases: one for the rising edge and one for
the falling edge.
⇒ The clock phases are named after the timing clock with a :R or :F to denote rising or
falling clock phase.
⇒ These phases propagate through the circuit to the endpoints, so that events at the
clock pins can be traced to events driven by the clocks defined.
⇒ Because Tool is capable of propagating multiple clocks through a circuit, any clock
pin can have two or more clock phases associated with it.
⇒ For example, if CLKA and CLKB are connected to the i0 and i1 inputs of a 2:1
MUX, all clock pins in the fanout of this MUX have four clock phases associated
with them—CLKA:R, CLKA:F, CLKB:R, and CLKB:F. (This assumes that you
allow the propagation of multiple clock phases).
• Skew phase:
⇒ A skew phase is a collection of clock phases.
53
⇒ When a clock is defined, skew phases are also automatically created. They are
created with the same names as the clock phases that are created.
• Skew group
⇒ Clock tree skew balancing is done on a per-skew group basis.
⇒ A skew group is a subdivision of a clock phase.
⇒ Normally, all pins in a clock phase are in group 0 and are balanced as a group.
⇒ If you have created a set of pins labeled as group 1,
For example,
⇒ Then the skew phase containing these pins will be broken into two skew groups: one
containing the user-specified group, and one containing the “normal” clock pins.
⇒ This feature is useful if we want to segregate certain sets of clock pins and not
balance them with the default group. We can now define multiple groups of pins and
balance them independently.
• Skew anchor or Sink Point

⇒ A skew anchor is a clock endpoint pin that controls downstream clock tree.
⇒ For example, a register that is a divide-by-2 clock generator has a clock input pin that
is a skew anchor, because the arrival time of the clock at that clock pin affects the
arrival times of all the clocks in the generated domain that begins at the register Q
pin.
• Skew offset
⇒ The skew offset a floating point number to describe certain phase relationships that
exist, when placing multiple clocks with different periods or different edges of the
same clock different phases into the same skew phase.
⇒ Use the skew offset to adjust the arrival time of a specific clock phase when you
want to compare it to another clock phase in the same group.
12. How does a skew group relate to the clock phase and skew phase?
⇒ A skew group is a set of clock pins that have been declared as a group. By default, all
clock pins are placed in group 0. So each skew phase contains one group.
⇒ If the user has created a group of pins labeled by the number 1, for example, then the
skew phase that contains these pins will be broken into two skew groups:
⇒ (i) one containing all of the “normal” clock pins
⇒ (ii) A separate group containing the user-specified group.
⇒ This is useful for segregating groups of clock pins that have special circumstances
and that you do not want to be balanced with the default group.
Skew optimization is performed on a skew-group basis that takes place after the basic clock is
inserted
How will you synthesize clock tree?
o -Single clock-normal synthesis and optimization

o -Multiple clocks-Synthesis each clock seperately
54
o -Multiple clocks with domain crossing-Synthesis each clock seperately and

balance the skew
How many clocks were there in this project?
o -It is specific to your project

o -More the clocks more challenging !
How did you handle all those clocks?
o -Multiple clocks-->synthesize seperately-->balance the skew-->optimize the

clock tree
Are they come from seperate external resources or PLL?
o -If it is from seperate clock sources (i.e.asynchronous; from different pads or

pins) then balancing skew between these clock sources becomes challenging.
o -If it is from PLL (i.e.synchronous) then skew balancing is comparatively easy.
Why buffers are used in clock tree?
o To balance skew (i.e. flop to flop delay)
Which is more complicated when u have a 48 MHz and 500 MHz clock design?
o 500 MHz; because it is more constrained (i.e.lesser clock period) than 48 MHz
design.
Clock Gating
Clock tree consume more than 50 % of dynamic power. The components of this power are:
1) Power consumed by combinatorial logic whose values are changing on each clock edge
2) Power consumed by flip-flops and
3) The power consumed by the clock buffer tree in the design.
It is good design idea to turn off the clock when it is not needed. Automatic clock gating is
supported by modern EDA tools. They identify the circuits where clock gating can be inserted.
RTL clock gating works by identifying groups of flip-flops which share a common enable control
signal. Traditional methodologies use this enable term to control the select on a multiplexer
connected to the D port of the flip-flop or to control the clock enable pin on a flip-flop with clock
enable capabilities. RTL clock gating uses this enable signal to control a clock gating circuit
which is connected to the clock ports of all of the flip-flops with the common enable term.
Therefore, if a bank of flip-flops which share a common enable term have RTL clock gating
implemented, the flip-flops will consume zero dynamic power as long as this enable signal is
false.
There are two types of clock gating styles available. They are:
55
1) Latch-based clock gating

2) Latch-free clock gating.
Latch free clock gating
The latch-free clock gating style uses a simple AND or OR gate (depending on the edge on which
flip-flops are triggered). Here if enable signal goes inactive in between the clock pulse or if it
multiple times then gated clock output either can terminate prematurely or generate multiple
clock pulses. This restriction makes the latch-free clock gating style inappropriate for our single-
clock flip-flop based design.
Latch free clock gating
Latch based clock gating
The latch-based clock gating style adds a level-sensitive latch to the design to hold the enable
signal from the active edge of the clock until the inactive edge of the clock. Since the latch
captures the state of the enable signal and holds it until the complete clock pulse has been
generated, the enable signal need only be stable around the rising edge of the clock, just as in the
traditional ungated design style.
Latch based clock gating

56
Specific clock gating cells are required in library to be utilized by the synthesis tools. Availability
of clock gating cells and automatic insertion by the EDA tools makes it simpler method of low
power technique. Advantage of this method is that clock gating does not require modifications to
RTL description.
What is difference between normal buffer and clock buffer?
Clock net is one of the High Fanout Net(HFN)s. The clock buffers are designed with some
special property like high drive strength and less delay. Clock buffers have equal rise and fall
time. This prevents duty cycle of clock signal from changing when it passes through a chain of
clock buffers.
Normal buffers are designed with W/L ratio such that sum of rise time and fall time is minimum.
They too are designed for higher drive strength.
What is difference between HFN synthesis and CTS?
HFNs are synthesized in front end also.... but at that moment no placement information of
standard cells are available... hence backend tool collapses synthesized HFNs. It resenthesizes
HFNs based on placement information and appropriately inserts buffer. Target of this synthesis is
to meet delay requirements i.e. setup and hold.
For clock no synthesis is carried out in front end (why.....????..because no placement information
of flip-flops ! So synthesis won't meet true skew targets !!) ... in backend clock tree synthesis tries
to meet "skew" targets...It inserts clock buffers (which have equal rise and fall time, unlike
normal buffers !)... There is no skew information for any HFNs.
Is it possible to have a zero skew in the design?
Theoretically it is possible....!
Practically it is impossible....!!
Practically we cant reduce any delay to zero.... delay will exist... hence we try to make skew
"equal" (or same) rather than "zero"......now with this optimization all flops get the clock edge
with same delay relative to each other.... so virtually we can say they are having "zero skew " or
skew is "balanced".
13. How will you handle bi-directional pins during CTS?

14. Handling of high fan out nets like clock ,scan enable and reset pins
15. How to Build the clock tree for Hard macros ?
16. If you want to synchronize a nonclock pin—such as a combination logic gate’s pin, a macro’s
pin, or a sequential gate’s set/reset pin—you must define it as a synchronous pin explicitly.
17. Explain all CT topology? Which topology will you prefer for ur design?
- H –Tree
- Single Fish born
- Double fish born
57
18. What is the difference between CLOCK throughput and Offset?

19. What is Amoeba placement ? what its use?
7. Clocktree Optimization
1. What kind of optimizations done in CTO?
The different options in CTO to reduce skew are described in the following list
Buffer and Gate Sizing
o Sizes up or down buffers and gates to improve both

o skew and insertion delay.
o You can impose a limit on the type of buffers and gates
o to be used.
o No new clock tree hierarchy will be introduced during
o this operation. See figure 1.
Figure 1
2. Buffer and Gate Relocation

o Physical location of the buffer or gate is moved
o to reduce skew and insertion delay.
o this operation.
o See figure 2.
Figure 2
58
3. Level Adjustment
o Adjust the level of the clock pins to a higher or
o lower part of the clock tree hierarchy.
o this operation.
o See figure 3.
Figure.3
4. Reconfiguration
o Clustering of sequential logic.
59
o Buffer placement is performed after clustering.

o Longer runtimes.
o this operation.
o See figure 4.
Figure 4
5. Delay Insertion
o Delay is inserted for shortest paths.
o Delay cells can be user defined or can be extracted
o from by the tool.
o By adding new buffers to the clock path the clock
o tree hierarchy will change.
o See figure 5.
Figure 5
60
6. Dummy Load Insertion

o Uses load balancing to fine tune the clock
o skew by increasing the shortest path delay.
o Dummy load cells can be user defined or can be
o extracted by the tool.
7. No new clock tree hierarchy will be introduced during this operation.
o See figure 6.
Figure 6
61
Routing
Routing flow is shown in the Figure (1).
Figure (1) Routing flow [1]
Routing is the process of creating physical connections based on logical connectivity. Signal
pins are connected by routing metal interconnects. Routed metal paths must meet timing, clock
skew, max trans/cap requirements and also physical DRC requirements.
In grid based routing system each metal layer has its own tracks and preferred routing direction
which are defined in a unified cell in the standard cell library.
There are four steps of routing operations:
1. Global routing
2. Track assignment
2. Detail routing
3. Search and repair
62
Global Route assigns nets to specific metal layers and global routing cells. Global
route tries to avoid congested global cells while minimizing detours. Global route
also avoids pre-routed P/G, placement blockages and routing blockages.
Track Assignment (TA) assigns each net to a specific track and actual metal traces
are laid down by it. It tries to make long, straight traces to avoid the number of vias.
DRC is not followed in TA stage. TA operates on the entire design at once.
Detail Routing tries to fix all DRC violations after track assignment using a fixed
size small area known as “SBox”. Detail route traverses the whole design box by box
until entire routing pass is complete.
Search and Repair fixes remaining DRC violations through multiple iterative loops
using progressively larger SBox sizes.
What is congestion?
o If the number of routing tracks available for routing is less than the required
tracks then it is known as congestion.
63
8. Static Timing Analysis – STA
Timing Analysis in Physical Design
Timing analysis at back end requires knowledge of all clock related constraints provided at front
end. When .sdc file given to physical design tool (like Astro) its first object is to remove all Wire
Load Models (WLM) which are used for front end timing analysis. In backend there is no term
called as wire load model. Actual delays are calculated based on the RC value of metal layers. All
RC values like sidewall, junction and fringe capacitances are stored as Table Look Up (TLU)
format in technology file.
In backend design hold violation has higher priority compared to setup violation because hold
violation is related to data path of the design. Setup violation can be eliminated by slowing down
the clock.
Placement and routing goal is always to meet timing constraints provided by the .sdc file. If
latency and uncertainty are not set for clock at front end then at backend doing Clock Tree
Synthesis (CTS) is not possible.
Cell delay and net delay are stored as look up table.
Cell delay consists of transition, timing arcs and capacitances while net delay is constituted by
RCs only. Cell delays are available in libraries.
Net delays are specified in technology files. (In front end it is in WLM). Cell delays are fixed.
Net delays are not fixed and they depend on interconnect length and width. Net delay parameters
Rnet and Cnet are available as Table Look Up (TLU) provided by the vendor.
There is one more set of file TLU+ which account for Ultra Deep Sub Micron (UDSM) effects.
UDSM effects are not included in TLU file. A mapping file maps TLU to TLU+. UDSM effects
like Optical Proximity Correction (OPC), Resumption Enhanced Technology (RET) and
Litho Compliance Check (LCC) are not taken care by Astro. For the placement stage virtual RC
(based on Manhattan distance) Layout Parasitic Extraction (LPE) mode is used. For CTS real
R and virtual C is used and for routing Real RC is used.
Clock definition given to SAMM in front end design flow is generated as .sdc file from Design
Compiler is given below. It includes clock frequency, rise and fall time, setup and hold, skew and
insertion delay.
#####################################################
# Created by Design Compiler write_sdc on Fri May 11 18:35:45 2007
#####################################################
64
create_clock -period 4.85 -waveform {0 2.425} [get_ports {clock}]

set_clock_transition -rise 0.04 [get_clocks {clock}]
set_clock_transition -fall 0.04 [get_clocks {clock}]
set_clock_uncertainty 0.485 -setup [get_clocks {clock}]
set_clock_uncertainty 0.27 -hold [get_clocks {clock}]
set_clock_latency 0.45 [get_clocks {clock}]
set_clock_latency -source 0.45 [get_clocks {clock}]
Figure (2) Showing core power ring, Straps and Trunks
Why am I getting violation inside Block (which has closed in block level) during top level
Timing Analysis?
The input transition on the clock input affects the access time and setup-time of the flops clocked
by it. Choosing a fixed value of input clock transition in sub-chip level STA is optimistic and can
cause block internal violations in full-chip flat STA if the actual transition turns out to be
different Also because of OCV effects in the upstream logic, even the actual transition value can
have a min/max range. Even though CRPR removes any delay variation in the common portion of
the clock path, the transition variation at the split-point is however not compensated. This small
variation in clock-transition can result in increased clock skew, causing sub-chip level violations
when analyzed at the top-level. Such violations are not fixable at the top-level and needs fixing at
the sub-chip only.
65
In Figure 2, the point U4/Y is the clock split-point. Also the maximum transition of the clock at
that point is 150 ps while the transition for the min delay type is 130 ps. CRPR compensates for
the difference in delays accumulated till that point. However, the subsequent delay variation
because of small transition time difference is not compensated for and the resultant clock-skew
can cause additional timing violations inside the sub-chip. Note that this behavior is pessimistic in
PT but in the absence of any automated technique in the tool to remove this, it is important to
specify a mi-max transition window in sub-chip level STA.
Typically the maximum transition value is set to the transition target that is going to be used in
synthesizing the clock network of the chip while the minimum transition value is typically set to
the transition seen at the output of a strong clock-buffer driving a single load cell.
Internal Sub-chip violations due to rise/fall clock

Half-cycle paths inside a sub-chip can start violating in full-chip STA analysis if proper
budgeting is not done to take care of below:-
1) Duty-cycle distortion of sub-chip input clock
2) Rise/Fall transition variation of sub-chip input clock

66
In Figure 3, the top-level input clock (CLK) reaching the sub-chip has a duty cycle of 55%. If this
actual duty-cycle at the sub-chip input clock pin is different and pessimistic than what was
assumed during sub-chip level analysis, this could cause half-cycle path violations internal to the
sub-chip. Similarly, differences in rise and fall transition of the sub-chip input clock can further
deteriorate the duty-cycle inside the sub-chip. Note this also affects the timing windows of nets
that are clocked by the input clock and can cause new crosstalk violations if not properly
modeled.
Solution: Duty cycle distortion effect can be taken care of in PT by modifying the input clock
waveform at the sub-chip level. However this method has two disadvantages:
(1) During sub-chip closure it is not known whether the high-time of the clock is more than
the low-time or vice-versa.
(2) Optimistic for PT-SI analysis where timing window changes with changing duty cycle.
One solution is to expand the latency window of the sub-chip input clock fall edge, which has
been discussed in section 4.2, by the maximum allowed duty cycle distortion (for example 10%
of the clock period) in both directions. Figure 4 described one such example.
67
Modeling arrival time of sub-chips inputs

For PT-SI analysis, the aggressors are pruned on the basis of overlap between the timing windows
of the victim and aggressor signals. The min-max input delay assigned to the sub-chip input is
taken as the timing window for PT-SI analysis. In top-level analysis, if the arrival window at a
block input pin is different than what is being assumed during block-level closure, it can cause SI
related violations inside the block. Figure 4 shows the example of an input port, which was
constrained to a min-max input delay of 3 ns and 7 ns respectively. However at the top-level, the
same input ended up having a timing window of 5 ns (higher than the budgeted timing window of
4 ns).
The electro migration verification requires average, peak and/or RMS current density
information. If the current in the metal flows in one direction, failures are mainly caused by
material transportations, and the average current should be used for EM check. On the other
hand, if the current flows bi-directionally, thermal effect is the main cause for failures, and the
RMS current should be used.
68
Operating Condition Analysis Modes
Semiconductor device parameters can vary with conditions such as fabrication process, operating
temperature, and power supply voltage. In PT, the set_operating_conditions
command specifies the operating conditions for analysis, so that PT can use the appropriate set of
parameter values in the technology library.
PT offers three analysis modes with respect to operating conditions, called the single, best-
case/worst-case, and on-chip variation modes:
• In the single operating condition mode, PT uses a single set of delay parameters for the
whole circuit, based on one set of process, temperature, and voltage conditions.
• In the best-case/worst-case mode, PT simultaneously checks the circuit for the two
extreme operating conditions, minimum and maximum. For setup checks, it uses
maximum delays for all paths. For hold checks, it uses minimum delays for all paths.
This mode lets you check both extremes in a single analysis run, thereby reducing overall
runtime for a full analysis.
• In the on-chip variation mode, PT performs a conservative analysis that allows both
minimum and maximum delays to apply to different paths at the same time. For a setup
check, it uses maximum delays for the launch clock path and data path, and minimum
delays for the capture clock path. For a hold check, it uses minimum delays for the launch
clock path and data path, and maximum delays for the capture clock path.
Table 11-1 and Table 11-2 show the clock arrival times, delays, operating conditions, and delay
derating used for setup checks and for hold checks under each of the operating condition analysis
modes.
Table 11-1 Timing Parameters Used for Setup Checks
Analysis
Launch clock path Data path Capture clock path
mode
Late clock, maximum Early clock, minimum

Single Maximum delay,
delay in clock path, single delay in clock path, single
operating single operating
operating cond. (no operating cond. (no
condition cond. (no derating)
derating) derating)
Late clock, maximum Early clock, minimum

Best- Maximum delay, late
delay in clock path, late delay in clock path, early
case/worst- derating, worst-case
derating, worst-case derating, worst-case
case mode operating cond.
operating cond. operating cond.
On-chip Late clock, maximum Maximum delay, late Early clock, minimum
variation mode delay in clock path, late derating, worst-case delay in clock path, early
derating, worst-case operating cond. derating, best-case
69
Table 11-2 Timing Parameters Used for Hold Checks
Analysis
Launch clock path Data path Capture clock path
mode
Early clock, minimum Late clock, maximum

Single Minimum delay,
delay in clock path, single delay in clock path, single
operating single operating
operating cond. (no operating cond. (no
condition cond. (no derating)
derating) derating)
Early clock, minimum Minimum delay, Late clock, maximum

Best-
delay in clock path, early early derating, best- delay in clock path, late
case/worst-
derating, best-case case operating cond. derating, best-case
case mode
Early clock, minimum Minimum delay, Late clock, maximum

On-chip
delay in clock path, early early derating, best- delay in clock path, late
variation mode
derating, best-case case operating cond. derating, worst-case
Min-Max Delay Calculations
The set_operating_conditions command defines the operating conditions for timing

analysis and specifies the analysis type: single, best-case/worst-case, or on-chip variation. The
operating conditions must be defined in a specified library or pair of libraries.
By default, PT performs analysis under one set of operating conditions at a time (single operating
condition mode). Using this mode, you need to perform multiple analysis runs to handle multiple
operating conditions. Typically, you need to analyze at least two operating conditions to ensure
that the design has no timing violations: best case (minimum path report) for hold checks and
worst case (maximum path report) for setup checks.
PT can simultaneously perform timing analysis for the best-case and worst-case operating
conditions. Compared to running single operating condition analysis, you can save time by using
minimum and maximum (min-max) analysis in a single timing analysis run to report timing paths
at the two extremes of operating conditions. You can choose either best-case/worst-case analysis
or on-chip variation analysis.
In the best-case/worst-case mode, each setup check uses delays computed at the maximum
operating condition and each hold check uses delays computed for at the minimum operating
condition.
In the on-chip variation mode, PT performs a conservative analysis that allows both minimum
and maximum delays to apply to different paths at the same time. For setup checks, it uses
maximum delays for the launch clock path and data path, and minimum delays for the capture
70
clock path. For hold checks, it uses minimum delays for the launch clock path and data path, and
maximum delays for the capture clock path.
In the on-chip variation mode, when a path segment is shared between the clock paths that launch
and capture data, the path segment might be treated as having two different delays at the same
time. Not accounting for the shared path segment can result in a pessimistic analysis. For a more
accurate analysis, this pessimism can be corrected. For more information, see “Clock
Reconvergence Pessimism Removal”.
A min-max analysis considers the minimum and maximum values specified for the following
design parameters:
• Input and output external delays • Net resistance
• Delays annotated from Standard • Net wire load model

Delay Format (SDF)
• Clock latency
• Port wire load models
• Clock transition time
• Port fanout number
• Input port driving cell
• Net capacitance
For example, to calculate a maximum delay, PT uses the longest path, worst-case operating
conditions, latest-arriving clock edge, maximum cell delays, longest transition times, and so on.
You can do min-max analysis using a single library with minimum and maximum operating
conditions specified, or two libraries, one for the best-case conditions sand one for the worst-case
conditions. For more information, see “Using Two Libraries for Analysis”.
You can enable minimum and maximum analysis in one of these two ways:
• Set the minimum and maximum operating conditions with the

set_operating_conditions command:
pt_shell> set_operating_conditions -min BCCOM -max WCCOM
• Read in an SDF file, then use the option of the SDF reader to read both the minimum and
maximum delay from the SDF file:
pt_shell> read_sdf -analysis_type bc_wc my_design.sdf
Min-Max Cell and Net Delay Values
Each timing arc in the design can have a minimum and a maximum delay to account for
variations in operating conditions. You can specify these values in either of the following ways:
• Annotate delays from one or two SDF files
• Have PT calculate the delay

71
To annotate delays from one or two SDF files, do one of the following:
• Use min and max from the SDF triplet.
• Use two SDF files.
• Use either of the preceding choices, with additional multipliers for maximum and
minimum value.
To have PT calculate the delay, do one of the following:
• Use a single operating condition with timing derating factors to model variation.
• Use two operating conditions (best-case and worst-case) to model the possible on-chip
variation.
• Use either of the preceding choices with timing derating factors for the minimum and
maximum value.
• Use separate derating factors for cells versus nets.
• Use separate derating factors for different timing checks (setup, hold, and so forth).
Table 11-3 summarizes the usage of minimum and maximum delays from SDF triplet data.
Table 11-3 Min-Max Delays From SDF Triplet Data
Analysis Delay based on operating

One SDF file Two SDF files
mode conditions
Setup - max data at operating

Single condition - min capture clock at Setup - (a:b:c) -
operating operating cond. Hold - min data at (a:b:c)Hold -
condition operating condition - max capture (a:b:c) - (a:b:c)
clock at operating cond.
Setup - max data at worst case - min Setup SDF1 - (a:b:c)

Setup - (a:b:c) -
Best case– capture clock at worst caseHold - SDF2 - (a:b:c)Hold
(a:b:c)Hold -
worst case min data at best case - max capture SDF1 - (a:b:c)
(a:b:c) - (a:b:c).
clock at best case SDF2 - (a:b:c)
Setup - max data at worst case - min Setup SDF1 - (a:b:c)

Setup - (a:b:c) -
On-chip capture clock at best caseHold - min SDF2 - (a:b:c)Hold
(a:b:c)Hold -
variation data best case - max capture clock SDF1 - (a:b:c)
(a:b:c) - (a:b:c)
at worst case SDF2 - (a:b:c)
The triplet displayed in bold italic is the triplet that PT uses.

72
Setup and Hold Checks
This section provides examples of how setup and hold timing checks are done for a single
operating condition, for simultaneous best-case/worst-case operating conditions, and for on-chip
variation.
Path Delay Tracing for Setup and Hold Checks
Figure 11-1 shows how setup and hold checks are done in PT.
Figure 11-1 Design Example
• The setup timing check from pin DL2/ck to DL2/d considers
o Maximum delay for clock_path1
o Maximum delay for data path (data_path_max)
o Minimum delay for clock_path2
• The hold timing check from pin DL2/ck to DL2/d considers
o Minimum delay for clock_path1
o Minimum delay for data path (data_path_min)
o Maximum delay for clock_path2
The data_path_min and data_path_max values can be different due to multiple topological paths
in the combinational logic that connects DL1/q to DL2/d.
Setup Timing Check for Worst-Case Conditions
Figure 11-2 shows how cell delays are computed for worst-case conditions. To simplify the
example, the net delays are ignored.
73
Figure 11-2 Setup Check Using Worst-Case Conditions
PT checks for a setup violation as follows
In the equation,
clockpath1 = 0.8 + 0.6 = 1.4 datapathmax = 3.8 clockpath2 = 0.8 + 0.65 = 1.45 setup = 0.2
The clock period must be at least 1.4 + 3.8 – 1.45 + 0.2 = 3.95.
Hold Timing Check for Best-Case Conditions
Figure 11-3 shows how cell delays are computed for best-case conditions. Note that the cell
delays are different from the delays in Figure 11-2.
Figure 11-3 Hold Check Using Best-Case Conditions
PT checks for a hold violation as follows:
In the equation,
clockpath1 = 0.5 + 0.3 = 0.8 datapathmin = 1.6 clockpath2 = 0.5 + 0.35 = 0.85 hold = 0.1
No hold violation exists because 0.8 + 1.6 – 0.85 – 0.1 = 1.45, which is greater than 0.
Simultaneous Best-Case/Worst-Case Conditions
PT can operate in a mode that computes delays simultaneously for best-case and worst-case
conditions for hold and setup checks, enabling you to check both conditions in one timing
74
analysis run. In terms of path delay tracing, PT uses worst-case conditions for setup checks and
best-case conditions for hold checks. The timing reports for setup and hold checks are the same as
for Figure 11-2 and Figure 11-3.
In simultaneous mode, PT does not compare data arrival at worst-case conditions to clock arrival
at best-case conditions. In this mode, the timing reports show delays computed in the same
operating condition (worst case for setup or best case for hold).
Path Tracing in the Presence of Delay Variation
In Figure 11-4, each delay of a cell or a net has an uncertainty because of on-chip variation. For
example, you can specify that on-chip variation can be between 80 percent and 100 percent of the
nominal delays for worst-case conditions. Figure 11-4 shows the resulting delays.
Figure 11-4 On-Chip Variation for Worst-Case Conditions
In this mode, for a given path, the maximum delay is computed at 100 percent of worst case, and
the minimum delay is computed at 80 percent of worst case. PT checks for a setup violation as
follows:
In the expression,
clockpath1 = 0.80 + 0.60 = 1.40 (at 100% of worst case) datapath_max = 3.80 (at 100% of worst
case) clockpath2 = 0.64 + 0.52 = 1.16 (at 80% of worst case) setup = 0.2 The clock period must
be at least 1.40 + 3.80 - 1.16 + 0.2 = 4.24
On-chip variation affects the clock latencies; therefore, you only need it when you are using
propagated clock latency. If you specify ideal clock latency, you can have PT consider on-chip
variation by increasing the clock uncertainty values with the set_clock_uncertainty
command.
Specifying the Analysis Mode
The following examples demonstrate how to specify the operating condition analysis modes and
how PT calculates the delays in each mode.
Single Operating Condition Analysis
The commands for reporting one operating condition (best case or worst case) and the reported
paths are shown in the following sections.
75
The commands for setting and reporting only the best-case operating conditions are
pt_shell> set_operating_conditions BEST

pt_shell> report_timing -delay_type min
Figure 11-5 shows the path reported.
Figure 11-5 Timing Path for One Operating Condition—Best Case
The commands for setting and reporting only the worst-case operating conditions are
pt_shell> set_operating_conditions WORST

pt_shell> report_timing -delay_type max
Figure 11-6 shows the path reported.
Figure 11-6 Timing Path for One Operating Condition—Worst Case
Best-Case/Worst-Case Analysis
The command sequence for setting and reporting simultaneous best-case and worst-case
operating conditions is:
pt_shell> set_operating_conditions -min BEST -max WORST

Figure 11-7 shows the paths reported for the best case and the worst case when you set
simultaneous best-case and worst-case operating conditions.
76
Figure 11-7 Timing Paths for Best-Case/Worst-Case Operating Conditions
On-Chip Variation Analysis
The command sequence for running on-chip variation analysis is
pt_shell> set_operating_conditions -analysis_type

on_chip_variation -min MIN -max MAX
Figure 11-8 shows the paths reported when you run on-chip variation analysis.
Figure 11-8 Timing Path Reported During On-Chip Variation Analysis

77
As shown in Figure 11-9, the early arrival time at the AND gate is 0.5 ns and the late arrival
time is 1.5 ns, assuming the gate delay is zero.
Figure 11-9 Early and Late Arrival Time
Here are some additional on-chip variation examples.
Example 1
This command sequence performs timing analysis for on-chip variation 20 percent below the
worst-case commercial (WCCOM) operating condition.

on_chip_variation WCCOM
pt_shell> set_timing_derate -early 0.8
pt_shell> report_timing
Example 2
78
This command sequence performs timing analysis for on-chip variation between two predefined
operating conditions: WCCOM_scaled and WCCOM.

on_chip_variation -min WCCOM_scaled -max WCCOM
Example 3
This command sequence performs timing analysis with on-chip variation. For cell delays, the on-
chip variation is between 5 percent above and 10 percent below the SDF back-annotated values.
For net delays, the on-chip variation is between 2 percent above and 4 percent below the SDF
back-annotated values. For cell timing checks, the on-chip variation is 10 percent above the SDF
values for setup checks and 20 percent below the SDF values for hold checks.
pt_shell> set_timing_derate -cell_delay -early 0.90

pt_shell> set_timing_derate -cell_delay -late 1.05
pt_shell> set_timing_derate -net -early 0.96
pt_shell> set_timing_derate -net -late 1.02
pt_shell> set_timing_derate -cell_check -early 0.80
pt_shell> set_timing_derate -cell_check -late 1.10
Using Two Libraries for Analysis
The set_min_library command directs PT to use two technology libraries simultaneously

for minimum-delay and maximum-delay analysis. For example, you can choose two libraries that
have the following characteristics:
• Best-case and worst-case operating conditions
• Optimistic and pessimistic wire load models
• Minimum and maximum timing delays
To perform an analysis of this type, use the set_min_library command to create a

minimum/maximum association between two libraries. You specify one library to be used for
maximum delay analysis and another to be used for minimum delay analysis. Only the maximum
library should be present in the link path.
When you use the set_min_library command, PT first checks the library cell in the
maximum library, and then looks in the minimum library to see if a match exists. If a library cell
with the same name, the same pins, and the same timing arcs exists in the minimum library, PT
uses that timing information for minimum analysis. Otherwise, it uses the information in the
maximum library. For information about the set_min_library command, see the man page.
79
Setting Derating Factors
You can have PT adjust minimum delays and maximum delays by specified factors to model the
effects of operating conditions. This adjustment of calculated delays is called derating. Derating
affects the delay and slack values reported by the report_timing command and other
reporting commands.
The set_timing_derate command specifies the adjustment factors and the scope of the
design to be affected by derating. For example,
pt_shell> set_timing_derate -early -cell_delay 0.9

pt_shell> set_timing_derate -late -cell_delay 1.2
The first of these two commands causes all early (shortest-path) delays to be decreased by 10%,
such as the capture clock path in a setup check. The second command causes all late (longest-
path) delays to be increased by 20%, such as the launch clock path and the data path in a setup
check. These changes result in a more conservative analysis than leaving delays at their original
calculated values.
The -early or -late option specifies whether the shortest-path or longest-path delays are
affected by the derating factor. Exactly one of these two options must be used in the command.
To set both early and late derating, use two set_timing_derate commands. Early path
delays include the capture clock path for a setup check, and the launch clock path and data path
for a hold check. Late path delays include the launch clock path and data path for a setup check,
and the capture clock path for a hold check.
The fixed-point value in the command specifies the derating factor applied to the delays. Use a
value of less than 1.0 to reduce the delay of any given path or cell check. Similarly, use a derating
factor greater than 1.0 to increase the delay of any given path or cell check. Typically, derating
factors less than 1.0 are used for early (shortest-path) delays and greater than 1.0 for late (longest-
path) delays. This approach results in a more conservative analysis.
The last derating value to be set overrides any previously set values. To reset the derating factor
globally to 1.0, use the reset_timing_derate command.
Delays are adjusted according to the following formula:
delay_new = old_delay + ( (derate_factor – 1.0) * abs(old_delay) )
When the delay is a positive value (the usual case), this equation is reduced to:
delay_new = old_delay * derate_factor
For negative delay, the delay adjustment equation is reduced to:

80
delay_new = old_delay * ( 2.0 – derate_factor )
Delays can be negative in some unusual situations. For example, if the input transition is slow and
the output transition is fast for a cell, the time at which the input signal reaches the 50% trip point
can be later than the time at which the output signal reaches the 50% trip point. The resulting
delay from input to output is negative. If you are using PT SI , a similar situation can occur for a
net due to a change in delay caused by crosstalk.
The -rise or -fall option specifies whether rise delays or fall delays are affected by derating.
If neither option is used, both types of delays are affected. The -clock or -data option
specifies whether clock paths or data paths are affected by derating. If neither option is used, both
types of paths are affected. A clock path is a path from a clock source to the clock input pin of a
launch or capture register. A data path is a path starting from an input port or from the data output
of a launch register, and ending at an output port or at the data input of a capture register.
The -net_delay, -cell_delay, and -cell_check options let you specify the functional
scope of the design to be affected by derating. The -net_delay option derates net delays (the
delay from a net driver to a net load). The -cell_delay option derates cell delays (the delay
from a cell input to a cell output). The -cell_check option derates cell timing checks (cell
hold and removal times for early derating, or cell setup and recovery times for late derating). You
can use any combination of these three options. If you do not use any of these options, the
derating factor applies to net delays and cell delays, but not cell timing checks.
If you want only some cells or nets to be affected by derating, you can list them in the command.
The list can include library cells, hierarchical cells, leaf-level cells, and nets. In the absence of a
list, the whole design is affected.
To set a derate factor on all nets within a hierarchy, use the -net_delay option. For example,
pt_shell> set_timing_derate -net_delay -early 0.8 [get_cells

hier_cell]
If you do not specify the -net_delay option, only the cells have the derate factor set on them.
This feature allows you to specify different derate factors for delta net delays and non-delta net
delays. To set a derate factor for non-delta net delays only use the -static option:
set_timing_derate -net_delay -static -early/late -data/clock $net

$value1
To set a derate factor for delta net delays only use the -dynamic option:
set_timing_derate -net_delay -dynamic -early/late -data/clock

$net $value2
If both -static and -dynamic options are omitted, the derate factor is applied to both delta
and non-delta net delays.
81
Different sets of derate factors can be specified for a deterministic PT analysis and a variational
PT analysis. To set a derate factor for deterministic delays, use the -scalar option. To set a
derate factor for delays that have been computed using variational information, use the -
variation option. For more information about using derate factors in a variation analysis, see
the PT User Guide: Advanced Timing Analysis.If you set a derating factor on a net that crosses a
hierarchical boundary, the derating affects the whole net, not just the part of the net listed in the
command. Also, if you set a derating factor on a hierarchical cell, the derating factor extends to
cells and nets within and below the hierarchy. PT issues a warning message when it extends
derating across a hierarchical boundary.
In case of conflict between different set_timing_derate values specified for different

levels of the design, the more detailed command (with the narrowest scope) has precedence. For
example, the following commands have decreasing order of precedence:
pt_shell> set_timing_derate -late -cell_delay 1.4 [get_cells

inv*]
# derates a collection of cells in the design
pt_shell> set_timing_derate -late -cell_delay 1.3 \
[get_lib_cells class/ND*]
# derates cells in a collection of cells in a library
class
pt_shell> set_timing_derate -late -cell_delay 1.2
# derates all cells
pt_shell> set_timing_derate -late -1.1
# derates all nets and cells
In a hierarchical design, derating is applied to cells in the following order of precedence (from
highest to lowest priority):
1. Leaf-level cell
2. Hierarchical cell (containing leaf-

level cells)
3. Library cell
4. Design
Physical Design 82
PT stores and checks global timing derating factors against block scope. These stored values are
checked to make sure that the top-level ranges are completely within the block-level range. For
cases where a single value is used at the block level (that is, when the early derate is the same as
the late derate), the top-level values must be the same as well. If derate values are not specified at
either the block or top levels, the derate value used is 1.0 and the scope check is performed
against this value.
If you use the set_timing_derate command while the analysis is set to single operating
condition mode, PT automatically changes to the on-chip variation mode, like using this
command:

on_chip_variation
From this mode, you can change to the best-case/worst-case mode, if desired:
pt_shell> set_operating_conditions -analysis_type bc_wc
If the analysis mode is already set to best-case/worst-case, it stays in that mode when you use
set_timing_derate.
If you use the -derate option with the report_timing command, the global, net-
specific, or instance-specific derate factor is applied to each cell or net is reported in a column
next to the incremental delay for each item.
To obtain a report on the current timing derating factors that have been set, use the
report_timing_derate command. For example,
pt_shell> report_timing_derate
# reports all derating settings
pt_shell> report_timing_derate [get_cells U*]
# reports derating settings on all cells named U*
Use the -include_inherited option to include reporting of derating values inherited from
other objects, such as a lower-level cell that inherits its derating values from a higher-level cell.
Otherwise, the command reports only the derating values set directly on the specified object.
Clock Reconvergence Pessimism Removal
Clock reconvergence pessimism is an accuracy limitation that occurs when two different clock
paths partially share a common physical path segment and the shared segment is assumed to have
a minimum delay for one path and a maximum delay for the other path. This condition can occur
any time that launch and capture clock paths use different delays, most commonly with on-chip
variation analysis (see Table 11-4). Automated correction of this inaccuracy is called clock
reconvergence pessimism removal CRPR.
PT performs clock reconvergence pessimism removal, when enabled, at the same time as regular
timing analysis. You need to enable the clock reconvergence pessimism removal before you do
timing analysis. The following examples demonstrate how the pessimism removal works.
Physical Design 83
On-Chip Variation Example
Consider the following command sequence for running on-chip variation analysis and the
corresponding design in Figure 11-10:

on_chip_variation -min MIN -max MAX
pt_shell> set_timing_derate -net -early 0.80
Figure 11-10 Clock Reconvergence Pessimism Example
Figure 11-10 shows how the analysis is done. Each delay (considered equal for rising and falling
transitions to simplify this example) has a minimum value and a maximum value computed for
the minimum and maximum operating conditions.
The setup check at LD2/CP considers the clock path to the source latch (CLK to LD1/CP) at 100
percent worst case, and the clock path to the destination latch (CLK to LD2/CP) at 80 percent
worst case.
Although this is a valid approach, the test is pessimistic because clock path1 (CLK to LD1/CP)
and clock path2 (CLK to LD2/CP) share the clock tree until the output of U1. The shared segment
is called the common portion, consisting of just cell U1 in this example. The last cell output in the
shared clock segment is called the common point, which is the output of U1 in this case.
The setup check considers that cell U1 simultaneously has two different delays, 0.64 and 0.80,
resulting in a pessimistic analysis in the amount of 0.16. This amount, obtained by subtracting the
earliest arrival time from the latest arrival time at the common point, is called the clock
reconvergence pessimism .
This inaccuracy also occurs in an analogous way for the hold test at the LD2 latch.
Reconvergent Logic Example

Physical Design 84
Figure 11-11 shows a situation where clock reconvergence can occur, even in the absence of on-
chip variation analysis. In this example, there is reconvergent logic in the clock network. The two
clock paths that feed into the multiplexer cannot be active at the same time, but an analysis could
consider both the shorter and longer paths for one setup or hold check.
Figure 11-11 Reconvergent Logic in a Clock Network
Minimum Pulse Width Checking Example
The report_constraints command checks for minimum pulse width violations in clock
networks (as specified by the set_min_pulse_width command) and at cell inputs (as
specified in the technology library). Clock reconvergence pessimism removal, when enabled, can
increase the accuracy of minimum pulse width checking.
For example, consider the circuit shown in Figure 11-12. The external clock source has early
and late source latency set on it. In addition, the two buffers in the path have minimum and
maximum rise and fall delay values defined.
The report_constraints command checks the pulse width of the clock signal in the
clock network and upon reaching the flip-flop. For level-high pulse width checking, PT considers
maximum delay for the rising edge and minimum delay for the falling edge of the clock (and
conversely for level-low pulse width checking).
For the example shown in Figure 11-12, in the absence of clock reconvergence pessimism
removal, the worst-case pulse width is very small and violates the pulse width constraint of the
flip-flop. However, this analysis is pessimistic because it assumes simultaneous worst-case delays
for rising and falling edges. In a real circuit, rising-edge and falling-edge delays are at least
somewhat correlated. For example, for the delay from the external clock source to the CLK input
port, if the rising-edge delay is at the minimum, –1.3, the falling-edge delay is probably equal or
close to –1.3, and not at the maximum of +1.4.
To account for correlation between rising-edge and falling-edge delays, enable clock
reconvergence pessimism removal. In that case, PT adds a certain amount of slack back into the
minimum pulse width calculation. The amount added is equal to the range of minimum rise delay
or the range maximum fall delay for the path, whatever is smaller:
where crp = clock reconvergence pessimism, Mr = cumulative maximum rise delay, mr =

cumulative minimum rise delay, Mf = cumulative maximum fall delay, and mf = cumulative
Physical Design 85
minimum fall delay. For an example of this calculation applied to pulse width checking, see
Figure 11-12.
Figure 11-12 Minimum Pulse Width Analysis
Using CRPR Commands
To enable clock reconvergence pessimism removal, set the timing_remove_clock_

reconvergence_pessimism variable to true before you begin timing analysis. By default,
the setting is false and the algorithm is disabled. Using the algorithm results in a more accurate
(less pessimistic) analysis, but causes an increase in runtime and memory usage. Any change in
this variable setting causes a complete timing update, like the update_timing -full
command.
When clock reconvergence pessimism removal is enabled, PT uses the correction algorithm and
reports the results in all the major types of reports: report_timing ,
report_constraint , report_analysis_coverage , and
report_bottleneck_analysis .
Physical Design 86
For the on-chip variation example shown in Figure 11-10, with clock reconvergence pessimism
removal enabled, you might produce a report like this:
****************************************
Report : timing
-path full
-delay max
-max_paths 1
Design : my_design
****************************************
Startpoint: LD1 (rising edge-triggered flip-flop clocked by

CLK)
Endpoint: LD2 (rising edge-triggered flip-flop clocked by
CLK)
Path Group: CLK
Path Type: max
Point Incr Path

--------------------------------------------------------
clock CLK (rise edge) 0.00 0.00
clock network delay (propagated) 1.40 1.40
LD1/CP (FD2) 0.00 1.40 r
LD1/Q (FD2) 0.60 2.00 f
U1/z (AN2) 3.20 5.20 f
data arrival time 5.20

clock network delay (propagated) 1.16 7.16
clock reconvergence pessimism 0.16 7.32
clock uncertainty 0.00 7.32
LD2/CP (FD2) 7.32 r
library setup time -0.20 7.12
data required time 7.12
--------------------------------------------------------
data required time 7.12
data arrival time -5.20
--------------------------------------------------------
slack (MET) 1.92
Pessimism can also be introduced on paths that fan out from a clock source to the data pin of a
sequential device, such as the path shown in Figure 11-13 (technically, this would not be
considered clock reconvergence pessimism because the launching path would be considered to be
a data path, not a clock path).
Figure 11-13 Timing Path Fanout from Clock Source to Data Pin
Physical Design 87
To remove pessimism for these paths, set the timing_crpr_remove_clock_to_data_crp variable to

true before you begin timing analysis.
Note: Calculating CRP for such paths involves analyzing the sequential device associated with
each clock to data path separately in the timing analysis. This may cause a severe performance
penalty during a timing update.
To specify whether to perform clock reconvergence pessimism removal on clock paths that have
opposite-sense transitions in a shared path segment, set the
timing_clock_reconvergence_pessimism variable. You can set this variable to normal (the
default setting) or same_transition . For the default setting, PT still performs clock
reconvergence pessimism removal with opposite-sense transitions in the shared path segment. In
that case, if the two transition types produce different correction values, the smaller of the two
values is used. For same_transition , PT performs clock reconvergence pessimism removal
only if transitions in the shared path segment have the same sense.
Table 11-4 summarizes the application of either rising or falling clock reconvergence pessimism
based on the transition types at the common point in the clock path and
timing_clock_reconvergence_pessimism variable setting.
Table 11-4 Application of Rise/Fall CRP Value Based on Variable Setting
Transition types
timing_clock_reconvergence_ timing_clock_reconvergence_
at common point
pessimism = normal pessimism = same_transition
in clock paths
Both rising crp_rise pessimism removed crp_rise pessimism removed
Both falling crp_fall pessimism removed crp_fall pessimism removed
One rising, one smaller of crp_rise or crp_fall

No pessimism removed
falling removed
Transition types at
timing_clock_reconvergence_ timing_clock_reconvergence_
common point in
pessimism = normal pessimism = same_transition
clock paths
For the minimum pulse width checking example shown in Figure 11-12, you could set up the
analysis with a script similar to this:
Physical Design 88
set_operating_conditions -analysis_type on_chip_variation

create_clock -period 8 CLK
set_propagated_clock [all_clocks]
set_clock_latency -source -early -1.3 CLK
set_clock_latency -source -late 1.4 CLK
set_annotated_delay -cell -from CT1/A -to CT1/Z 1
set_annotated_delay -cell -from CT2/A -to CT2/Z -min -rise 0.8
set_annotated_delay -cell -from CT2/A -to CT2/Z -max -rise 1.8
set_annotated_delay -cell -from CT2/A -to CT2/Z -min -fall 0.85
set_annotated_delay -cell -from CT2/A -to CT2/Z -max -fall 2.03
With clock reconvergence pessimism removal enabled, a report_constraint report on the

path would look like this:
Point Incr Path

----------------------------------------------------------
clock network delay (propagated) 4.20 4.20 r
FF1/CP 0.00 4.20 r
open edge arrival time 4.20
clock CLK (fall edge) 4.00 4.00

clock network delay (propagated) 0.55 4.55 f
FF1/CP 0.00 4.55 f
clock reconvergence pessimism 3.70 8.25
close edge arrival time 8.25
----------------------------------------------------------
required pulse width (high) 3.50
actual pulse width 4.05
----------------------------------------------------------
slack 0.55
You can set a threshold that allows PT to ignore small amounts of clock reconvergence
pessimism. For computational efficiency, PT merges multiple points for CRPR calculations when
the CRP differences between adjacent points are smaller than the specified threshold. This
merging of nodes can reduce CPU and memory usage, without a significant loss of accuracy
when an appropriate threshold is set.
The timing_crpr_threshold_ps variable specifies the threshold. The units are

picoseconds, irrespective of the time units of the technology library. By default, the variable is set
to 20, which allows adjacent nodes to be merged when the difference in clock reconvergence
pessimism is 20 ps or less.
For a good balance between performance and accuracy, try setting this variable to one-half the
stage delay of a typical gate in the clock network. (The stage delay is gate delay plus net delay.)
You might want to use a larger value during the design phase for faster analysis, and then a
smaller value for sign-off accuracy.
CRPR and Crosstalk Analysis
When you perform crosstalk analysis using PT SI, a change in delay due to crosstalk along the
common segment of a clock path can be pessimistic, but only for a zero-cycle check. A zero-
Physical Design 89
cycle check occurs when the exact same clock edge drives both the launch and capture events for
the path. For other types of paths, a change in delay due to crosstalk is not pessimistic because the
change cannot be assumed to be identical for the launch and capture clock edges.
Accordingly, the CRPR algorithm removes crosstalk-induced delays in a common portion of the
launch and capture clock paths only if the check is a zero-cycle check. In a zero-cycle check,
aggressor switching affects both the launch and capture signals in the same way at the same time.
Here are some cases where the CRPR might apply to crosstalk-induced delays:
• Standard hold check
• Hold check on a register with the Q-bar output connected to the D input, as in a divide-
by-2 clock circuit
• Hold check with crosstalk feedback due to parasitic capacitance between the Q-bar output
and D input of a register
• Hold check on a multicycle path set to zero, such as circuit that uses a single clock edge
for launch and capture, with designed-in skew between launch and capture
• Certain setup checks where transparent latches are involved
CRPR with Dynamic Clock Arrivals
A similar scenario to CRPR with crosstalk can occur if dynamic annotations have been set in the
clock network. Dynamic annotations include dynamic clock latency and dynamic rail voltage, set
by set_clock_latency and set_voltage commands respectively. These dynamic
annotations can lead to dynamic clock arrivals. CRPR handles these dynamic clock arrivals in the
same way as it handles delays due to crosstalk. The CRPR value is calculated using dynamic
clock arrivals for zero cycle paths only. For all other paths, only the static component of the clock
arrival is used thus producing more accurate results.
An example of such dynamic annotations is as follows:
pt_shell> set_clock_latency -early -source 2.5 -dynamic -0.5

[get_clocks CLK]
pt_shell> set_clock_latency -source -late 5.5 -dynamic 0.5
[get_clocks CLK]
The first of these two commands specifies a total early source latency of 2.5, consisting of static
source latency of 3.0 and dynamic source latency of –0.5. The second command specifies a total
late source latency of 5.5, consisting of static source latency of 5.0 and dynamic source latency of
0.5. In this case, the static CRP is equal to 2 (5 minus 3). The dynamic CRP is equal to 3 (5.5
minus 2.5).
Transparent Latch Edge Considerations

Physical Design 90
For a path that ends at a transparent latch, PT calculates two clock reconvergence pessimism
values: one for rising edges and one for falling edges at the common node. The opening and
closing clock edges are effectively shifted, each by an amount equal to its corresponding
pessimism value, as indicated in Figure 11-14.
Figure 11-14 Clock Reconvergence Pessimism Removal for Latches
In practice, the opening-edge pessimism value affects the slack of nonborrowing paths and also
reduces the amount of time borrowed for borrowing paths. Meanwhile, the closing-edge
pessimism value increases the maximum amount of time borrowing allowed at a latch and
reduces the amount of the violation for a path that fails to meet its setup constraint.
To get a report about the calculation of clock reconvergence pessimism values for level-sensitive
latches, use the report_crpr command.
Reporting CRPR Calculations
The report_crpr command reports the calculation of clock reconvergence pessimism

(CRP) between two register clock pins or ports. It reports the time values calculated for both
static and dynamic conditions, and the choice from among those values actually used for
pessimism removal. In the command, you specify the pins of the launch and capture registers, the
clock, and type of check (setup or hold). For example,
pt_shell> report_crpr -from [get_pins ffa/CP] -to [get_pins

ffd/CP] -clock CLK -setup
The command generates a report showing the location of the common node, the launch and
capture edge types (rising or falling), the four calculated arrival times at the common point
(early/late, rise/fall), the calculated CRP values (rise and fall), and the values actually used for
opening-edge and closing-edge pessimism removal.
The amount of CRP reported by report_crpr can be slightly different from the amount
reported by report_timing. This is because report_timing, for computational
efficiency, “merges” multiple points for CRPR calculations when the CRP differences between
adjacent points are too small to be significant. The timing_crpr_threshold_ps variable
sets the time threshold for merging, which is 20 picoseconds by default. When report_crpr
Physical Design 91
and report_timing give different CRP values, the value reported by report_crpr is
more accurate because it does not do any merging of adjacent points. For more information about
the report_crpr command, see the man page.
1. What is on-chip variation (OCV)? How it will affect the Design?

Constructing a cell on an ASIC is a process that involves many variables. Examples of variables
that can occur on a single chip include small variations in the mask, imperfections in optical
proximity correction, and etch variations. Additionally, many of these variations can occur over a
very small area.
The many variables involved in the manufacturing process mean the gate delay of a cell is really
a Gaussian distribution with a mean and standard deviation determined by the cell design and
these many variables. if a design is shown to work at both best case and worst case, it is assumed
to work at any point in between.
Setup Problems
The circuit in figure 3 shows one of the critical paths on the chip. While the differences in
loading of the clock drivers and parasitics of the clock nets will be included in calculating the
clock arrival times at the flops, the on-chip variation effects are not being considered when doing
a worst-case only analysis.
If the clock path clock driver ends up being slightly faster than the data path clock driver, there is
a potential of manufacturing chips which have setup violations that your static timing analysis
didn’t tell you about.
Hold Problems
In the circuit in figure 3, we have a very short logic path between two flops. Again, a worst-case
or best-case only analysis will consider loading and parasitics of the clock tree, but the on-chip
variation effects will not be modeled.
Physical Design 92
If the data path clock driver ends up being slightly faster than the clock path clock driver, there is
a potential of manufacturing chips which have hold violations that your static timing analysis
didn’t tell you about.
Clock Gating
The circuit in figure 4 is a clock gating circuit. It starts with a clock divider register. The clock
tree fanning out from there starts with a single clock buffer in the first level. The second level of
the clock tree has four clock drivers, one of which is a NAND gate performing a clock gating
function.
14. How to solve the OCV problems?

Modeling On-Chip Variation in PT
To do on-chip variation analysis, every timing arc in the design must have both a minimum and a
maximum delay which account for the on-chip variation. These are not the same delays that you
would use for a simple min-max analysis. Those delays represent the minimum and maximum
delays that will be seen across all chips from that process.
For on-chip variation analysis, we want the minimum and maximum delays that could be seen
across a single chip. For on-chip variation analysis we will make two analysis runs. The “slow-
chip” analysis will set the maximum delays at the worst case delays for the process and the
minimum delays slightly faster than that. For the “fast-chip” analysis, we will set the minimum
delays to the best case delays for the process, and we will set the maximum delays slightly slower
than the best case delays.
Annotate from one SDF file

read_sdf –analysis_type on_chip_variation foo.sdf
Annotate from two SDF files

read_sdf –analysis_type on_chip_variation –min_file foo_min.sdf \
–max_file foo_max.sdf
Two Operating conditions

Physical Design 93
Sometimes you may have operating conditions specifically scaled for use with on-chip variation
analysis. For a slow chip analysis, the worst case operating condition is specified with –max and
the scaled worst case operating condition is specified with –min. For a fast chip analysis, the best
case operating condition is specified with –min and the scaled best case operating condition is
specified with –max.
set_operating_conditions –analysis_type on_chip_variation –min $WCOCV –max $WC
Single Operating condition

On-chip variation analysis can still be run even if you have only one operating condition. In this
case the minimum and maximum times are simply scaled versions of the delays determined from
the single operating condition that is loaded. The scaling factors are set by the set_timing_derate
command described next.
set_operating_conditions –analysis_type on_chip_variation $OP_CON

set_timing_derate –min 0.8 –max 1.0
Set_timing_derate
The set_timing_derate command can be used with any of the above methods to provide further
scaling of the timing paths. Scaling factors can be set independently for data paths, clock paths,
cell delays, net delays, and cell timing checks. If neither –clock nor -data is specified, the derating
factors apply to both clock and data paths. If –cell_delay, -net_delay, and –cell_check are all
omitted from the command, the derating factors apply to both cell and net delays, but not to cell
timing checks such as setup and hold times.
For example the following commands could be used to do a fast chip analysis with the best case
operating condition loaded, 10% variation in cell delays, 5% variation in net delays, and a 5%
variation in cell timing checks.
set_operating_conditions –analysis_type on_chip_variation $BC_OP_CON

set_timing_derate –min 1.0 –max 1.10 –cell_delay
set_timing_derate –min 1.0 –max 1.05 –net_delay
set_timing_derate –min 1.0 –max 1.05 –cell_check
we are telling Primetime to assume that the min paths can be twenty percent faster than the max
paths. More typically on-chip variation is modeled at six or eight or maybe ten
percent. Your ASIC or library vendor should tell you what is appropriate for the library that you
are using.
Setup Problems
When doing a setup test, the timing tool wants to verify that the latest possible data arrival can
still be captured by the earliest possible clock arrival at the endpoint register.
The latest possible data arrival is determined by taking the maximum delays along the clock path
to the startpoint register and the maximum delays along the slowest data path from the startpoint
register to the endpoint register.
The earliest possible clock arrival at the endpoint register is determined by taking the minimum
delays along the clock path to the endpoint register.
Hold Problems
Physical Design 94
When doing a hold test, the timing tool wants to verify that the earliest possible data arrival does
not arrive at the endpoint register before the latest possible clock arrival.
So we use min delays for the clock path to the startpoint register, min delays through the shortest
data path, and max delays for the clock path to the endpoint register.
Clock Gating Problems

With an AND gate, we want to verify that the gating signal can only change while the clock is
low. A hold check is done to verify that the gating signal changes after the falling edge of the
clock, and a setup check is done to verify that the gating signal changes before the next rising
edge of the clock. We’re not looking at the setup check here because it has lots of positive slack
and is therefore not very interesting. The hold check is going to use min delays along the gating
path and max delays along the clock path.
How OCV Analysis improves silicon performance?

While many ASIC vendors do not require youto run OCV analysis, this does not mean that they
have figured out how to build chips with zerovariation. If the vendor does not have a
manufacturing test that can catch the failures, or if theyare not willing to accept the resulting yield
loss, they must still account for on-chip variationsduring static timing analysis. It may be done
through padding the setup and hold margins of theflops, requiring extra set_clock_uncertainty
even after the clocks are placed and routed.
15. What is Clock Reconvergence Pessimism Removal CRPR? Explain ?

Clock Reconvergence Pessimism Removal (CRPR) is the process of identifying and removing the
pessimism introduced in the slack reports for clock paths when the clock paths have a segment in
common.
In the on-chip variation methodology (using the setAnalysisMode -BcWc and the
setTimingDerate commands or setAnalysisMode -ocv), during setup checks if both the launch
clock late path and the capture clock early path share a portion of the clock network, then for the
common clock network, a pessimism equal to the difference in maximum and minimum delay
values is introduced in the slack values.
When you use the setAnalysisMode -BcWc and the setTimingDerate commands, the software
calculates maximum delay value by multiplying the delay by the scale value that you set using
setTimingDerate –late. Similarly, the software calculates the minimum delay value by
multiplying the delay by the scale value that you set using setTimingDerate -early.
As shown in Figure 20-3, the setup check at FF2 compares the maximum delay data at the D pin
against minimum delay clock at the CLK pin. The maximum delay data at FF2/D consists of a
sum of maximum signal delay from FF1/Q to FF2/D, the maximum delay from CLK_SOURCE
to FF1/CLK, and the delay from FF1/CLK to FF1/Q. Similarly, the minimum delay clock arrival
time at FF2/CLK is the minimum delay from CLK_SOURCE to FF2/CLK.
Physical Design 95
The setup check equation for the example in Figure 20-3 with pessimism is as follows:
where,
t1 = Delay value for launch clock late path
t2 = Delay between FF1/CLK and FF1/Q
t3 = Delay between FF1/Q and FF2/D
t2 + t3 = Delay value for late data path
t4 = Delay value for capture clock early path
tpa = Period adjustment
tsu = Setup time
The setup check equation incorrectly implies that the common clock network, B1, can
simultaneously use maximum delay for the launch clock late path (clock source to FF1/CLK) and
minimum delay for the capture clock early path (clock source to FF2/CLK). You use the CRPR to
remove this pessimism.
Setup check equation using CRPR is as follows:
Where,
tcrpr = Difference in the maximum and minimum delay from the clock source to the
branching node
Similarly, hold check equation using CRPR is as follows:

Where,
t1 = Delay value for launch clock early path

t2 = Delay between FF1/CLK and FF1/Q
t3 = Delay between FF1/Q and FF2/D
t2 + t3 = Delay value for early data path
t4 = Delay value for capture clock late path
tcrpr = Difference in the maximum and minimum delay from the clock source to the branching
node
tH = Hold time
Physical Design 96
For example, you use the following setTimingDerate command for setup check delays in Figure
20-3 on page 648 in scaled on-chip variation analysis methodology:
setTimingDerate -max –late 1 –early 0.9 –clock
With the setTimingDerate command, if the delay through B1 is 1ns, the software removes the
pessimism of 0.1ns. Without CRPR the analysis tool incorrectly assumes that B1 can have a delay
of 1 and 0.9. The common path pessimism time (tcrpr) is calculated as follows:
B1 * Late Derate - B1 * Early Derate = tcrpr
Therefore,
tcrpr = 1.0ns * 1.0 - 1.0ns * 0.9 = 0.1ns
16. What kinds of timing violations are in a typical timing analysis report?
- Setup time violations - Hold time violations
- Minimum delay - Maximum delay
- Slack - External delay
17. List the possible techniques to fix a timing violation

18.
19.
- Buffering - Wire-sizing
- Transistor sizing - Re-routing
- Placement updates - Re-synthesis (logic transformations)
- Cloning - Taking advantage of useful skew
- Making sure we don't have false violations (false path, etc.)
20. Can a latch based design be analyzed using STA?

Setup and Hold Checking for Latches
Latch-based designs typically use two-phase, non overlapping clocks to control
successive registers in a data path. In these cases, Timing Engine can use time borrowing to
lessen the constraints on successive paths. For example, consider the two-phase, latch-based path
shown in Figure 1-8. All three latches are level-sensitive, with the gate active when the G input is
high. L1 and L3 are controlled by PH1, and L2 is controlled by PH2. A rising edge launches data
from the latch output, and a falling edge captures data at the latch input. For this example,
consider the latch setup and delay times to be zero.
Physical Design 97
Figure 1-9 shows how Timing Engine performs setup checks between these latches. For
the path from L1 to L2, the rising edge of PH1 launches the data. The data must arrive at L2
before the closing edge of PH2 at time=20. This timing requirement is labeled Setup 1.
Depending on the amount of delay between L1 and L2, the data might arrive either before or after
the opening edge of PH2 (at time=10), as indicated by the dashed-line arrows in the timing
diagram. Arrival after time=20 would be a timing violation.
Figure 1-9 Time Borrowing in Latch-Based Paths
If the data arrives at L2 before the opening edge of PH2 at time=10, the data for the next path
from L2 to L3 gets launched by the opening edge of PH2 at time=10, just as a synchronous flip-
flop would operate. This timing requirement is labeled Setup 2a. If the data arrives after the
opening edge of PH2, the first path (from L1 to L2) borrows time from the second path (from L2
to L3). In that case, the launch of data for the second path occurs not at the opening edge, but at
the data arrival time at L2, at some time between the opening and closing edges of PH2. This
timing requirement is labeled Setup 2b. When borrowing occurs, the path originates at the D pin
rather than the G pin of L2.
For the first path (from L1 to L2), Timing Engine reports the setup slack as zero if
borrowing occurs. The slack is positive if the data arrives before the opening edge at time=10, or
negative (a violation) if the data arrives after the closing edge at time=20. To perform hold
checking, Timing Engine considers the launch and capture edges relative to the setup check. It
verifies that data launched at the startpoint does not reach the endpoint too quickly, thereby
ensuring that data launched in the previous cycle is latched and not overwritten by the new data.
This is depicted in Figure 1-10.
Figure 1-10 Hold Checks in Latch-Based Paths
Physical Design 98
1 How delay affected by PVT (Process-Voltage-Temperature)?
Process-Voltage-Temperature (PVT) Variations and Static Timing Analysis
How delays vary with different PVT conditions? Show the graph.
o P increase->dealy increase
o P decrease->delay decrease
o V increase->delay decrease
o V decrease->delay increase
o T increase->delay increase
o T decrease->delay decrease
What is cell delay and net delay?
o Gate delay
o Transistors within a gate take a finite time to switch. This means that a change on
the input of a gate takes a finite time to cause a change on the output.[Magma]
o Gate delay =function of(i/p transition time, Cnet+Cpin).
o Cell delay is also same as Gate delay.
Cell delay
o For any gate it is measured between 50% of input transition to the corresponding
50% of output transition.
o Intrinsic delay
o Intrinsic delay is the delay internal to the gate. Input pin of the cell to output pin
of the cell.
o It is defined as the delay between an input and output pair of a cell, when a near
zero slew is applied to the input pin and the output does not see any load
condition.It is predominantly caused by the internal capacitance associated with
its transistor.
o This delay is largely independent of the size of the transistors forming the gate
because increasing size of transistors increase internal capacitors.
Physical Design 99
o Net Delay (or wire delay)

o The difference between the time a signal is first applied to the net and the time it
reaches other devices connected to that net.
o It is due to the finite resistance and capacitance of the net.It is also known as wire
delay.
o Wire delay =fn(Rnet , Cnet+Cpin)
What are delay models and what is the difference between them?
o Linear Delay Model (LDM)

o Non Linear Delay Model (NLDM)
o Composite current source modeling (CCS)
What is wire load model?
o Wire load model is NLDM which has estimated R and C of the net.
The major design challenges of ASIC design consist of microscopic issues and macroscopic
issues [1]. The microscopic issues are ultra-high speeds, power dissipation, supply rail drop,
growing importance of interconnect, noise, crosstalk, reliability, manufacturability and the clock
distribution. The macroscopic issues are time to market, design complexity, high levels of
abstractions, reuse, IP portability, systems on a chip and tool interoperability.
To meet the design challenge of clock distribution, the timing analysis is performed. Timing
analysis is to estimate when the output of a given circuit gets stable. Timing Analysis (TA) is a
design automation program which provides an alternative to the hardware debugging of timing
problems. The program establishes whether all paths within the design meet stated timing criteria,
that is, that data signals arrive at storage elements early enough valid gating but not so early as to
cause premature gating. The output of Timing Analysis includes ‘Slack” at each block to provide
a measure of the severity of any timing problem [13].
Static vs. Dynamic Timing Analysis

Timing analysis can be static or dynamic.
Static Timing Analysis (STA) works with timing models where as the Dynamic Timing Analysis
(DTA) works with spice models. STA has more pessimism and thus gives maximum delay of the
design. DTA overcomes this difficulty because it performs full timing simulation. The problem
associated with DTA is the computational complexity involved in finding the input pattern(s) that
produces maximum delay at the output and hence it is slow. The static timing analyzer will report
the following delays: Register to Register delays, Setup times of all external synchronous inputs,
Clock to Output delays, Pin to Pin combinational delays. The clock to output delay is usually just
reported as simply another pin-to-pin combinational delay. Timing analysis reports are often
pessimistic since they use worst case conditions.
The wide spread use of STA can be attributed to several factors [2]:
The basic STA algorithm is linear in runtime with circuit size, allowing analysis of designs in
Physical Design 100
excess of 10 million instances.
The basic STA analysis is conservative in the sense that it will over-estimate the delay of long
paths in the circuit and under-estimate the delay of short paths in the circuit. This makes the
analysis ”safe”, guaranteeing that the design will function at least as fast as predicted and will not
suffer from hold-time violations.
The STA algorithms have become fairly mature, addressing critical timing issues such as
interconnect analysis, accurate delay modeling, false or multi-cycle paths, etc.
Delay characterization for cell libraries is clearly defined, forms an effective interface between
the foundry and the design team, and is readily available. In addition to this, the Static Timing
Analysis (STA) does not require input vectors and has a runtime that is linear with the size of the
circuit [9].
PVT vs. Delay
Sources of variation can be:
• Process variation (P)

• Supply voltage (V)
• Operating Temperature (T)
Process Variation
This variation accounts for deviations in the semiconductor fabrication process. Usually process
variation is treated as a percentage variation in the performance calculation. Variations in the
process parameters can be impurity concentration densities, oxide thicknesses and diffusion
depths. These are caused bye non uniform conditions during depositions and/or during diffusions
of the impurities. This introduces variations in the sheet resistance and transistor parameters such
as threshold voltage. Variations are in the dimensions of the devices, mainly resulting from the
limited resolution of the photolithographic process. This causes (W/L) variations in MOS
transistors.
Process variations are due to variations in the manufacture conditions such as temperature,
pressure and dopant concentrations. The ICs are produced in lots of 50 to 200 wafers with
approximately 100 dice per wafer. The electrical properties in different lots can be very different.
There are also slighter differences in each lot, even in a single manufactured chip. There are
variations in the process parameter throughout a whole chip. As a consequence, the transistors
have different transistor lengths throughout the chip. This makes the propagation delay to be
different everywhere in a chip, because a smaller transistor is faster and therefore the propagation
delay is smaller.
Supply Voltage Variation
The design’s supply voltage can vary from the established ideal value during day-to-day
operation. Often a complex calculation (using a shift in threshold voltages) is employed, but a
simple linear scaling factor is also used for logic-level performance calculations.
The saturation current of a cell depends on the power supply. The delay of a cell is dependent on
Physical Design 101
the saturation current. In this way, the power supply inflects the propagation delay of a cell.
Throughout a chip, the power supply is not constant and hence the propagation delay varies in a
chip. The voltage drop is due to nonzero resistance in the supply wires. A higher voltage makes a
cell faster and hence the propagation delay is reduced. The decrease is exponential for a wide
voltage range. The self-inductance of a supply line contributes also to a voltage drop. For
example, when a transistor is switching to high, it takes a current to charge up the output load.
This time varying current (for a short period of time) causes an opposite self-induced
electromotive force. The amplitude of the voltage drop is given by .V=L*dI/dt, where L is the self
inductance and I is the current through the line.
Operating Temperature Variation
Temperature variation is unavoidable in the everyday operation of a design. Effects on

performance caused by temperature fluctuations are most often handled as linear scaling effects,
but some submicron silicon processes require nonlinear calculations.
When a chip is operating, the temperature can vary throughout the chip. This is due to the power
dissipation in the MOS-transistors. The power consumption is mainly due to switching, short-
circuit and leakage power consumption. The average switching power dissipation (approximately
given by Paverage = Cload*Vpower supply 2*fclock) is due to the required energy to charge up
the parasitic and load capacitances. The short-circuit power dissipation is due to the finite rise and
fall times. The nMOS and pMOS transistors may conduct for a short time during switching,
forming a direct current from the power supply to the ground. The leakage power consumption is
due to the nonzero reverse leakage and sub-threshold currents. The biggest contribution to the
power consumption is the switching. The dissipated power will increase the surrounding
temperature. The electron and hole mobility depend on the temperature. The mobility (in Si)
decreases with increased temperature for temperatures above –50 °C. The temperature, when the
mobility starts to decrease, depends on the doping concentration. A starting temperature at –50 °C
is true for doping concentrations below 1019 atoms/cm3. For higher doping concentrations, the
starting temperature is higher. When the electrons and holes move slower, then the propagation
delay increases. Hence, the propagation delay increases with increased temperature. There is also
a temperature effect, which has not been considered. The threshold voltage of a transistor depends
on the temperature. A higher temperature will decrease the threshold voltage. A lower threshold
voltage means a higher current and therefore a better delay performance. This effect depends
extremely on power supply, threshold voltage, load and input slope of a cell. There is a
competition between the two effects and generally the mobility effect wins.
The following figure shows the PVT operating conditions.

Physical Design 102
The best and worst design corners are defined as follows:
• Best case: fast process, highest voltage and lowest temperature

• Worst case: slow process, lowest voltage and highest temperature
On Chip Variation
On-chip variation is minor differences on different parts of the chip within one operating
condition. On-Chip variation (OCV) delays vary across a single die due to:
• Variations in the manufacturing process (P)

• Variations in the voltage (due to IR drop)
• Variations in the temperature (due to local hot spots etc)
This need is to be modeled by scaling the coefficients. Delays have uncertainty due to the
variation of Process (P), Voltage (V), and Temperature (T) across large dies. On-Chip variation
allows you to account for the delay variations due to PVT changes across the die, providing more
accurate delay estimates.
Physical Design 103
Timing Analysis With On-Chip Variation
• For cell delays, the on-chip variation is between 5 percent above and 10 percent below
the SDF back-annotated values.
• For net delays, the on-chip variation is between 2 percent above and 4 percent below the
SDF back-annotated values.
• For cell timing checks, the on-chip variation is 10 percent above the SDF values for setup
checks and 20 percent below the SDF values for hold checks.
In Prime Time, OCV derations are implemented using the following commands:
• pt_shell> read_sdf -analysis_type on_chip_variation my_design.sdf

• pt_shell> set_timing_derate -cell_delay -min 0.90 -max 1.05
• pt_shell> set_timing_derate -net -min 0.96 -max 1.02
• pt_shell> set_timing_derate -cell_check -min 0.80 -max 1.10
In the traditional deterministic STA (DSTA), process variation is modeled by running the analysis
multiple times, each at a different process condition. For each process condition, a so-called
corner file is created that specifies the delay of the gates at that process condition. By analyzing a
sufficient number of process conditions, the delay of the circuit under process variation can be
bounded.
The uncertainty in the timing estimate of a design can be classified into three main categories.
• Modeling and analysis errors: Inaccuracy in device models, in the extraction and
reduction of interconnect parasitics and in the timing analysis algorithms.
• Manufacturing variations: Uncertainty in the parameters of a fabricated devices and

interconnects from die-to-die and within a particular die.
• Operating context variations: Uncertainty in the operating environment of a particular

device during its lifetime, such as temperature, supply voltage, mode of operation and
lifetime wear-out.
For instance, the STA tool might utilize a conservative delay noise algorithm resulting in certain
paths operating faster than expected. Environmental uncertainty and uncertainty due to modeling
Physical Design 104
and analysis errors are typically modeled using worst-case margins, whereas uncertainty in
process is generally treated statistically.
Taxonomy of Process Variations
As process geometries continue to shrink, the ability to control critical device parameters is
becoming increasingly difficult and significant variations in device length, doping concentrations
and oxide thicknesses have resulted [9]. These process variations pose a significant problem for
timing yield prediction and require that static timing analysis models the circuit delay not as a
deterministic value, but as a random variable.
Process variations can either systematic or random.
• Systematic variation: Systematic variations are deterministic in nature and are caused
by the structure of a particular gate and its topological environment. The systematic
variations are the component of variation that can be attributed to a layout or
manufacturing equipment related effects. They generally show spatial correlation
behavior.
• Random variation: Random or non-systematic variations are unpredictable in nature and

include random variations in the device length, discrete doping fluctuations and oxide
thickness variations. Random variations cannot be attributed to a specific repeatable
governing principle. The radius of this variation is comparable to the sizes of individual
devices, so each device can vary independently.
Process variations can classified as follow:
• Inter-die variation or die-to-die: Inter-chip variations are variations that occur from one
die to next, meaning that the same device on a chip has different features among different
die of one wafer, from wafer to wafer and from wafer lot to wafer lot. Die-to-die
variations have a variation radius larger than the die size including within wafer, wafer to
wafer, lot to lot and fab to fab variations [12].
• Intra-die or within-die variation: Intra-die variations are the variations in device

features that are present within a single chip, meaning that a device feature varies
between different locations on the same die. Intra-chip variations exhibit spatial
correlations and structural correlations.
• Front-end variation: Front-end variations mainly refer to the variations present at the
transistor level. The primary components of the front end variations entail transistor gate
length and gate width, gate oxide thickness, and doping related variations. These physical
variations cause changes in the electrical characteristics of the transistors which
eventually lead to the variability in the circuit performance.
• Back-end variation: Back-end variations refer to the variations on various levels of

interconnecting metal and dielectric layers used to connect numerous devices to form the
required logic gates.
In practice, device features vary among the devices on a chip and the likelihood that all devices
have a worst-case feature is extremely small. With increasing awareness of process variation, a
Physical Design 105
number of techniques have been developed which model random delay variations and perform
STA. These can be classified into full-chip analysis and path-based analysis approaches.
Full Chip Analysis
Full-chip analysis models the delay of a circuit as a random variable and endeavors to compute its
probability distribution. The proposed methods are heuristic in nature and have a very high worst-
case computational complexity. They are also based on very simple delay models, where the
dependence of gate delay due to slope variation at the input of the gate and load variation at the
output of the gate is not modeled. When run time and accuracy are considered, full chip STA is
not yet practical for industrial designs.
Path Based STA
Path based STA provides statistical information on a path-by-path basis. It accounts for intra-die
process variations and hence eliminates the pessimism in deterministic timing analysis, based on
case files. It is a more accurate measure of which paths are critical under process variability,
allowing more correct optimization of the circuit. This approach does not include the load
dependence of the gate delay due to variability of fan out gates and does not address spatial
correlations of intra-die variability.
To compute the intra-die path delay component of process variability, first the sensitivity of gate
delay, output slope and input load with respect to slope, output load and device length are
computed. Finally, when considering sequential circuits, the delay variation in the buffered clock
tree must be considered.
In general, the fully correlated assumptions will under-estimate the variation in the arrival times
at the leaf nodes of the clock tree which will tend to overestimate circuit performance.
• PVT, Derarting and STA
Where do you get the WLM's? Do you create WLM's? How do you specify?
o Wire Load Models (WLM) are available from the library vendors.
o We dont create WLM.
o WLMs can be specified depending on the area
What is the derate value that can be used?
o For setup check derate data path by 8% to 15%, no derate in the clock path.
o For hold check derate clock path by 8% to 15%, no derate in the data path.
What are the corners you check for timing sign-off? Is there any changes in the
derate value for each corner?
Physical Design 106
o Corners: Worst, Best, Typical.

o Same derating value for best and worst.For typical it can be less.
Write Setup and Hold equtions?
o Setup equation: Tlaunch clock + Tclk-q_max + Tcombo_max <= Tcapute clock -

(Tsetup+skew)
o Hold equation: Tlaunch clock + Tclk-q_min + Tcombo_min >= Tcapture clock +
(Thold-skew)
o .
Where do you get the derating value? What are the factors that decide the derating
factor?
o Based on the guidelines and suggestions from the library vendor and previous
design experience derating value is decided.
o PVT variation is the factor that decides the derating factor.
What factors decides the setup time of flip-flop?
o D- pin transition and clock transition.
Why dont you derate the clock path by -10% for worst corner analysis?
o We can do. But it may not be accurate as the data path derate.
What is latency? Give the types?
o Source Latency
o It is known as source latency also. It is defined as "the delay from the clock
origin point to the clock definition point in the design".
o Delay from clock source to beginning of clock tree (i.e. clock definition point).
o The time a clock signal takes to propagate from its ideal waveform origin point to
the clock definition point in the design.
o Network latency
o It is also known as Insertion delay or Network latency. It is defined as "the delay
from the clock definition point to the clock pin of the register".
o The time clock signal (rise or fall) takes to propagate from the clock definition
point to a register clock pin.
What are the different types of delays in ASIC or VLSI design?

Different Types of Delays in ASIC or VLSI design
Physical Design 107
• Source Delay/Latency • Intrinsic Delay
• Network Delay/Latency • Extrinsic Delay
• Insertion Delay • Input Delay
• Transition Delay/Slew: Rise time, • Output Delay

fall time
• Exit Delay
• Path Delay
• Latency (Pre/post CTS)
• Net delay, wire delay,
interconnect delay • Uncertainty (Pre/Post CTS)
• Propagation Delay • Unateness: Positive unateness,

negative unateness
• Phase Delay
• Jitter: PLL jitter, clock jitter
• Cell Delay
•
Gate delay
• Transistors within a gate take a finite time to switch. This means that a change on the
input of a gate takes a finite time to cause a change on the output.[Magma]
• Gate delay =function of(i/p transition time, Cnet+Cpin).
• Cell delay is also same as Gate delay.
Source Delay (or Source Latency)
• It is known as source latency also. It is defined as "the delay from the clock origin point
to the clock definition point in the design".
• Delay from clock source to beginning of clock tree (i.e. clock definition point).
• The time a clock signal takes to propagate from its ideal waveform origin point to the
clock definition point in the design.
Network Delay(latency)
• It is also known as Insertion delay or Network latency. It is defined as "the delay from the
clock definition point to the clock pin of the register".
• The time clock signal (rise or fall) takes to propagate from the clock definition point to a
register clock pin.
Physical Design 108
Insertion delay
• The delay from the clock definition point to the clock pin of the register.
Transition delay
• It is also known as "Slew". It is defined as the time taken to change the state of the signal.
Time taken for the transition from logic 0 to logic 1 and vice versa . or Time taken by the
input signal to rise from 10%(20%) to the 90%(80%) and vice versa.
• Transition is the time it takes for the pin to change state.
Slew
• Rate of change of logic.See Transition delay.
• Slew rate is the speed of transition measured in volt / ns.
Rise Time
• Rise time is the difference between the time when the signal crosses a low threshold to
the time when the signal crosses the high threshold. It can be absolute or percent.
• Low and high thresholds are fixed voltage levels around the mid voltage level or it can be
either 10% and 90% respectively or 20% and 80% respectively. The percent levels are
converted to absolute voltage levels at the time of measurement by calculating
percentages from the difference between the starting voltage level and the final settled
voltage level.
Fall Time
• Fall time is the difference between the time when the signal crosses a high threshold to
the time when the signal crosses the low threshold.
• The low and high thresholds are fixed voltage levels around the mid voltage level or it
can be either 10% and 90% respectively or 20% and 80% respectively. The percent levels
are converted to absolute voltage levels at the time of measurement by calculating
voltage level.
• For an ideal square wave with 50% duty cycle, the rise time will be 0.For a symmetric
triangular wave, this is reduced to just 50%.
Definition of Rise Time
Rise time is the difference between the time when the signal crosses a low threshold to
the time when the signal crosses the high threshold. It can be absolute or percent.
Physical Design 109
Absolute Rise Time
In absolute rise time, the low and high thresholds are fixed voltage levels around the mid
voltage level.
Percent Rise Time
In percent rise time, the low and high thresholds are percent levels, and are usually either
10% and 90% respectively or 20% and 80% respectively. The percent levels are
voltage level.
Definition of Fall Time
Fall time is the difference between the time when the signal crosses a high threshold to
the time when the signal crosses the low threshold. It can be absolute or percent.
Absolute Fall Time
In absolute fall time, the low and high thresholds are fixed voltage levels around the mid
voltage level.
Percent Fall Time
In percent fall time, the low and high thresholds are percent levels, and are usually either
10% and 90% respectively or 20% and 80% respectively. The percent levels are
voltage level.
Significance of Rise Time & Fall Time
This is best explained by comparing a square wave with a triangular wave. In an ideal
square wave with 50% duty cycle, the rise time will be 0 and the signal will be above
threshold for 100% of the half period time. In a symmetric triangular wave, this is
reduced to just 50%. More severely affected is the total area above the threshold, which is
reduced to 25% of that of square wave's. Though the information about loss of time
above threshold is conveyed by many other parameters, the information about loss of area
above threshold is only conveyed by rise and fall times.
Rise Time & Fall Time Requirements
The rise time & fall time should be small compared to the clock period. A factor of 10 is
considered good. Very large rise or fall times have the risk of the cycles going
Physical Design 110
undetected. Also, large rise or fall times mean that the signal will be hovering around mid
level for too long, making the system highly susceptible to noise and multiple triggering
if there is not enough hysteresis.
This might make you think that the faster rise & fall times are, the better the system is.
Not really. Very fast rise or fall times are not free from trouble. They might cause severe
ringing at the receiver resulting in reduction in voltage & timing margins or even double
triggering. Or the fast edges can & will get coupled to the adjacent signal lines causing
false triggering on them or reducing the voltage margins.
Measurement of Rise Time & Fall Time
The measurement system should have enough analog bandwidth to measure the edge
times faithfully. This means that the oscilloscope and the probe together should have at
least twice the bandwidth of the fastest edge rates to be measured. To estimate the highest
frequencies of significant level in an edge, divide 0.35 with an estimate of the edge time
(i.e. rise time or fall time).
If a digital oscilloscope is being used, an edge should get at least 5 samples for the
measurements to be reasonably accurate. Normally, the lesser bandwidth the measuring
system has, the larger the measured rise or fall time will be from the actual value. This
means that the measured value for rise & fall rates will always be larger than the actual
value. However, this is not always true. If the probe used for measurement is highly
under-damped, it will result in ringing causing the measured signal to have faster rise &
fall times than the actual signal.
You have to use cursors to measure the rise & fall times in analog oscilloscopes. In
modern digital oscilloscopes, the measurements are automatically done by the
oscilloscopes. However, all digital oscilloscopes measure only one edge in the whole
acquisition (normally first). To have a higher confidence in the measurement, multiple
measurements must be made. One way is to let the oscilloscope run in continuous run
mode and let the statistics accumulate over time. This approach may be time consuming
and will not measure consecutive edges.
The better way is to use a post processing software. These software are very fast and can
acquire data from the oscilloscope automatically, process millions of data edges in just a
few seconds, display the results graphically in time domain as well as in frequency
domain, with statistics along with the time stamp of max and min values. You can even
save waveforms from the oscilloscope for post processing by the software
• The rise/fall definition is set on the meter to 10% and 90% based on the linear power in
Watts. These points translate into the -10 dB and -0.5 dB points in log mode (10 log 0.1)
and (10 log 0.9). The rise/fall time values of 10% and 90% are calculated based on an
algorithm, which looks at the mean power above and below the 50% points of the rise/fall
times. Click here to see more.
Physical Design 111
Path delay
• Path delay is also known as pin to pin delay. It is the delay from the input pin of the cell
to the output pin of the cell.
Net Delay (or wire delay)
• The difference between the time a signal is first applied to the net and the time it reaches
other devices connected to that net.
• It is due to the finite resistance and capacitance of the net.It is also known as wire delay.
• Wire delay =fn(Rnet , Cnet+Cpin)
Propagation delay
• For any gate it is measured between 50% of input transition to the corresponding 50% of
output transition.
• This is the time required for a signal to propagate through a gate or net. For gates it is the
time it takes for a event at the gate input to affect the gate output.
• For net it is the delay between the time a signal is first applied to the net and the time it
reaches other devices connected to that net.
• It is taken as the average of rise time and fall time i.e. Tpd= (Tphl+Tplh)/2.
Phase delay
• Same as insertion delay
Cell delay
• For any gate it is measured between 50% of input transition to the corresponding 50% of
output transition.
Intrinsic delay
• Intrinsic delay is the delay internal to the gate. Input pin of the cell to output pin of the
cell.
• It is defined as the delay between an input and output pair of a cell, when a near zero slew
is applied to the input pin and the output does not see any load condition.It is
predominantly caused by the internal capacitance associated with its transistor.
• This delay is largely independent of the size of the transistors forming the gate because
increasing size of transistors increase internal capacitors.
Physical Design 112
Extrinsic delay
• Same as wire delay, net delay, interconnect delay, flight time.
• Extrinsic delay is the delay effect that associated to with interconnect. output pin of the
cell to the input pin of the next cell.
Input delay
• Input delay is the time at which the data arrives at the input pin of the block from external
circuit with respect to reference clock.
Output delay
• Output delay is time required by the external circuit before which the data has to arrive at
the output pin of the block with respect to reference clock.
Exit delay
• It is defined as the delay in the longest path (critical path) between clock pad input and an
output. It determines the maximum operating frequency of the design.
Latency (pre/post cts)
• Latency is the summation of the Source latency and the Network latency. Pre CTS
estimated latency will be considered during the synthesis and after CTS propagated
latency is considered.
Uncertainty (pre/post cts)
• Uncertainty is the amount of skew and the variation in the arrival clock edge. Pre CTS
uncertainty is clock skew and clock Jitter. After CTS we can have some margin of skew
+ Jitter.
Unateness
• A function is said to be unate if the rise transition on the positive unate input variable
causes the ouput to rise or no change and vice versa.
• Negative unateness means cell output logic is inverted version of input logic. eg. In
inverter having input A and output Y, Y is -ve unate w.r.to A. Positive unate means cell
output logic is same as that of input.
• These +ve ad -ve unateness are constraints defined in library file and are defined for
output pin w.r.to some input pin.
Physical Design 113
• A clock signal is positive unate if a rising edge at the clock source can only cause a rising
edge at the register clock pin, and a falling edge at the clock source can only cause a
falling edge at the register clock pin.
• A clock signal is negative unate if a rising edge at the clock source can only cause a
falling edge at the register clock pin, and a falling edge at the clock source can only cause
a rising edge at the register clock pin. In other words, the clock signal is inverted.
• A clock signal is not unate if the clock sense is ambiguous as a result of non-unate timing
arcs in the clock path. For example, a clock that passes through an XOR gate is not unate
because there are nonunate arcs in the gate. The clock sense could be either positive or
negative, depending on the state of the other input to the XOR gate.
Jitter
• The short-term variations of a signal with respect to its ideal position in time.
• Jitter is the variation of the clock period from edge to edge. It can varry +/- jitter value.
• From cycle to cycle the period and duty cycle can change slightly due to the clock
generation circuitry. This can be modeled by adding uncertainty regions around the rising
and falling edges of the clock waveform.
Sources of Jitter
• Internal circuitry of the phase-

locked loop (PLL)
• Random thermal noise from a

crystal
• Other resonating devices
• Random mechanical noise from

crystal vibration
• Signal transmitters
• Traces and cables
• Connectors
• Receivers
114
Skew
• The difference in the arrival of clock signal at the clock pin of different flops.
• Two types of skews are defined: Local skew and Global skew.
Local skew
• The difference in the arrival of clock signal at the clock pin of related flops.
Global skew
• The difference in the arrival of clock signal at the clock pin of non related flops.
• Skew can be positive or negative.
• When data and clock are routed in same direction then it is Positive skew.
• When data and clock are routed in opposite then it is negative skew.
Recovery Time
• Recovery specifies the minimum time that an asynchronous control input pin must be
held stable after being de-asserted and before the next clock (active-edge) transition.
• Recovery time specifies the time the inactive edge of the asynchronous signal has to
arrive before the closing edge of the clock.
• Recovery time is the minimum length of time an asynchronous control signal (eg.preset)
must be stable before the next active clock edge. The recovery slack time calculation is
similar to the clock setup slack time calculation, but it applies asynchronous control
signals.
Equation 1:
• Recovery Slack Time = Data Required Time â€“ Data Arrival Time
• Data Arrival Time = Launch Edge + Clock Network Delay to Source Register + Tclkq+
Register to Register Delay
• Data Required Time = Latch Edge + Clock Network Delay to Destination Register
=Tsetup
If the asynchronous control is not registered, equations shown in Equation 2 is used to calculate
the recovery slack time.
Equation 2:
115
• Recovery Slack Time = Data Required Time â€“ Data Arrival Time
• Data Arrival Time = Launch Edge + Maximum Input Delay + Port to Register Delay
Delay+Tsetup
• If the asynchronous reset signal is from a port (device I/O), you must make an Input
Maximum Delay assignment to the asynchronous reset pin to perform recovery analysis
on that path.
Removal Time
• Removal specifies the minimum time that an asynchronous control input pin must be held
stable before being de-asserted and after the previous clock (active-edge) transition.
• Removal time specifies the length of time the active phase of the asynchronous signal has
to be held after the closing edge of clock.
• Removal time is the minimum length of time an asynchronous control signal must be
stable after the active clock edge. Calculation is similar to the clock hold slack
calculation, but it applies asynchronous control signals. If the asynchronous control is
registered, equations shown in Equation 3 is used to calculate the removal slack time.
• If the recovery or removal minimum time requirement is violated, the output of the
sequential cell becomes uncertain. The uncertainty can be caused by the value set by the
resetbar signal or the value clocked into the sequential cell from the data input.
Equation 3
• Removal Slack Time = Data Arrival Time â€“ Data Required Time
• Data Arrival Time = Launch Edge + Clock Network Delay to Source Register + Tclkq of
Source Register + Register to Register Delay
• Data Required Time = Latch Edge + Clock Network Delay to Destination Register +
Thold
• If the asynchronous control is not registered, equations shown in Equation 4 is used to

calculate the removal slack time.
Equation 4
• Removal Slack Time = Data Arrival Time â€“ Data Required Time
• Data Arrival Time = Launch Edge + Input Minimum Delay of Pin + Minimum Pin to
Register Delay
116
+Thold
• If the asynchronous reset signal is from a device pin, you must specify the Input
Minimum Delay constraint to the asynchronous reset pin to perform a removal analysis
on this path.
21. What are Wire-load models?

22. What are multi-cycle paths and false paths in an SDC file?
23. If Flip flops are having 1000 Drive strength of cells, How to do cloning for the FF?
24. If Combinational circuit is having 1000 Drive strength of cells, How to do cloning?
25. How are nets crossing multi-clock domain handled?
26. What is difference between buffering and cloning?
How do we eliminate slack if it occurs during First optimization stage (trial routing)?
9. Design Rule Check – DRC
1. What are the violations are solved in DRC?

includes the following 65 and 90nm design rules:
• Fat metal width spacing rule

• Fat metal extension spacing rule
• Maximum number minimum edge rule
• Metal density rule (requires a Hercules license)
• Via density rule (requires a Hercules license)
• Fat metal connect rule
• Via corner spacing rule
• Minimum length rule
• Via farm rule
• Enclosed via spacing rule
• Minimum enclosed spacing rule
• Fat poly contact rule
• extendMacroPinToBlockage (new parameter)
• Special end-of-line spacing rule
• Special notch rule
• U-shaped metal spacing rule
• Maximum stack level for via (for array)
• Stud spacing
• Multiple fat spacing
• Enclosure
2. What is the Difference between Magma and Caliber for solving the Problem of DRC
LVS?
117
Magma is an implementation tool, this does only metal level DRC, But Caliber is a sign off
tool, It does DRC in POLY and Diffusion level.
In a reg to reg path if you have setup problem where will you insert buffer-near to
launching flop or capture flop? Why?
o (buffers are inserted for fixing fanout voilations and hence they reduce setup
voilation; otherwise we try to fix setup voilation with the sizing of cells; now just
assume that you must insert buffer !)
o Near to capture path.
o Because there may be other paths passing through or originating from the flop
nearer to lauch flop. Hence buffer insertion may affect other paths also. It may
improve all those paths or degarde. If all those paths have voilation then you may
insert buffer nearer to launch flop provided it improves slack.
10. Layout Versus Schematic – LVS
1. What are the violations are solved in LVS?

- Open Error - Short Error
- Device Mismatch - Port Mismatch
- Instance Mismatch - Net Mismatch
- Floating Nets
11. Parasitic Extraction – XRC
1. What is the significance of RC extraction?

2. What is the Difference between 2.5D and 3D parasitic Extraction?
3. What is LPE? Explain?
4. Why Parasitic Extraction for only R and C, why not L(inductor) ?
5. Why filler cell are used?
For P-Well and N-Well Connectivity
12. Power Analysis
1. Why is IR drop analysis done?

2. How to do IR Drop analysis? What kind of information does it needs?
During power analysis, if you are facing IR drop problem, then how did you avoid?
a. Increase power metal layer width.

b. Go for higher metal layer.
c. Spread macros or standard cells.
d. Provide more straps.
118
What sort of general information is available about the commands involved in the overall
flow through Astro-Rail?
Answer:
The following provides a list of facts about the Astro-Rail analysis flow. We will first break the
flow into stages and then provide details about each individual stage. This division is as follows:
1. Data preparation
2. Loading power-related information
3. Power analysis
4. Power/ground net extraction
5. Rail analysis
6. Viewing the violations
7. White box and gray box creation
8. Use of white box and gray box though the Astro-Rail flow
===================
1. Data preparation
===================
All CEL and FRAM views MUST be in the same library.
Technology file:
- Check if the technology section has the unitVoltageName/Precision,
unitCurrentName/Precision, and unitPowerName/Precision values defined for IR
analysis.
- Check if the metal and via layer sections have the maxCurrentDensity value
defined for IR analysis.
Library views:
- Check if the TIM views and PWR views exist in the library.
- Recreate the PWR views if you do not trust those created by loading the CLF
files that are generated by converting a .lib file.
- Alternatively, starting from Astro-Rail version U-2003.09, you can use LM
views for power information.
- Check if the PWR views contain one or all of the following information, depending on what was
in the .lib file:
- Short-circuit power
- Leakage power
- Internal power
All hard macros (including I/O pad cells) need the CONN views and current source files (CSF) if
you wish to see the PG mesh inside them.
DO NOT make CONN views for standard cells or soft macros.
====================================
2. Loading power-related information
====================================
119
Scheme-based net switching:
- Do not use pattern matching unless necessary because it takes longer than specifying the net
names. It is suggested that, however, you do pattern matching once and then write the net
switching information out to an output file with the poDumpPowerInfo command. This output
file contains a list of the nets and their switching activity in the Scheme format, so the file can be
loaded directly back to the tool using the poLoadNetSwitchingInfo command.
- Verify the activity value calculations.
Example:
The netSwitching value is the average toggling counts of the net per
unitTimeName. If the clock frequency is at 100 MHz, then the clock signal toggles twice in 10 ns,
once up and once down. Thus the netSwitching value is 2/10 = 0.2. If a given net was to be
switching at 20% of the clock frequency, you would specify a value of 0.04 (20% x 0.2) for that
given net.
VCD-based net switching:

- Verify the header to be removed (scope-upscope) correctly. Here you are removing the
additional hierarchy that may exist in the VCD file but not in the verilog netlist.
- Verify that the VCD file is for the netlist that was loaded into Astro-Rail.
If you have performed optimizations on the original netlist in Astro, then this is NOT the same
netlist because the optimization introduces new buffers and nets to the design.
- When doing frame-by-frame, the width must be a multiple of what is in the VCD's time steps.
Load Transition Times:

- Use this to debug when you get the message, "ERROR: Fail to get delay/trans thresholds," in
the Power Analysis stage.
- Use this to save time. You do not have to run the STA in power analysis when selecting the
General Power Model option.
- Remember to DESELECT the Purge Power Info Before Loading option.
- Remember that you need to select the Load Transition Time Only option in the Power Analysis
(poPowerAnalysis) dialog box.
- The syntax used in the text file:
definePortInstanceTransition cellID "cellInstName" "portName" transTime
=================
3. Power analysis
=================
Power analysis is a GIGO process. The accuracy of the power calculation results depends on,
- Accurate net switching activities
- Accurate .lib cell characterization for timing in TIM or LM views
- Correct signal parasitics
Power Models:
Switching Power Only = 0.5(C*V^2)freq

120
General Power Model = Switching + Leakage + Internal + Short-circuit Power
The Astro STA engine will be invoked if the General Power Model option is
selected. This is because the internal and short-circuit power are dependent on
the rise/fall time.
To see all four different power types, enter the following:
define poPrintCellPower 1
This will produce the following syntax in the log file:
InstanceName SwithcingPower Short-circuitPower LeakagePower InternalPower

TotalPower
Be careful that setting poPrintCellPower prints a line for every cell in the design and thus results
in a pretty massive log file.
Defining Cell instance power:

- Do NOT select the Load Cell Instance Power Only option in general because this will ONLY
load the values specified in the file that is loaded to the tool by specifying the file name in the
Cell Instance Power File text field.
- Do specify all the hard macro, I/O, gray box and white box power values in an ASCII file and
load it via the Cell Instance Power File option field. The syntax used in this file is
defineCellInstancePower.
- If no power consumption value is specified for the white box or gray box modeled cells, the
value zero will be assigned.
- The defineCellInstancePower values specified are used to scale power
Consumption values of white box and gray box models and the CONN+CSF data Running
Astro LPE by using the poPowerAnalysis command does not create the PARA view data.
The poSignalExtraction command runs LPE hierarchically and then saves the PARA view data
for soft macros.
Common Errors:
ERROR: Fail to get delay/trans thresholds

Error: fail to load CG on cell BLOCK
Error: fail to prepare top-level timing info
Error: power analysis failed
These errors are generated because STA failed and Astro-Rail tried to run the astReportTiming
command.
The cause of the failure may be one of the following:
- The subcell in the block in question is not present (missing placement in LEF/DEF flow)
- The TIM view for the block in question is corrupted
- Missing reference libraries for the block (analog block, like PLL). You can remove the CEL
view of the block that causes the problem and leave the FRAM view, so the PLL block is treated
as a black box.
121
Log file:
Following explains the power analysis data processing recorded in the log file.
- Every cell in the design is treated as though it was a standard cell.
Power analysis succeeded.

Log file extract:
IO net switching power = 0 mW Static cell-inst power calculation:
total switching power = 160.562 mW (23.4036 %)
total short-circuit power = 77.7475 mW (11.3325 %)
total internal power = 446.576 mW (65.093 %)
total leakage power = 1.17244 mW (0.170895 %)
total power = 686.057 mW <====== TOTAL POWER
- Then the user-specified values overwrite the previously calculated values.
Loading cell instance power...

Log file extract:
Cell instance power has been loaded and updated.
Total static cell-inst power and current:
total power and current at power net A_VDD1 = 0.0865513 mW, 0.0721261 mA
total power and current at power net A_VDD2 = 0.0865513 mW, 0.0721261 mA
total power and current at power net D_VDD1 = 75 mW, 62.5 mA
total power and current at power net D_VDD2 = 143.4 mW, 119.5 mA
total power = 938.266 mW <====== TOTAL POWER
The log file does state the final power values for each macro cell instances. Look for "Calculated
power values for macro cell instances" and then the "Final power values for macro cell
instances".
==============================
4. Power/ground net extraction
==============================
You must do extraction on each power and ground net, like VSS and VDD. There MUST be a
FRAM or CONN view present in the same library as the CEL view that is being extracted.
Common Error:
If any error occurs due to zero boundary nodes, resistors or current sources, do the following:
- Check the block in question to see what is present in the FRAM, CEL, or CONN view for the
net.
- Determine which block to investigate errors by checking the log file. For example, if the log
file contains the following information, the block in question to investigate is "core".
Extracting net VDD of cell core from library corelib ...

122
Common log message:
WARNING : no intersection between PAD location and layout
- This warning is not a concern if the top-block being extracted contains pad cells.
- The poPGExtraction command recognizes pin objects during net extraction.
If no pins but only pads exist at the top level, then this warning makes sense and you need to
investigate the block-level.
The investigation uses grep "Design Hierarchy" table in the log file reported by the tool. Check
for the following:
- Missing macros?
- Missing reference library
- FRAM view not in same library as CEL/CONN view
Use the poCleanupExtraction command to control the power and ground contents saved in the
PARA view. Be careful of the default settings which remove all the data.
================
5. Rail analysis
================
Performing rail analysis is usually time-consuming. Rail Analysis combines the power
information (current consumption) of the cells and the PG resistive mesh in a matrix to solve. The
log file reports the following:
Setup Compressed Matrix, number of equations #

Matrix solver: Total number of elements #
The number of equations and elements along with how "meshy" the resistive network is gives an
indication to runtime and memory usage.
Common Error:
ERROR : All matrix nodes are floating
This message indicates that the sources of ideal voltage do not overlap with the
actual material of the net in question. Verify if the user-defined taps or pin
objects are overlapping with the power or ground net. Check if the tap is not
located over a pin.
ERROR : fail to scan cell instance power id
This is primarily because a cell in the design has not been annotated with a power consumption
value. You can check on this by using poDumpPowerInfo or poQueryPowerInfo to write the
power-related information out to a file or by using the poDisplayPowerMap to see this
graphically.
=========================
6. Viewing the violations
123
=========================
After rail analysis is complete, you can view the voltage drop map by using
poDisplayVoltageDropMap. Here you can investigate the maximum voltage drop and select the
Step, Metal, Via Bounds option to isolate areas and layers of interest. To investigate a spot on the
layout, click the Query button and a "spot value" is returned. Following is an example of querying
voltage drop values:
R = 261e-3, layer: METAL2, bounding box: (295.290, 17.290) -

(304.538,19.790) Current direction: LEFT Voltage Drop = (-2.815)
You can also produce error cells and reports for locations where user-defined limits have been
violated.
You can investigate violations within white box models by using the
poDispalyParasitic command. The command displays the PG resistive network from the PARA
view in the CEL view. In the parasitic map of the PG mesh, you will be able to see,
Yellow crossed box: ideal voltage source (boundary node)

Blue crossed box: current source location
==================================
7. White box and gray box creation
==================================
The steps of creating white box and gray box for hard macros are different from the steps for soft
macros. In Astro-Rail, a hard Macro is usually an CEL that has been streamed in from GDSII,
such as a RAM. A soft macro is a block that has been placed and routed in Astro.
A. White box and gray box creation for hard macros

Starting with a hard macro's CONN view and a current source file (CSF).
i. Run poLoadPowerSupply to define power supplies.
ii. Run poPGExtraction to do P/G net extraction. This automatically generates a white box
model.
iii. Run poGenMacroModel to create a gray box (macro) model.
B. White box and gray box creation for soft macros Starting with a soft macro's CEL view. Leaf
cells and interconnect routing.
i. Run poLoadPowerSupply to define power supplies.
ii. Run poLoadNetSwitchingInfo to load net switching activities.
iii. Run poPowerAnalysis to do power analysis.
iv. Run poPGExtraction to do P/G net extraction
v. Run poGenWhiteBox to create a white box model (optional).
vi. Run poGenMacroModel to create a gray box (macro) model.
===========================================================
8. Use of white box and gray box though the Astro-Rail flow
===========================================================
A. Power analysis
124
If there are CEL views of sub-blocks and the Flatten Hierarchical Cells option is selected, the
power analysis will dive down into the CEL views, even if there is a white box or gray box.
The default power value for a white box and a gray box is ZERO even if you created a white box
and it has the model power. White box and gray box power instance value MUST be specified in
an ASCII file and load it to the tool by specifying the file name in the Cell Instance Power File
text field in the Power Analysis dialog box.
The power analysis results are NOT automatically saved, so you MUST do a save. The power
info will then be saved in the CEL view.
B. Power/Ground net extraction
If there are white box or gray box models for macros (subblocks) and the Flatten Hierarchical
Cells option is selected, the order of preference for a soft macro is:
Gray box, White box, CEL (Soft Macro), FRAM (black box)
And the order of preference for a hard macro is:
Gray box, White box, CONN (Hard Macro), FRAM (black box)
Currently no method is provided to select which collection of data to be used for a child cell of
the cell being analyzed. The order of precedence for power and ground net information is as
follows:
Hard Macro: Gray-box model, then White-box model,

then CONN view and then FRAM view (BBox)
Soft Macro: Gray-box model, then White-box model,
then CEL view and then FRAM view (BBox)
The results of the power and ground net extraction are automatically saved into
the PARA view.
C. Rail analysis
If there are white box or gray box models for macros (subblocks) and the Flatten Hierarchical
Cells is selected, the order of preference is:
Hard Macro:
Gray box, White box, CONN (Hard Macro), FRAM (BBox)
Soft Macro:
Gray box, White box, CEL (Soft Macro), FRAM (BBox)
The poRailAnalysis command has also been enhanced with another option for the treatment of
hierarchical cells. As of version U-2003.09, you can use the hierarchy browser to select which of
the available data that is present will be used for the rail analysis.
====================================
125
More detailed Astro-Rail information

====================================
Astro-Rail User Guide
SolvNet - Application Notes (search criteria: Astro-Rail)
SolvNet - Q & A
============================
TLAs (Three Letter Acronyms)
============================
CEL : CEL view in Milkyway
FRAM : FRAM view in Milkyway. An abstract view that contains just
enough information for place and route tool.
CONN : CONN view in Milkyway, the connectivity view of the power and ground nets
CSF : Current Source file. A text file that contains current source and location information
PG : Power and ground
TIM : Timing Model view in Milkyway, containing timing arcs
description of cells.
LM : Logic Model view in Milkyway
PWR : Power view in Milkyway
Gray box : Grey Box Model
White box : White Box Model
BBox : Black Box Model
13. Cross Talk Analysis
Signal integrity is the ability of an electrical signal to carry information reliably and resist the
effects of high-frequency electromagnetic interference from nearby signals.
Crosstalk is the undesirable electrical interaction between two or more physically adjacent nets
due to capacitive cross-coupling.
As integrated circuit technologies advance toward smaller geometries, crosstalk effects
become increasingly important compared to cell delays and net delays.
126
Figure1-1 shows an enlarged view of two parallel metal interconnections in an integrated circuit,
first for a 0.25-micron technology and then for a 0.13-micron technology.
As circuit geometries become smaller, wire interconnections become closer together and taller,
thus increasing the cross-coupling capacitance between nets. At the same time, parasitic
capacitance to the substrate becomes less as interconnections become narrower, and cell delays
are reduced as transistors become smaller.
With circuit geometries at 0.25 micron and above, substrate capacitance is usually the dominant
effect. However, with geometries at 0.18 micron and below, the coupling capacitance between
nets becomes significant, making crosstalk analysis increasingly important for accurate timing
analysis.
The Miller Effect

The Miller effect describes the extent to which sudden changes in voltage level of adjacent nets
cause the coupling portion of the capacitive load to increase or decrease as discerned by the
victim nets driving gate. The positive or negative impact of the Miller effect is dependent on the
relative switching directions of aggressor and victim nets.
• When aggressor nets switch in the opposite direction from a victim net, a positive Miller effect
increases the capacitance between them and magnifies delay. If aggressor and victim slew rates
are equal, the late timing (setup) coupling capacitance doubles because the voltage difference is
doubled.
• When aggressor nets switch in the same direction as a victim net, a negative Miller effect
reduces the capacitance between them and accelerates timing. If aggressor and victim slew rates
are equal, the early timing (hold) coupling capacitance is negated.
Crosstalk Delay Effects

Crosstalk can affect signal delays by changing the times at which signal transitions occur. For
example, consider the signal waveforms on the cross-coupled nets A, B, and C in Figure 1-2
127
Because of capacitive cross-coupling, the transitions on net A and net C can affect the time at
which the transition occurs on net B. A rising-edge transition on net A at the time shown in
Figure1-2 can cause the transition to occur later on net B, possibly contributing to a setup
violation for a path containing B. Similarly, a falling-edge transition on net C can cause the
transition to occur earlier on net B, possibly contributing to a hold violation for a path containing
B.
A Miller factor (a number typically between 0 and 2) is used to scale coupling capacitance for
wire load correction. When there is a positive Miller effect between nets (because they switch in
opposite directions), delay is scaled up by multiplying the coupling capacitance between the nets
by the maximum Miller factor. The typical value is 2, assuming equal slew rates.
• When there is a negative Miller effect between nets (because they switch in the same direction),
hold time is scaled down by multiplying the coupling capacitance between them by the minimum
Miller factor. When aggressor and victim slew rates are equal, the typical value is 0. This implies
that the effect of coupling capacitance is negated.
• When adjacent aggressor signals are not switching at the same time as their victim net, delay
may not be affected. The coupling capacitance between the nets is multiplied by a nominal Miller
factor, typically 1.
Crosstalk Noise Effects
Figure 1-3 Glitch Due to Crosstalk
In Figure 1-3 Net B should be constant at logic zero, but the rising edge on net A causes a noise
bump or glitch on net B. If the bump is sufficiently large and wide, it can cause an incorrect logic
value to be propagated to the next gate in the path containing net B.
128
Aggressor and Victim Nets

A net that receives undesirable cross-coupling effects from a nearby net is called a victim net. A
net that causes these effects in a victim net is called an aggressor net. Note that an aggressor net
can itself be a victim net; and a victim net can also be an aggressor net. The terms aggressor and
victim refer to the relationship between two nets being analyzed.
The timing impact of an aggressor net on a victim net depends on several factors:
• The amount of cross-coupled capacitance
• The relative times and slew rates of the signal transitions
• The switching directions (rising, falling)
• The combination of effects from multiple aggressor nets on a single victim net
Figure 1-4 Effects of Crosstalk at Different Arrival Times
Figure 1-4 illustrates the importance of timing considerations for calculating crosstalk effects.
The aggressor signal A has a range of possible arrival times, from early to late.
If the transition on A occurs at about the same time as the transition on B, it could cause the
transition on B to occur later as shown in the figure, possibly contributing to a setup violation; or
it could cause the transition to occur earlier, possibly contributing to a hold violation.
If the transition on A occurs at an early time, it induces an upward bump or glitch on net B before
the transition on B, which has no effect on the timing of signal B. However, a sufficiently large
bump can cause unintended current flow by forward-biasing a pass transistor.
Similarly, if the transition on A occurs at a late time, it induces a bump on B after the transition
on B, also with no effect on the timing of signal B. However, a sufficiently large bump can cause
a change in the logic value of the net, which can be propagated down the timing path.
Timing Windows and Crosstalk Delay Analysis

There are three analysis modes with respect to operating conditions: single, best_case/worst_
case, and on-chip variation. PT SI uses the on-chip variation mode to derive the timing window
relationships between aggressor nets and victim nets.
Using the on-chip variation mode, PT SI finds the earliest and the latest arrival times for each
victim net and aggressor net. The range of switching times, from earliest to latest arrival,
defines a timing window for the victim net, and defines another timing window for the
129
aggressor net. Crosstalk timing effects can occur only when the victim and aggressor timing
windows overlap.
PT SI performs crosstalk analysis using multiple iterations. For the first iteration, it ignores the
timing windows and assumes that all transitions can occur at any time. This results in a
pessimistic but fast analysis that gives approximate crosstalk delay values.
In subsequent analysis iterations, PT SI considers the timing windows and eliminates some
victim-aggressor relationships from consideration, based on the lack of overlap between the
applicable timing windows.
When an overlap occurs, PT SI calculates the effect of a transition occurring on the aggressor net
at the same time as a transition on the victim net. The analysis takes into account the drive
strengths and coupling characteristics of the two nets.
Cross-Coupling Models
Figure 1-5 shows the physical layout for a small portion of an integrated circuit, together with a
detailed model of the circuit that includes cross-coupled capacitance. Each physical
interconnection in the design has some distributed resistance along the conductor and some
parasitic capacitance to the substrate (ground) and to adjacent nets. The model divides each net
into subnets and represents the distributed resistance and capacitance as a set of discrete resistors
and capacitors.
A detailed model such as this can provide a very accurate prediction of crosstalk effects in
simulation. For an actual integrated circuit, however, a model might have too many circuit
130
elements to process in a practical amount of time. Given a reasonably accurate (but sufficiently
simple) network of cross-coupled capacitors from an external tool, PT SI
can obtain accurate crosstalk analysis results in a reasonable amount of time.
If you need to account for possible timing effects of crosstalk, using PT SI is much easier, faster,
and more thorough than using a circuit simulator such as SPICE. Instead of analyzing just a
single path or a few paths for crosstalk effects, PT SI lets you analyze the whole circuit using the
familiar PT analysis flow.
To use PT SI with PT, you only need to do the following additional steps:
• Enable PT SI by setting the si_enable_analysis variable to true.
• Back-annotate the design with cross-coupling capacitor information, as specified in a

Standard Parasitic Exchange Format (SPEF) or Detailed Standard Parasitic Format
(DSPF) file.
• Specify the parameters that determine the accuracy and speed of the crosstalk analysis effort,
such as the number of analysis iterations and the capacitance values that can be safely ignored.
Usage Flow
Here is an example of a script that uses crosstalk analysis, with the crosstalk-specific items shown
in boldface:
set_operating_conditions -analysis_type on_chip_variation

set si_enable_analysis TRUE
read_db ./test1.db
current_design test1
link_design
read_parasitics -keep_capacitive_coupling SPEF.spf
create_clock -period 5.0 clock
check_timing -include { no_driving_cell ideal_clocks \
partial_input_delay unexpandable_clocks }
report_timing
report_si_bottleneck
report_delay_calculation -crosstalk -from pin -to pin
The set_operating_conditions command sets the analysis type to on_chip_variation, which is

necessary to allow PT SI to correctly handle the
min-max timing window relationships. If you do not specify this analysis type explicitly,
PT SI automatically switches to that mode.
Setting si_enable_analysis to true enables crosstalk analysis using PT SI.

The -keep_capacitive_coupling option in the read_parasitics command is
necessary to maintain the cross-coupling status of capacitors that have been read into
PT.
In addition to IEEE 1481 Standard Parasitic Exchange Format (SPEF), PT SI can also read
parasitic data in Synopsys Binary Parasitic Format (SBPF) or Detailed Standard Parasitic Format
(DSPF). To read data in this format, use a command similar to the following:
131
pt_shell> read_parasitics -keep_capacitive_coupling -format SBPF mydata.sbpf
How PT SI Operates
Electrical filtering:
This means removing from consideration the aggressor nets whose effects are too small to be
significant, based on the calculated sizes of bump voltages on the victim nets. You can specify the
threshold level that determines which aggressor nets are filtered.
When filtering occurs, the aggressor net and the coupling capacitors connect to it are not
considered for analysis between that victim net and aggressor net. If the bump height contribution
of an aggressor on its victim net is very small (less than 0.00001 of the victim’s nominal voltage),
this aggressor is automatically filtered.
Filtering eliminates aggressors based on the size of the voltage bump induced on the victim net by
the aggressor net. The bump sizes depend on the cross-coupling capacitance values, drive
strengths, and resistance values in the nets.
An aggressor net is filtered if the peak voltage of the noise bump induced on the victim net,
divided by Vdd (the power supplyvoltage), is less than the value specified by this variable: By
default, this variable is set to 0.01
si_filter_per_aggr_noise_peak_ratio
Initial Net selection:

After filtering, PT SI selects the initial set of nets to be analyzed for crosstalk effects from those
not already eliminated by filtering. You can optionally specify that certain nets be included in, or
excluded from, this initial selection set.
Delay Calculation:
The next step is to perform delay calculation, taking into account the crosstalk effects on the
selected nets. This step is just like ordinary timing analysis, but with the addition of crosstalk
considerations.
PT SI Variables
si_analysis_logical_correlation_mode true
For a faster but more pessimistic analysis, you can disable logical correlation consideration. To
do so, set the variable si_analysis_logical_correlation_mode to false. This variable is set to true
by default.
si_ccs_aggressor_alignment_mode lookahead
si_ccs_use_gate_level_simulation true
si_enable_analysis false
si_filter_accum_aggr_noise_peak_ratio 0.03
si_filter_per_aggr_noise_peak_ratio 0.01
si_noise_composite_aggr_mode disabled
si_noise_slack_skip_disabled_arcs false
si_xtalk_composite_aggr_mode disabled
si_xtalk_composite_aggr_noise_peak_ratio 0.01
132
si_xtalk_composite_aggr_quantile_high_pct 99.73
si_xtalk_delay_analysis_mode all_paths
si_xtalk_double_switching_mode disabled
si_xtalk_exit_on_max_iteration_count 2
si_xtalk_exit_on_max_iteration_count_incr 2
si_xtalk_reselect_clock_network true
if a combination of smaller aggressors is below a different, larger threshold, all

of those smaller aggressors are filtered. This threshold is set by the variable
si_filter_accum_aggr_noise_peak_ratio. If the combined height of smaller noise bumps, divided
by Vdd, is less than this variable setting, all of those aggressors are removed from consideration
for that set of analysis conditions. The default setting for this variable is 0.03.
Capacitive Coupling Data

Make sure that your parasitic capacitance extraction tool generates an IEEE-standard Standard
Parasitic Exchange Format (SPEF) or Detailed Standard Parasitic Format (DSPF) file with
coupling capacitors, and that the tool settings generate a reasonable number of capacitors.
If your extraction tool supports the filtering of small capacitors based on a threshold, it might be
more efficient to let the extraction tool rather than PT SI do electrical filtering.
To further trade accuracy for simplicity, you might consider limiting the number of coupling
capacitors per aggressor-victim relationship.
PT SI ignores any cross-coupling capacitor between a net and itself. If possible,

configure your extraction tool to suppress generation of such self-coupling capacitors.
When you read in the capacitive coupling data with the read_parasitics command,
remember to use the -keep_capacitive_coupling option to retain the data.
check_timing
The check_timing command can check for several conditions related to crosstalk
analysis, making it easier to detect conditions that can lead to inaccurate crosstalk analysis results.
It is recommended that you run check_timing after you set the constraints and before you start an
analysis with update_timing or report_timing.
There are four types of checking that are specific to crosstalk analysis
• no_driving_cell –Any input port that does not have a driving cell and does not have case
analysis set on it. When no driving cell is specified, that net is assigned a strong driver for
modeling aggressor effects, which can be pessimistic.
• ideal_clocks – Any clock networks that are ideal (not propagated). For accurate determination
of crosstalk effects, the design should have a valid clock tree and the clocks should be
propagated.
• partial_input_delay – Any inputs that have only the minimum or only the maximum delay
defined with set_input_delay. To accurately determine timing windows, PT SI needs both the
earliest and latest arrival times at the inputs.
133
• unexpandable_clocks – Any clocks that have not been expanded to a common time base. For
accurate alignment of arrival windows, all of the synchronous and active clocks of different
frequencies must be expanded to a common time base.
Initial Crosstalk Analysis Run

For the first analysis run with crosstalk analysis, it is a good idea to use the default settings for the
crosstalk variables so that you can obtain results quickly. For example:
pt_shell> set si_enable_analysis TRUE

With the default variable settings, PT SI does the crosstalk analysis using two delay calculation
iterations. In the first iteration, PT SI ignores the timing windows so that it can quickly get an
estimate of crosstalk delay effects. In the second and final iteration, PT SI reselects only the nets
in the critical path of each path group, and then does a detailed analysis of those nets considering
the timing windows and transition types (rising or falling).
Additional Crosstalk Analysis Runs
There are many ways to modify the PT SI variable settings to obtain a more thorough and
accurate analysis, at the cost of more execution time. A good starting point is to try the following:
pt_shell> set si_xtalk_reselect_min_mode_slack 0

pt_shell> set si_xtalk_reselect_max_mode_slack 0
if you know that the clock is designed in such a way that it cannot be a victim net, then you can
disable net reselection based on the change in delay calculated in the previous iteration.
To do so, set the delta delay reselection parameters to very large numbers. For example:
pt_shell> set si_xtalk_reselect_delta_delay 100000

pt_shell> set si_xtalk_reselect_delta_delay_ratio 100000
As a result of these settings, even if the clock net has a large change in calculated delay due to
crosstalk, it is not reselected for analysis; only data path nets that contribute to slack violations
are reselected. This can speed up the analysis considerably because of the resources that would
otherwise be used for analyzing the clock net.
However, if you need to analyze clock paths in the detailed analysis, you can set either one of the
delta delay variables to some meaningful value, appropriate to your technology, so that nets are
reselected for analysis if they have a large enough change in calculated delay due to crosstalk.
By selecting a combination of the critical slack range and delta delay threshold, you have the
ability to trade off accuracy against runtime.
Virtual Attacker:
Noise Analysis with Composite Aggressors
Some complex designs require an efficient method of analyzing multiple aggressors to a
single victim net. In general, such designs have the following characteristics:
134
• A large number of aggressors per victim net

• Little or no filtering of aggressors
• Noise calculations are performed in high effort mode
If your design has these characteristics, you may wish to use composite aggressor analysis.
Composite aggressor analysis aggregates the effects of multiple aggressors into a single “virtual”
aggressor, thereby reducing the computational complexity cost and improving the runtime and
memory utilization without impacting accuracy.
To enable this mode, set the si_noise_composite_aggr_mode variable to normal or statistical. The
statistical mode applies statistical analysis to the composite aggressor to reduce its overall impact
on the victim net. By default, the variable is set to disabled, which disables composite aggressor
analysis.
Derating Noise Results

The set_noise_derate command modifies the calculated noise bump sizes by a specified factor or
absolute amount. It works like the set_timing_derate command, except that it modifies noise
bump sizes rather than path delays. The derating factors affect the reported bump sizes and noise
slacks. In the command, you specify the types of noise bumps (above/below high/low), the
parameters to be modified (height offset, height factor, and width factor), and the factor or
absolute amount of modification. For details, see the man page for the command.
Reading and Writing Parasitic Data
The read_parasitics command reads parasitic data from a file and annotates the
information on the nets of the current design.
PT SI supports the reading of parasitic data in Standard Parasitic Exchange Format (SPEF),
Detailed Standard Parasitic Format (DSPF), and Synopsys Binary Parasitic Format (SBPF). Data
in SBPF format occupies less disk space and can be read much faster than the same data stored in
the other formats.
pt_shell> read_parasitics -keep_capacitive_coupling file1.spef
Timing Window Overlap Analysis

The crosstalk effect on a net depends on the alignment of the victim and aggressor switching
time.
Depending on how the victim and aggressor switching times align, a net could become slower or
faster depending on the switching directions. PT SI calculates the crosstalk effect based on the
timing window of the aggressors and victim. This process is referred as timing window overlap
analysis or aggressor alignment.
During timing window overlap analysis, PT SI calculates the crosstalk delta delay per load pin of
a net. For this purpose, the timing arrival windows are used by PT SI, because it encapsulates all
the timing paths passing through the net. If the aggressor partially overlaps with the victim's
timing window, the partial effect (smaller delta delay) is considered.
Figure 2-4 illustrates how timing windows can overlap.

135
In this example, victim V1 is coupled with aggressor A1. The timing arrival windows are 2ns to
6ns for the aggressor, and 5ns to 9ns for the victim. Since the victim timing window overlaps
with the aggressor’s timing window, the signal integrity engine calculates the crosstalk delta
delay due to this aggressor.
Sometimes, when timing windows from different clocks exist on a victim and aggressor net, PT
SI considers the different combinations of these clocks with respect to the clock periods.
Multiple Aggressors. When there are multiple aggressors in the design, the signal integrity
engine finds the combination of aggressors that could produce the worst crosstalk effect and
calculates the crosstalk delta delay for this combination.
Figure 2-5 Multiple Aggressor Alignment
In this example, the victim has three aggressors: A1 is stronger than A2, and A2 is stronger than
A3. Since aggressor A1’s window does not overlap with the victim’s window, and A2 is stronger
than A3, the signal integrity engine will calculate the crosstalk delay due to aggressor A2. The A1
and A3 will not be considered for delta delay calculation.
The report_delay_calculation -crosstalk command will report the attributes for aggressors A1 and
A3 as follows:
N - aggressor does not overlap for the worst case alignment
Asynchronous Clocks. If the victim timing window clock and the aggressor timing window
clocks are asynchronous, they have no fixed timing relationship with each other. The aggressor
will be treated as infinite window with respect to the victim. The report_delay_calculation -
crosstalk command will report this as follows:
I - aggressor has Infinite arrival with respect to the victim

136
For multiple aggressors, if the aggressor clocks are synchronous with each other, but
asynchronous with the victim, the timing relationships between the aggressors are respected, but
they are still treated as infinite windows with respect to the victim.
Crosstalk Delay Analysis for All Paths

In the default mode, PT SI calculates the maximum possible delta delay (worst crosstalk effect)
for the victim and aggressor arrival windows. This ensures that crosstalk delta delay is considered
for all paths passing through the victim net, and that the maximum delta delay value is applied on
that net. This guarantees that all the paths going through the victim net are conservative.
To use this type of analysis, set the si_xtalk_delay_analysis_mode variable to all_paths mode.
The disadvantage of this approach is that the largest crosstalk delta delay value is applied to the
critical paths, making them pessimistic. When a path is recalculated using path-based analysis,
this pessimism is removed. You can also remove this pessimism by using other available
crosstalk delay analysis modes.
Preventing and Correcting Crosstalk With Astro-Xtalk
Question:
When should I use Astro-Xtalk to prevent and correct crosstalk?
Answer:
Crosstalk prevention and correction can and should be performed throughout the flow by using
Astro-Xtalk in the following stages:
* Post-Placement Optimization Phase 1 (astPostPS1)
Select "Prevent Xtalk" to use cell sizing and buffer insertion on potential crosstalk problems.
Potential crosstalk problems are identified by estimating future coupling capacitances and
considering the drive strengths of the driving cell of a net.
* Global Route (axgSetXtalkRouteOptions)
Set the following option in Crosstalk Route Options before performing Global Route. Select
"Reduce potential noise & crosstalk-induced delay" under Global Routing to add extra cost to the
router's cost function on potential crosstalk affected nets. The router will avoid assigning too
many nets with overlapping timing windows to the same G-cell.
* Track Assign (axgSetXtalkRouteOptions)
Set the following option in Crosstalk Route Option before performing Track Assign. Select
"Minimize noise & crosstalk-induced delay" under Track Assign to avoid putting nets with
overlapping timing windows on adjacent tracks, and to estimate potential noise using the timed-
peak noise model and reassign wires to reduce potential noise.
* At this stage, detailed crosstalk analysis needs to be performed.
See the Synopsys Astro User Guide for details.

137
* In Route Optimization (axgAdvRouteOpt)
Select "Crosstalk Noise Constraints" and "Crosstalk-induced Delay" to optimize by changing

route topology, cell sizing, and buffer insertion. Parasitic, timing, and crosstalk effects are
updated through the process.
Postroute Flow For Fixing Timing, Antenna, and Crosstalk
Question:
What is the best postroute flow for fixing timing, antenna, and crosstalk?
Answer:
The recommended order for fixing timing, antenna, and crosstalk is to first make sure your design
has either routed cleanly or is close to routing cleanly.
Close Timing
Use the astPostRouteOpt command to improve the postroute timing result (if it is bad). Skip this
step if the timing is already met.
Close Antenna Violations
Load in your antenna rules.
Select the high performance options with the SetHPORouteOptions dialog box.Use the
axgSearchRepair command to fix the antennas.Select the "Insert Diode with Checking" option in
the axgInsertDiode command dialog box to fix any remaining antenna violations.
Close Crosstalk
Optionally, run Astro crosstalk analysis. A noise threshold of anywhere between 0.25 and 0.45 is
valid. The default value of 0.45 is often pessimistic enough. Crosstalk analysis reports the number
of violations and generates crosstalk constraints for nets that almost fail crosstalk analysis, as well
as for nets that have failed.
The noise threshold should also be set on the Xtalk panel of the Timing Setup dialog box. This
value will be used as the default noise constraint for all nets. In this way, no previous crosstalk
analysis needs to be run because the noise is recalculated against this threshold each time the
timer is updated. This helps prevent new nets from becoming noise critical.
Use the ataIncludeXtalk command to take crosstalk effects into account during static timing
analysis.
Use the astPostRouteOpt command to fix timing, antenna ,and crosstalk at the same time. The
Crosstalk Noise Constraints and Crosstalk-Induced Delay options must be selected at this point.
138
If crosstalk issues persist, switch from Static to Switching Noise by selecting the Xtalk tab of the
Timing Setup form and re-run the astPostRouteOpt command once more.
See the Astro User Guide for more information.
CRPR Value in PT SI Analysis?
Question:
I am performing signal integrity analysis with the

timing_remove_clock_reconvergence_pessimism variable set to true. When I generate the report,
I see a very small value for CRPR. When I issue the report_crpr command, I find two CRPR
values reported, one with arrival times without crosstalk and another with arrival times with
crosstalk.
My value for clock reconvergence pessimism matches with the value of CRP reported without
crosstalk. Since I am doing signal integrity analysis shouldn't it have picked CRP value with
crosstalk?
Answer:
The manner in which PT SI accounts for crosstalk delta delays during CRPR analysis has
changed starting with the 2003.03 release to get better accuracy.
During clock reconvergence pessimism analysis, crosstalk delta delays are considered only if the
aggressor switching affects both the launch and capture signals at the same time.
For a given timing check, any clock reconvergence pessimism resulting from crosstalk delta
delays is removed only if precisely the same clock edge drives both the launch and capture
devices. Such checks are broadly classified as zero-cycle checks.
CRP value with crosstalk will be used only with zero cycle check timing reports.
Do on-chip variation and crosstalk analysis affect SDF delay figures?
Question:
Are the delay values written by the write_sdf command affected by enabling on-chip variation or
by enabling crosstalk analysis with PT SI?
Answer:
Yes, enabling on-chip variation analysis or crosstalk analysis affects the delay values written by
the write_sdf command. Note that on-chip variation analysis is implicitly enabled and soon and
crosstalk analysis is enabled. The min/max on-chip variation timing and the min/max delta delays
are used to compute the numbers placed in the min and max SDF triplet values.
Using on-chip variation analysis or crosstalk analysis results in a more conservative SDF file. The
fast delays are faster and the slow delays are slower.
139
With crosstalk analysis enabled, not only are the arrival windows considered, but also the
coupling capacitance and victim aggressor relationship. The delay values of interconnects
definitely depend on the switching of aggressor nets.If the aggressor and victim nets are changing
in the same direction, it reduces RC value and thereby reduces the delay values. As a result, the
net is sped up, and these delays are used for min delays. If the aggressor and victim nets are
switching in opposite directions, then the RC value increases, which induces more delay. These
delays are used for max delays.
You can dump out the SDF with and without enabling crosstalk to find out how the interconnect
delay values are different.
Power Supply Definitions for Crosstalk
Question:
Do I need to load a power supply before running crosstalk analysis? How does crosstalk analysis
work with different voltages for the same layout?
Answer:
You do not need to specify a supply voltage to run crosstalk analysis when you have only one
voltage. The Astro tool uses the global pruning threshold as the constraint and reports the nets
exceeding the constrained (the default on the dialog box is 0.45) noise voltage.
However, when you have multiple voltages in the design, you should load that information prior
to running crosstalk analysis.
The value specified as the global noise threshold is a %Vdd. During crosstalk analysis, the noise
is also reported in terms of % of Vdd.
See the following formula:
Vp = Vdd * (1/(1 + Cv/Cx + Ra/Rv * (1 + Ca/Cx)))
If you have multiple voltages, it will change as follows:
Vp = Vddvictim * (Vddagg/Vddvictim) * (1/(1 + Cv/Cx + Ra/Rv * (1 + Ca/Cx)))
Crosstalk analysis does not actually multiply the noise value with the Vddvictim
value. It basically calculates only the
(Vddagg/Vddvictim) * (1/(1 + Cv/Cx + Ra/Rv * (1 + Ca/Cx)))
part.
The ratio of Vddagg/Vddvictim would be 1 if you had a single supply voltage, but you would
need the actual values if they were not equal.
140
How does PT handle SPEF cross-coupling capacitance?
Question:
My extraction tool generates SPEF parasistics with coupling capacitors between nets. But I am
only using PT, without the PT SI crosstalk analysis option. What is the effect of coupling
capacitance on delay calculation?
Answer:
If you are using only PT (without PT SI crosstalk analysis), the coupling capacitance is tied to
ground for each coupled net. There is a switch in the read_parastics command, -
coupling_reduction_factor, which you can use to scale the amount of coupling capacitance that is
tied to ground. The default value is 1.0. To make your timing results more conservative, you can
use a value of 2.0 for max anlaysis and 0.0 for min analysis.
What is a tap cell and how do I use it in Apollo?
Question:
I would like to know:
Answer:
1. What is a 'tap cell'
The basic idea with a global substrate tap methodology is to omit internal substrate taps from the
standard cells and instead to sprinkle dedicated tap cells throughout the P&R layout. The process
design rules require that no piece of source/drain diffusion (inside a standard cell) be more than
some maximum distance away from the tap diffusion inside at least one of the sprinkled tap cells.
If we assume (for the time being at least) that we don't have visibility into the cells showing us
the exact locations of source/drain diffusion regions and/or tap diffusion regions, the tap to
diffusion spacing constraints outlined above translate into a maximum allowed distance between
any part of a standard cell and the edge of a dedicated tap cell.
2. What is a 'tap layer'
A tap layer is just an extra drawing layer defined in your technology file. It is not used in a fab
process and will not be streamed out.
3. Why I would want a 'tap cell'
You would want a tap cell to satisfy the design rules of your technology.
4. Why does Apollo need a 'tap layer'
Apollo can not distinguish N-tap from P-tap and therefore needs an extra layer to represent the
tap layer. Apollo will calculate max distance from this tap layer to source/drain diffusion, and if
needed, insert the special tap cell with the tap layer.
141
5. How to implement the 'tap layer' and add the tap cells
The tap layer must be drawn coincident with diffusion in the tap cell. Simply open the CEL view
of your tap cell and look for the diffusion layer. Now draw RECTANGLES in the tap layer over
the diffusion. Do not draw polygons. The tap cell placer cannot see tap polygons. After the tap
layer is added, save the cell. Use axgAddTapCell to place these tap cells in your design.
6. Are there any hidden switches associated with the tap cell insertion function
Currently, there are two in Apollo:

a. When inserting tap cells, you will need to put a value in the field setFormField "Add Tap Cell"
"Tap Distance Limit" "2x" where x is fab max tap distance. It will be required that a tap cell be a
maximun of x from any given point in the core; therefore, if you place tap cells 2x apart, this
condition will be satisfied. This causes tap cells to be placed 2x from the edge of the core,
though, which violates the max distance requirement. To get tap cells x from the edge of the
core, enter the following before running axgAddTapCell:
define TAPCELL_ADD_ROWENDS 1
b. axgAddTapCell looks for the CEL view of the tap cell by default. If the CEL view is not
available you can use the FRAM view. First set the following:
define TAPCELL_USE_FRAMEVIEW 1
Remember that as with the CEL view, tap layer must be present in FRAM view for the function
to work.
Check and Add Missing Tap Cell By Distance
Certification: Synopsys tested
Script Documentation
Tap cells are a special non-logic cell with well and substrate ties. These cells are typically used
when most or all of the standard cells in the library contain no substrate or well taps. Generally,
the design rules specify the maximum distance allowed between every transistor in a standard cell
and a well or the substrate ties.
Tap cells are usually added at regular intervals in the design prior to placement of standard cells.
After timing optimization, there might be some areas that are not covered within a certain
distance of tap cells and that need additional tap cells to avoid latch up issues.
To check for missing tap cells, the tap cells defined in the library need to have various attributes,
layer, and so forth, defined. This might require modification of the technology file and library in
which the tap cell resides.
However, it might not be feasible to do so.
The attached script checks for missing tap cells in the design, based on distance. The script takes
the tap distance and tap MASTER name as input. It will check for missing tap cells on the left
142
and right side by the specified distance. It will also add these missing tap cells and legalize the
design and ECO route the broken connections.
Note:
You might have to run this script multiple times because legalize_placement might move the
standard cells to adjacent rows where the tap cell might not be present within the specified
distance.
Inserting Well Taps Early
Question:
I am currently using the axgAddTapCell command to insert taps late in my flow, but I am
concerned about this. If a logic cell has to be moved to meet well tap DRC rules, then timing
might get worse. Can I insert well taps early in the flow before placement?
Answer:
After the chip or block is floorplanned, just before the first placement command is run, use the
axgArrayTapCell command to to place tap cells at consistently spaced intervals throughout the
placement area.
Here is an example of the axgArrayTapCell command with some options selected:
axgArrayTapCell
setFormField "Array Tap Cell" "Tap Master Name" "welltie_hivt_3"
setFormField "Array Tap Cell" "Pattern" "Stagger Every Other Row"
setFormField "Array Tap Cell" "Tap Cell Distance in Array" "56"
formOK "Array Tap Cell"
Be aware of the relationship between spacing and design rules for well taps:
The spacing is 2X the design rule. If a well tap is required to be within 28 microns of every
standard cell, well taps need to be placed every 56 microns.
Here is an example of a required tap cell layer in a .tf (techfile):
Layer "tap" {
layerNumber = 100
maskName = "tap"
isDefaultLayer =1
visible =0
selectable =1
blink =0
color = "white"
lineStyle = "solid"
pattern = "blank"
pitch =0
defaultWidth =0
minWidth =0
minSpacing =0
143
Need For Filler Cell
The purpose of filler cells is to maintain continuity in the rows by adding vdd! and gnd! lines and
an n-well. The filler cells also contain substrate connections to improve substrate biasing.
Typically, filler cells are used to fill any spaces between regular library cells to avoid planarity
problems and provide electrical continuity for power and ground.
While we are into 90 nanometer technology (or lower), you must use this switch "define
poIncludeFiller 1" before extraction to consider filler cells. Then you can proceed to power
analysis and rail analysis.
Latchup in Bulk CMOS
A byproduct of the Bulk CMOS structure is a pair of parasitic bipolar transistors. The
collector of each BJT is connected to the base of the other transistor in a positive
feedback structure. A phenomenon called latch-up can occur when (1) both BJT's
conduct, creating a low resistance path between Vdd and GND and (2) the product of the
gains of the two transistors in the feedback loop, b1 x b2, is greater than one. The result
of latch-up is at the minimum a circuit malfunction, and in the worst case, the destruction
of the device.
Cross section of parasitic transistors in Bulk CMOS

144
Equivalent Circuit
Latchup may begin when Vout drops below GND due to a noise spike or an improper
circuit hookup (Vout is the base of the lateral NPN Q2). If sufficient current flows
through Rsub to turn on Q2 (I Rsub > 0.7 V ), this will draw current through Rwell. If the
voltage drop across Rwell is high enough, Q1 will also turn on, and a self-sustaining low
resistance path between the power rails is formed. If the gains are such that b1 x b2 > 1,
latchup may occur. Once latchup has begun, the only way to stop it is to reduce the
current below a critical level, usually by removing power from the circuit.
The most likely place for latch-up to occur is in pad drivers, where large voltage
transients and large currents are present.
Preventing latchup
Fab/Design Approaches
1. Reduce the gain product b1 x b1

o move n-well and n+ source/drain farther apart increases width of the base
of Q2 and reduces gain beta2 > also reduces circuit density
o buried n+ layer in well reduces gain of Q1
2. Reduce the well and substrate resistances, producing lower voltage drops
o higher substrate doping level reduces Rsub
o reduce Rwell by making low resistance contact to GND
o guard rings around p- and/or n-well, with frequent contacts to the rings,
reduces the parasitic resistances.
145
CMOS transistors with guard rings
Systems Approaches
1. Make sure power supplies are off before plugging a board. A "hot plug in" of an
unpowered circuit board or module may cause signal pins to see surge voltages
greater than 0.7 V higher than Vdd, which rises more slowly to is peak value.
When the chip comes up to full power, sections of it could be latched.
2. Carefully protect electrostatic protection devices associated with I/O pads with
guard rings. Electrostatic discharge can trigger latchup. ESD enters the circuit
through an I/O pad, where it is clamped to one of the rails by the ESD protection
circuit. Devices in the protection circuit can inject minority carriers in the
substrate or well, potentially triggering latchup.
3. Radiation, including x-rays, cosmic, or alpha rays, can generate electron-hole
pairs as they penetrate the chip. These carriers can contribute to well or substrate
currents.
4. Sudden transients on the power or ground bus, which may occur if large numbers
of transistors switch simultaneously, can drive the circuit into latchup. Whether
this is possible should be checked through simulation.
1. How to reduce the power / ground Bounce?

The Power/Ground bounce can be avoided by designing the Power Network considering
(Simultaneous switching operation) SSO and Simultaneous switching noise (SSN).
Where will you get EM violations? How will you resolve EM violations on the power network,
near power pads or hard macros or on the vias?
Description
===========
Sometimes EM violations are flagged on the power network near power pads, hard macros or on
the vias. The following article offers a method to analyze these violations and fix them
(1) Violations near the hard macros. These violations could be on the
(a) VIAS that connect to the power pins of the macros
146
(b) on a strap near the macro

(c) "inside" the hard macro on a strap or via that is internal to hard macro
(2) Violations near power pads Violation here, could be on the core power ring or on the
straps/vias near the power pad
Analyzing the EM violations

===========================
(1) Analyzing EM violations near hard macro
(a) First identify on which layer the EM violation is occurring. It could happen on the VIA
layers as well.
(b) Next check the width of the wire on which EM violation is occurring
(c) Next identify all the nearby paths through which current could flow to the point where
violation is occurring.
(d) While identifying paths, find the paths that come through the biggest wires as those offer
the smallest resistance.
(e) Compare the widths of these biggest wires in the area to the width of the wire on the EM
violation is occurring.
If the violation is occurring on a via layer

(a) Identify all the via layer stack.
for example, Metal5 strap connecting to Metal2 power pin/strap would need 2-3, 305 and 4-5
via layers
(b) Using layer visibility control of the layout tool check the via arrays created to see if they are
full or partial. Or any missing via layer. partial via array is something that does not have all the
possible via cuts in the array. This could happen due to some blockage of hard macro nearby that
prevents the tool to put full via array. Sometime the blockage could prevent the tool from putting
the via array altogether. Only by turning on/off the via layer visibility, it can be easily seen if any
one of the via array is missing in the stack.
(2) Analyzing EM violations near the power pads The analysis of these violations is similar to
violations near hard macros. Follow the current from the power pad to the violation location.
Checking for any partial or missing vias and noting the width of the wires in the path.
Solution/Workaround
===================
(1) Resolving EM violations near hard macros REMOVE the vias on the biggest wires near the
violation location.
The reason is this. Almost always, these EM violations occur due to smaller width wires,
drawing too much current from the nearby larger width wires.
The larger width wires can carry a lot of current, the smaller cannot.
Thus causing EM violation on the smaller wire.
By REMOVING the via too much current is not drawn by the smaller wire and the violation is
removed.
147
This could sound counter-intuitive as IR drop now increases due to missing vias. Adding more
vias and additional straps near the EM violation area might agree with the logic of reducing
resistance and providing more paths.
That is difficult to control. And the maximum current to the small violating wire is always
provided by the biggest wire in the area, due to path of least resistance.
Also violations inside the macro on a different layer, say Metal2, is harder to control by adding
straps over or near the macro on a different layer.
REMOVING vias is a very effective way of resolving EM violations at the slight cost of reducing
IR drop.
Violations on the via layer can be fixed by replacing partial via array by full via arrays or by
REMOVING the entire via stack. These partial via arrays create a bottleneck for the current
causing the EM violation.
(2) Resolving EM violations near power pads. These are expected as maximum current is present
on the wires near the power pads. Core ring wires near power pad, Straps near power pad and the
vias in the power pad proximity carry the maximum current in the whole design.
To reduce EM or to remove these violations, make sure no partial via arrays area present,
especially the connection from the power pad to core ring.
Give more IO2Core spacing to facilitate full via arrays. Most power pads have power pins on
several layers. Provide stacked parallel wires if possible from these power pins to the core ring.
This reduces R significantly.
You can add vias on the parallel wires to further reduce Resistance and
Current density. Adding additional horizontal and vertical straps near the power pad could also
reduce current density on the straps. Widening these straps also is a good way to reduce R and
current density.
Dishing Effect:
For sub-90-nm CMOS technology, chemical-mechanical polishing (CMP) is widely used as the
primary technique to planarize the interlayer dielectric (ILD) and metal surface. It has been the
enabling technology for the copper damascene process with a high metal removal rate in this kind
of trench-first
integration [1]. However, the CMP damascene process also introduces undesirable side effects,
including dielectric erosion and metal dishing. The Figure below illustrates oxide erosion and
copper dishing their influence on metal line cross sections after CMP
148
When using the CMP procedure to remove unwanted portions of metal layer to leave thin lines of
metals as interconnects, problems such as dishing may occur, which leads to a non-planar surface.
The dishing effect is particularly serious when the polishing needs to be carried out until metal is
left exclusively in previously etched lines without any metal on the surface of a dielectric layer. It
has been found that a significant overpolish is typically needed, which results in erosion of the
dielectric layer and dishing of metal below the surface of the dielectric layer. As a result, the
thickness of the interconnects in overpolished areas is severely reduced, resulting in an increased
sheet resistance when compared to interconnects in other areas of the semiconductor wafer.
Additionally,
an uneven topography is in reduced on the surface of the semiconductor
What is cross talk?
o Switching of the signal in one net can interfere neigbouring net due to cross
coupling capacitance.This affect is known as cros talk. Cross talk may lead setup
or hold voilation.
How can you avoid cross talk?
o -Double spacing=>more spacing=>less capacitance=>less cross talk

o -Multiple vias=>less resistance=>less RC delay
o -Shielding=> constant cross coupling capacitance =>known value of crosstalk
o -Buffer insertion=>boost the victim strength
How shielding avoids crosstalk problem? What exactly happens there?
o -High frequency noise (or glitch)is coupled to VSS (or VDD) since shilded layers
are connected to either VDD or VSS.
o Coupling capacitance remains constant with VDD or VSS.
How spacing helps in reducing crosstalk noise?
o width is more=>more spacing between two conductors=>cross coupling

capacitance is less=>less cross talk
Why double spacing and multiple vias are used related to clock?
o Why clock?-- because it is the one signal which changes it’s state regularly and
more compared to any other signal. If any other signal switches fast then also we
can use double space.
o Double spacing=>width is more=>capacitance is less=>less cross talk
o Multiple vias=>resistance in parellel=>less resistance=>less RC delay
How buffer can be used in victim to avoid crosstalk?
o Buffer increase victims signal strength; buffers break the net length=>victims are
more tolerant to coupled signal from aggressor.
149
2. What is Crosstalk Delay and Crosstalk Noise? Describe that?

3. What are the SI issues faced in 65nm? How did you solve?
4. Pin placement/reordering for handing crosstalk issues.
5. What is power integrity and signal integrity?
14. Electron Migration
What is EM and it effects?
o Due to high current flow in the metal atoms of the metal can displaced from its origial
place. When it happens in larger amount the metal can open or bulging of metal
layer can happen. This effect is known as Electro Migration.
o Affects: Either short or open of the signal line or power line.
Special requirements for EM verification

All the physical verifications and parasitic extractions are based on the design layout. The layout
is a two-dimensional view, say X-Y dimensions. The other dimension of the design, say the
vertical or Z dimension, is solely determined by the chip manufacturing process. The parameters,
such as the metal thickness of a specific metal layer, the via height of a specific via layer, etc., are
the same for all the designs using the same manufacturing process. Therefore, the EM
specifications for metal layers are typically expressed in current per unit width, not in current per
unit area. For a specific manufacturing process, different metal layers may have different values
of thickness. More importantly, the interconnect metal pieces of different metal layers are
connected through so-called vias. Because metal layers and vias have different EM specifications
to comply with, the resistors belonging to different metal or via layers in the extracted parasitic
netlist must not be merged.
Power and ground nets may be extracted separately with R-only option
Current flows on power and ground nets are mainly in one direction, so the average current
values are typically used for the EM check. Thus the capacitance impact to the average current
values is small enough to be ignored. Considering that the number of parasitic capacitors on
power and ground nets is close to that of parasitic resistors, it is a very significant simplification
to eliminate the capacitance extraction of power and ground nets.
“LAYER” reduction option should be used for all EM verification extractions

StarRCXT provides a parasitic reduction option choice called “LAYER”, which means that no
merge can be done if two connected resistors belong to different physical layers, and connected
resistors can be merged if they belong to the same physical layer. The “LAYER” reduction option
should be used for all the EM verification extraction in order to meet the special EM check
requirement and to reduce the netlist as much as possible.
An Example StarRCXT command file for EM verification extraction

150
* Database Options
BLOCK: ADC08B3000_ALL_A_Z1
MILKYWAY_DATABASE: ./ADC08B3000_ALL_A_Z1
MILKYWAY_EXTRACT_VIEW: YES
REMOVE_DANGLING_NETS: YES
REMOVE_FLOATING_NETS: YES
TRANSLATE_RETAIN_BULK_LAYERS: YES
*
EXTRACTION: RC
POWER_EXTRACT: YES
POWER_REDUCTION: LAYER
NETLIST_NODE_SECTION: YES
* Processing Options. Use ! to skip the nets
POWER_NETS: pwpr VDD* vddo gnd* pwrn VSS*
NETS: *
NETLIST_SELECT_NETS: *
NETLIST_TYPE: Cg !VDD* !pwpr !vddo !VA *
NETLIST_TYPE: R VDD* pwpr vddo VA
*
* For EM analysis purpose, the following two options should be
set
* in such a way as
NETLIST_TAIL_COMMENTS: YES
REDUCTION: LAYER
*
TCAD_GRD_FILE: CMOS9_5lm_bm_xtor.nxtgrd
MAPPING_FILE: cmos9_5lm_bm_xtor.mapfile
XREF: YES
* Transistor-level extraction.
SKIP_CELLS: !*
* Use STAR format to make the netlist smaller
NETLIST_FILE: adc08b3000_all_a_z1_vdd.spf
NETLIST_FORMAT: star
1. What is electro-migration? How is this problem addressed in backend?
Chip Finishing (Closure)
Post-Route: Timing & DRC clean design
I. Antenna Fixing
II. Wire Spreading
III. Double via Insertion
IV. Filler Cell Insertion
V. Metal Fill Insertion
1. What does antenna rules signify related to ASIC backend?How are these violations
handled?
151
In general, fixing antenna problems is quite expensive. Therefore, before fixing antenna
violations, the routing should be completed with very few or 0 DRC violations.
Antenna fixing can be done either before or after 'Optimize Routing'. Running 'Optimize
Routing' after antenna-fix can generate a good layout first. However, in most cases, running
'Optimize Routing' first can shorten
the overall turn-around time if both steps are required.
2. What is Antenna effect and antenna ratio? How to eliminate this? why it occurs only in
Deep sub-micron technology ?
Antenna Ratio:
The antenna effect can occur during the chip manufacturing process and render a die useless.
During metallization (when metal wires are laid across devices), some wires connected to the
polysilicon gates of transistors may be left floating (unconnected) until the upper metal layers are
deposited. A long floating interconnect can act as a temporary capacitor, collecting charges
during fabrication steps, such as plasma etching. If the energy built-up on the floating node is
suddenly discharged, the logic gate could suffer permanent damage due to transistor gate oxide
breakdown. This is termed as Antenna Effect.
Because in nanotechnology the oxide thickness under the transistor gate is very thin. This
problem was not there in 0.35u technology. Even if this charge does not get discharge to body. It
stays in oxide as hot carrier. there by changing threshold, a big problem.
Antenna Elimination and its effect:
152
Antenna Ratio:
Antenna ratio is defined as the ratio between the physical area of the conductors making to the
total gate oxide area to which the antenna is electrically connected. A higher ratio implies a
greater propensity to fail due to the antenna effect.
Antenna ratio for metal = 500
Antenna ratio for metal = 1100
Why Wire Spreading?

• Random particle defects during manufacturing may cause shorts/opens on routes resulting in
loss of yield
• Such regions prune to shorts/opens are referred as ‘critical area’
To improve yield against the random particle Defects
Wire spreading resulting in more evenly distributed wires

153
A probability distribution of various defect sizes to calculate critical area

– The distribution function varies for different fabrication processes
Push routes off-track by ½ pitch
– May result in increase of “open” critical area even though reducing “short” critical area
– Can choose to widen wires thus not increasing “open” critical area
– Will not push the frozen nets
Push routes off-track by ½ pitch where resulting length of the jog metal can be more than
minimum jog length
Why NOT run wire spreading before Antenna fixing?

– Not recommended, Antenna has the most priority after DRC
– Wire spreading (by pushing off-track) might not leave enough
resource to fix antenna
• Will wire spreading switch layers?
– Pushes wires off the track if space available, doesn’t switch
layers to allow pushing (spreading)
– However, Search & Repair run after wire spreading may result
in minimal changes to resolve DRC
• Will wire spreading introduce Antenna violations?
– Antenna ratio dependant on Antenna length may change
slightly by wire spreading
– In most cases should NOT introduce new Antenna violations
What/Why Double Via Insertion?

• Voids in vias is a serious issue in manufacturing
• To handle this issue,
– Reduce via count : Optimize via techniques are employed in route_opt

– Add backup vias : known as double vias
154
Double via count

Good : ~ 95% on all top level layers & ~70% on via1
Rolls back double via to avoid antenna violations
– DRC violations
Double via introduces drc in congested designs
Will double via increase critical area?

– Yes, Any increase in metal (route/cut layer) on layout is
bound to introduce critical area. But it will be very little.
• Will double via introduce new Antenna violations?
– Vias are doubled with out disturbing the route pattern
– However, Search & Repair run later to resolve DRC might
cause antenna violations
– Turning ON antenna checking will roll back double to
single vias reducing antennas
Why Filler Cell Insertion?

For better yield, density of the chip needs to be
uniform
• Some placement sites remains empty on some
Rows
155
– Accepts two lists of filler cells : with/without metal

– Cells without metal are inserted without checking drc’s
You need to provide cells without any metal
– Cells with metal are inserted only if no DRC violation
Results
• Filler cell Insertion
– Inserts the cells in the order specified
Larger to smaller is recommended
– By default, honors the hard/soft placement blockages
Why Metal Fill Insertion?

Non uniform metal density causes problems during
manufacturing
– Especially., Chemical mechanical polishing
Extraction considering Metal fill environment

– Extraction does NOT consider metal fill in FILL view
– Extraction does NOT correctly consider fill in CELL view
– Timing analysis does NOT consider fill
15. Chip Closure or DFM or DFY:
Metal Fill:
Once the low-density regions have been identified, they must be repaired. The most common
approach is to insert additional metal, not for electrical purposes, but simply to help keep the
planarity constant. There are three generally accepted methods of creating this metal fill.
1. By hand through a layout editor; this is time consuming and error prone.
2. To use automatic insertion methods in layout or place-and-route tools. Although it’s certainly
faster and easier, grid restrictions and other issues often limit the amount of metal fill that can be
placed.
3. To do automatic metal fill insertion at the time of physical verification. This simplifies the task
because density checking and repair can be done in a single iteration
If the metal fill is left ‘floating’, it can affect the timing and signal integrity of neighboring signal
lines.
Metal Slotting:
Another factor that affects yield is metal slotting. There are many physical reasons that make the
inclusion of holes or slots in the metal desirable.
For aluminium processes, metal slotting can help reduce electromigration. The first, most
commonly associated with aluminium processes, involves the creation of rectangular slots.
156
In copper processes, metal slotting gives the copper something to ‘stick to’, which helps offset
the sagging effect. Most commonly associated with copper processes, involves the insertion of
simple square holes.
To minimise current blockage with rectangular slots, the slots must be aligned in the same
direction as the current and staggered for better electron flow. Problems occur at T-junctions or
similar structures where working out the current flow is more difficult.
Some layout related tools offer methods to automatically slot wide metal lines upon creation but
they can have limitations. Metal slotting, like metal fill insertion, is often easier to implement at
the physical verification stage using a DRC engine, especially in the less constrained case of
square slots. Employing the same algorithms used in metal fill insertion, a physical verification
tool can place automatic slots in wide copper lines.
Antenna Effect:
Define antenna problem and how did you resolve these problem?
In aluminum processing, an ion etch is used to remove excess metal underneath a mask layer,
allowing for the accumulation of charge along the sidewalls of the metal. Once excess metal is
removed, the mask layer is removed with yet another ion etch. This creates a charge that
accumulates along the top of the metal line. Once the metal layer is fully processed and an oxide
layer is built on top of it, all the charge that had been associated with the metal will seek a means
to dissipate
o Increased net length can accumulate more charges while manufacturing of the device due to
ionization process. If this net is connected to gate of the MOSFET it can damage dielectric
property of the gate and gate may conduct causing damage to the MOSFET. This is antenna
problem.
This static charge collected on the wires during the multilevel metallization process can destroy
the device and make the chip functionless. This is usually referred to as “the charge-collecting
antenna problem” or simply “the antenna problem.”
To protect the MOS device from being damaged, the area of the metal, which is seen by the input
pin during a single metal mask stage, must be limited to a certain value. When the metal area
exceeds this value, a reverse-biased diode can be used to provide a discharging path to protect the
input pin.
157
(antenna-area) / (gate-area) < (max-antenna-ratio)
It means that the ratio of metal (antenna-area) to input pin (gate area) must be less than the max-
antenna-ratio given by foundry.
Decrease the length of the net by providing more vias and layer jumping (Jogging).
o Metal splitting layer jumping (Jogging). Minimizing the antenna area by

breaking the wires with more contacts and wires in other layers
o Antenna diode Insertion : Inserting extra diode to provide the discharge path
158
Synopsys:
One way to protect gates from antenna effects is to provide a discharge path for the accumulated
charge to leave the net. However, the discharge path should not allow current to flow during
normal chip operation. Discharging can be accomplished by inserting a reverse-biased diode on
the net somewhere close to the gate that is being protected. In normal operation, the reverse bias
would prevent the current flowing through the diode. When the voltage across the diode exceeds
its breakdown voltage (which is much less than the voltage drop when the gate fails), the
current is discharged through the diode to the substrate. This discharging technique limits the
maximum voltage that the gate ever encounters.
Mentor:
At high temperatures, such as those used during IC fabrication, a reverse-biased diode is

capable of draining a significant amount of charge, preventing damage to neighbouring
transistors. In normal conditions, these high temperatures are not reached so diodes will not
affect the signals significantly, other than occasional timing effects due to added parasitic
capacitances. This does not apply only to specifically designed diodes. During manufacture, any
standard NP junction can act as a diode, including source and drain regions.
Why should I avoid slotting? Is wire splitting or multiple rings a good alternative for power
rings?
Answer:
Description
===========
Most foundries now require that any wide wire that is greater than a certain width, for example,
10um, has to be slotted.
The slotting rule states that wide wires greater than a certain width must have rectangles of holes
in the middle of the wires to avoid dishing effects.
159
Wide wires are often used for core power rings that go around the core in the device's peripheral
IOs.
Slotting has severe negative impact:
(A) Poor Current flow.

The slots (rectangular holes) on the wide wires are usually not aligned with each other. This
causes the current to go around the slots in a round about fashion.
(B) Increased resistance due to current crowding

Due to current crowding around the slots, there is an increased resistance causing
increased IR drop in the power network.
(C) Low Reliability Due to Electromigration

Due to severe current crowding around the slots, electromigration causes the slots to grow in time
until the wide wire completely breaks. This wide wire being the main core power ring will cause
the device to fail.
(D) Extraction Issues

Extraction tools cannot properly account for the current crowding effects.
For resistance extraction, extraction tools have to break the wide wire into several polygons to cut
around the slots and then apply the unit resistance which reduces accuracy.
Not taking current crowding into effect will severely limit the accuracy and any rail analysis done
on such a network is inaccurate.
Capacitance extraction, if done, on these wide wires is also inaccurate

because extraction tools do not have patterns of slotted wires to verify and also cannot take into
account the intra-wire capacitance within a slot.
Wire Splitting or Multiple Rings
Wire splitting (also called multiple rings) is a very simple technique to avoid slotting and can be
easily implemented in IC Compiler.
Foundries indicate that any wire over 10um has to be slotted and the core power ring has to be at
least 100um to carry all the current required by the device.
Instead of one 100um wire, put ten 10um wires spaced apart at minimum distance.
The power wires from the IO POWER PAD will connect to ALL the 10 wires.
The horizontal and vertical power straps (or stripes) that go over the core will also connect to
ALL the 10 wires.
The same thing is done for VSS as well.
The only downside to this is the extra space needed to put in ten 10um wires at minimum distance
apart instead of one 100um wire (which could be just a few microns).
160
The current and resistance distribution is uniform and smooth.
Wire/VIA hookups to multiple rings

==================================
Vias will also hook up appropriately to all the 10 wires.
Any wire (strap) connecting to these ten 10um wires will connect to ALL
through VIAS; hence there is no extra load on any single wire.
This technique does not have any of the drawbacks mentioned for the slotted wires.
Wire splitting or multiple rings in IC Compiler can be achieved by simply specifying VDD 10
times in the Nets Tab and specifying the min space, resulting in 10 wires.
You can also interlace, if desired, by specifying "VDD VSS VDD VSS," which will put 4 wires
in that order with min spacing between them.
Wire splitting can be done in almost all cases where slotting is required.
16. Low Power Design techniques
1. What is the significance of clock gating?

Clock Gating is a power reduction technique, As clock is a highly toggling signal, It
consumes more power, When a potion of design not using the clock, Clock passing to that
particular portion is stopped by using clock gating technique.
2. What are the Power Management Techniques?
• Multi Voltage Libraries can be used
• Multi threshold Cells can be used
• Optimized Coarse grained switching cells is used to reduce and fast wake-up time.
3. Why are multi Vt libraries?

4. What are the challenges being faced as we move to deep sub micron technology?
1 Explain short circuit current.
Short Circuit Power
When dynamic power is analyzed the switching component of power consumption, an

instantaneous rise time was assumed, which insures that only one of the transistors is ON. In
practice, finite rise and fall times results in a direct current path between the supply and ground,
GND, this exists for a short period of time during switching.
161
Short circuit power [3]
Consider an example of inverter. During switching both NMOS and PMOS transistors in the
circuit conduct simultaneously for a short amount of time. Specifically, when the condition, VTn
(lesser than) Vin (lesser than) Vdd - |VTp| holds for the input voltage, where VTn and VTp are
NMOS and PMOS thresholds, there will be a conductive path open between Vdd and GND
because both the NMOS and PMOS devices will be simultaneously on. This forms direct current
path between the power supply and the ground. This current has no contribution towards charging
of the output capacitance of the logic gate.
When the input rising voltage exceeds the threshold voltage of NMOS transistor, it starts
conducting. Similarly until input voltage reaches Vdd-|Vt,p| PMOS transistor remains ON. Thus
for some time both transistors are ON. Similar event causes short circuit current to flow when
signal is falling. Short circuit current terminates when transition is completed.
Assuming symmetric inverter with Kn=Kp=K and Vt,n=|Vt,p|=Vt and very small capacitive load
and both rise and fall times are same we can write,
Pavg(short circuit) = 1/12.k.τ.Fclk.(Vdd-2Vt)3 [1]
Thus short circuit power is directly proportional to rise time, fall time and k. Therefore reducing
the input transition times will decrease the short circuit current component. But propagation delay
requirements have to be considered while doing so.
Short circuit currents are significant when the rise/fall time at the input of a gate is much larger
than the output rise/ fall time. This is because the short-circuit path will be active for a longer
period of time. To minimize the total average short-circuits current, it is desirable to have equal
input and output edge times [2]. In this case, the power consumed by the short-circuit currents is
typically less than 10% of the total dynamic power. An important point to note is that if the
supply is lowered to be below the sum of the thresholds of the transistors, Vdd (lesser than) VTn
+ |VTp|, the short-circuit currents can be eliminated because both devices will not be on at the
same time for any value of input voltage.
2 What are pros/cons of using low Vt, high Vt cells?
Multi Threshold (MVT) Voltage Technique

162
Multiple threshold voltage techniques use both Low Vt and High Vt cells. Use lower threshold
gates on critical path while higher threshold gates off the critical path. This methodology
improves performance without an increase in power. Flip side of this technique is that Multi Vt
cells increase fabrication complexity. It also lengthens the design time. Improper optimization of
the design may utilize more Low Vt cells and hence could end up with increased power!
Ruchir Puri et al. [2] have discussed the design issues related with multiple supply voltages and
multiple threshold voltages in the optimization of dynamic and static power. They noted several
advantages of Multi Vt optimization. Multi Vt optimization is placement non disturbing
transformation. Footprint and area of low Vt and high Vt cells are same as that of nominal Vt
cells. This enables time critical paths to be swapped by low Vt cells easily.
Frank Sill et al. [3] have proposed a new method for assignment of devices with different Vth in a
double Vth process. They developed mixed Vth gates. They showed leakage reduction of 25%.
They created a library of LVT, mixed Vt, HVT and Multi Vt. They compared simulation results
with a LVT version of each design. Leakage power dissipation decreased by average 65% with
mixed Vth technique compared to the LVT implementation.
Meeta Srivatsav et al. [4] have explored various ways of reducing leakage power and
recommended Multi Vt approach. They have carried out analysis using 130 nm and 90 nm
technology. They synthesized design with different combination of target library. The
combinations were Low Vt cells only, High Vt cells only, High Vt cells with incremental compile
using Low Vt library, nominal (or regular) Vt cell and Multi Vt targeting Hvt and Lvt in one go.
With only Low Vt highest leakage power of 469 µw was obtained. With only High Vt cells
leakage power consumption was minimum but timing was not met (-1.13 of slack). With nominal
Vt moderate leakage power value of 263 µw was obtained. Best results (54 µw with timing met)
obtained for synthesis targeting Hvt library and incremental compile using Lvt library.
Different low leakage synthesis flows are carried out by Xiaodong Zhang [1] using Synopsys
EDA tools are listed below:
• Low-Vt --> Multi-Vt flow: This produces least cell count and least dynamic power. But
produce highest leakage power. It takes very low runtime. Good for a design with very
tight timing constraints
• Multi-Vt one pass flow: It takes longest runtime and can be used in most of designs.
• High-Vt --> Multi-Vt flow: Produce least leakage power consumption but has high cell
count and dynamic power. This methodology is good for leakage power critical design.
• High-Vt --> Multi-Vt with different timing constraints flow: This is a well balanced
flow and produces second least leakage power. This has smaller cell count, area and
dynamic power and shorter runtime. This design is also good for most of designs.
Optimization Strategies
The tradeoffs between the different Vt cells to achieve optimal performance are especially
beneficial during synthesis technology gate mapping and placement optimization. The logic
163
synthesis, or gate mapping phase of the optimization process is implemented by synthesis tool,
and placement optimization is handled physical implementation tool.
Synthesis
During logic synthesis, the design is mapped to technology gates. At this point in the process
optimal logic architectures are selected, mapped to technology cells, and optimized for specific
design goals. Since a range of Vt libraries are now available and choices have to be made across
architectures with different Vt cells, logic synthesis is the ideal place to start deploying a mix of
different Vt cells into the design.
Single-Pass vs. Two-Pass Synthesis –with multiple threshold libraries
Multiple libraries are currently available with different performance, area and power utilization
characteristics, and synthesis optimization can be achieved using either one or more libraries
concurrently. In a single-pass flow, multiple libraries can be loaded into synthesis tool prior to
synthesis optimization. In a two-pass flow, the design is initially optimized using one library, and
then an incremental optimization is carried out using additional libraries.
About multi vt optimization in his paper Ruchir Puri[2] says: “The multi-threshold optimization
algorithm implemented in physical synthesis is capable of optimizing several Vt levels at the
same time. Initially, the design is optimized using the higher threshold voltage library only. Then,
the Multi-Vt optimization computes the power-performance tradeoff curve up to the maximum
allowable leakage power limit for the next lower threshold voltage library. Subsequently, the
optimization starts from the most critical slack end of this power-performance curve and switches
the most critical gate to next equivalent lower-Vt version. This will increase the leakage in the
design beyond the maximum permissible leakage power. To compensate for this, the algorithm
picks the least critical gate from the other end of the power-performance curve and substitutes it
back with its higher-Vt version. If this does not bring the leakage power below the allowed limit,
it traverses further from the curve (from least critical towards more critical) substituting gates
with higher-Vt gates, until the leakage limit is satisfied. Then we jump back to the second most
critical cell and switch it to the lower-Vt version. This iteration continues until we can no longer
switch any gate with the lower vt version without violating the leakage power limit.”
But Amit Agarwal et al. [5] have warned about the yield loss possibilities due to dual Vt flows.
They showed that in nano-scale regime, conventional dual Vt design suffers from yield loss due
to process variation and vastly overestimates leakage savings since it does not consider junction
BTBT (Band To Band Tunneling) leakage into account. Their analysis showed the importance of
considering device based analysis while designing low power schemes like dual Vt. Their
research also showed that in scaled technology, statistical information of both leakage and delay
helps in minimizing total leakage while ensuring yield with respect to target delay in dual Vt
designs. However, nonscalability of the present way of realizing high Vt, requires the use of
different process options such as metal gate work function engineering in future technologies.
Issues with Multi Height Cell Placement in Multi Vt Flow
Creating the reference libraries
There are two reference libraries required. One is low Vt cell library and another is high Vt cell
library. These libraries have two different height cells. Reference libraries are created as per the
164
standard synopsys flow. Library creation flow is given in Figure 1. Read_lib command is used for
this purpose. As TF and LEF files are available TF+LEF option is chosen for library creation.
After the completion of the physical library preparation steps, logical libraries are prepared.
Figure 1 Library preparation command window
Different Unit Tile Creation
The unit tile height of lvt cells is 2.52 µ and hvt cells are 1.96 µ. Hence two separate unit tiles
have to be created and should be added in the technology file. Hvt reference library is created
with the unit tile name “unit” and lvt reference library is created with unit tile name “lvt_unit”.
By default “unit” tile is defined in technology file and the other unit tile “lvt_unit” is also added
to the technology file.
165
Figure 2. Tile height specifications in library preparation
2 What are power dissipation components? How do you reduce them?
Dynamic Power
As the name indicates it occurs when signals which go through the CMOS circuits change their
logic state. At this moment energy is drawn from the power supply to charge up the output node
capacitance. Charging up of the output capacitance causes transition from 0V to Vdd.
Considering an inverter example power drawn from the power supply is dissipated as heat in
pMOS transistor. On the other hand charge down process causes NMOS transistor to dissipate
heat.
Output capacitance of the CMOS logic gate consists of below components:
1) Output node capacitance of the logic gate: This is due to the drain diffusion region.
2) Total interconnects capacitance: This has higher effect as technology node shrinks.
3) Input node capacitance of the driven gate: This is due to the gate oxide capacitance.
Dynamic power dissipation in CMOS inverter [1]

166
The average power dissipation of the CMOS logic circuit can be mathematically expressed [2].
Integrating the instantaneous power over the period of interest, the energy EVDD taken from the
supply during the transition is given by
EVDD= 0->∞∫I. VDD(t).VDD.dt
=VDD. 0->∞∫ CL.(dvout/dt).dt
= CL.VDD. 0->VDD∫.dvout
= CL.VDD2
Similarly integrating the instantaneous power over the period of interest, the energy Ec stored in
the capacitor at the end of transition is given by,
Ec = 0->∞∫ I. VDD(t).Vout.dt
= 0->∞∫ CL.(dvout/dt).vout.dt
= CL.(integration from 0 to VDD).Vout.dvout
= (CL.VDD2)/2
Therefore energy stored in capacitor is= CL.VDD2 / 2.
This implies that half of the energy supplied by the power source is stored in CL. The other half
has been dissipated by the PMOS devices. This energy dissipation is independent of the size of
the PMOS device. During the discharge phase the charge is removed from the capacitor, and its
energy is dissipated in the NMOS device.
Each switching cycle takes a fixed amount of energy = CL. VDD2.
If a gate is switched on and off ‘fn’ times / second, then Pdynamic = CL. VDD2. fn.
Where fn frequency of energy consuming transitions. This is also called "switching activity".
In general we can write,
Pdynamic = Ceff.VDD2.f
Where f maximum switching activity possible i.e. clock rate.
Hence,
Pavg= 1/T [0->T/2∫Vout (-Cload.dVout/dt)dt+T/2->T∫(VDD-Vout)(Cload.dVout/dt) dt]
i.e. Pavg=1/T Cload.VDD2

i.e. Pavg=Cload.VDD2.Fclk
167
Here energy required to charge up the output node to Vdd and charge down the total output load
capacitance to ground level is integrated. Applied input periodic waveform having its period T is
assumed to be having zero rise and fall time. Note that average power is independent of transistor
size and characteristics.
Internal power
This is the power consumed by the cell when an input changes, but output does not change [3]. In
logic gates not every change of the current running through an input cell necessarily leads to a
change in the state of the output net. Also internal node voltage swing can be only Vi which can
be smaller than the full voltage swing of Vdd leading to the partial voltage swing.
Below mentioned steps can be taken to reduce dynamic power
1) Reduce power supply voltage Vdd

2) Reduce voltage swing in all nodes
3) Reduce the switching probability (transition factor)
4) Reduce load capacitance
Leakage Power Trends
Development of the digital integrated circuits is challenged by higher power consumption. The
combination of higher clock speeds, greater functional integration, and smaller process
geometries has contributed to significant growth in power density. At 90 nm and below, leakage
power management is essential in the ASIC design process. As voltages scale downward with the
geometries threshold voltages must also decrease to gain the performance advantages of the new
technology but leakage current increases exponentially. Thinner gate oxides have led to an
increase in gate leakage current.
Scaling improves transistor density and functionality on a chip. Scaling helps to increase speed
and frequency of operation and hence higher performance. At the same time power dissipation
increases. To counteract increase in active and leakage power Vth should also be scaled. Leakage
power is catching up with the dynamic power in VDSM CMOS circuits as shown in Figure 1.
Figure 1. Leakage vs.Dynamic power [3]

168
According to Sung Mo Kang et al.[1] and Anantha P. Chandrakasan et al.[2] power consumption
in a circuit can be divided into 3 different components. They are:
1) dynamic
2) static (or leakage) and
3) Short circuit power consumption.
Dynamic (or switching) power consumption occurs when signals which go through the CMOS
circuits change their logic state charging and discharging of output node capacitor.
Leakage power consumption is the power consumed by the sub threshold currents and by reverse
biased diodes in a CMOS transistor.
Short circuit power consumption occurs during switching of both NMOS and PMOS transistors
in the circuit and they conduct simultaneously for a short amount of time.
Leakage Power
The power consumed by the sub threshold currents and by reverse biased diodes in a CMOS
transistor is considered as leakage power. The leakage power of a CMOS logic gate does not
depend on input transition or load capacitance and hence it remains constant for a logic cell.
Figure 2. Leakage power components in an inverter [5]
Leakage Components in Bulk CMOS
Different leakage power components are classified are as follows and are shown in Figure 3.
• Diode reverse bias current or Reverse-biased, drain- and source-substrate junction band-
to-band-tunneling (BTBT) –I1
• Sub threshold current – I2
169
• Gate induced drain leakage – I3
Figure 3. Major leakage components in a transistor [2] [3]
As technology node shrinks towards 45 nm and below gate leakage (i.e. leakage current due to
direct tunneling) increases owing to the increased electric field. This is the reason why voltage is
scaled down to around 1V. Improvements in the manufacturing process and material have helped
to control other leakage components such as sub threshold leakage, GIDL and junction reverse
bias leakage. A comparative graphical representation of different leakage currents in different
technology nodes is shown in Figure 4.
Figure 4. Technology shrinking vs. Leakage components

170
Sub threshold leakage is controlled by having more control over threshold voltage. Olden process
technologies are causing up to 50 % of threshold voltage variation but newer technologies
produce very low threshold voltage deviation, 30 mV being maximum value. Decrease in
junction area and voltage automatically decreases junction reverse bias leakage and GIDL
respectively. But the tunneling effect is threatening further decrease in device dimension.
Reducing the GIDL, reverse bias leakage and gate leakage due to tunneling is directly related to
the improvements in fabrication chemistry of the device whereas designer has a little control over
threshold voltage. The other way by which a designer can have control over these leakage
components is to switch off the device itself in controlled fashion! Low power techniques like
“power gating” does this effectively and “back bias” technique controls threshold voltage.
Xiaodong Zhang [3] has studied impact of dynamic and leakage power as technology node
reaches deep submicron level. Their summary of the result and leakage trends studied by
Massoud Pedram [4] is shown below in Table 1.
Table 1. Leakage power trends
Wide variety of techniques have been developed to address the various aspects of the power
problem and to meet power specifications. These techniques include clock gating, multi-threshold
(multi-Vt) voltage cells, multiple-voltage domains, substrate biasing, dynamic voltage and
frequency scaling (DVFS), power gating. [1]
Low Power Design Techniques
Michael Keating et al. [1] lists several low power techniques to tackle the dynamic and static
power consumption in modern SoC designs. Dynamic power control techniques include clock
gating, multi voltage, variable frequency, and efficient circuits. Leakage power control techniques
include power gating, multi Vt cells. Common methods supported by EDA tools include clock
gating, gate sizing, low power placement, register clustering, low power CTS, multi Vt
optimization.
Some of the low power techniques in use today are listed in below table.
171
Different Low Power Techniques [3]
Trade-offs associated with the various power management techniques [2]
Above table summarizes trade-offs associated with different power management techniques.
Power gating and DVFS demand large methodology change whereas multi vt and clock gating
affect least. Unless large leakage optimization is not necessary it is always beneficial to go with
either multi vt or clock gating techniques. Based on the design complexity and requirements
combination of any low power techniques can be adopted. Multi vt optimization along with the
power gating is found to be efficient in some of the complex designs. Advanced improvements in
the implementation (i.e. fabrication) technology has allowed substrate biasing techniques to be
used heavily as it does not pose any architectural and design verification challenges and also
provides high leakage reduction
Do you know about input vector controlled method of leakage reduction?
o Leakage current of a gate is dependant on its inputs also. Hence find the set of
inputs which gives least leakage. By applyig this minimum leakage vector to a
circuit it is possible to decrease the leakage current of the circuit when it is in the
standby mode. This method is known as input vector controlled method of
leakage reduction.
How can you reduce dynamic power?
o -Reduce switching activity by designing good RTL

o -Clock gating
o -Architectural improvements
o -Reduce supply voltage
o -Use multiple voltage domains-Multi vdd
What are the vectors of dynamic power?
o Voltage and Current

172
17. Generic Questions
1. Why is pre-simulation and post-Synthesis and simulation done?

Pre-synthesis simulation is called as Functional simulation, This is done to check the
Functionality of design.
2. What Is Partitioning?
Partitioning is the process of splitting a design into manageable pieces. The purpose of
partitioning is to divide complex design components into manageable pieces for ease of
implementation. During this step, models for timing and physical implementation are defined.
The floorplan defined during prototyping is pushed down into lower level blocks, thus preserving
placement, power routing, and obstructions related to placement and routing. Feed-through might
also be assigned for nets routed over-the-block and buffered by inserting hole-punch buffers or by
modifying the block netlist Logical partitioning is not required for flat physical implementations.
Partitioning splits design for logical and physical implementation. For hierarchical physical
implementations, logical partitioning directly impacts the physical implementation phase.
Partitioning is a method to manage functional complexity from a logical design perspective

♦ Partitioning allows multiple design teams to proceed in parallel
♦ The bridges between flat and hierarchical physical implementations are:
• Creation of timing budgets
• Pin optimization
• Feed-through or hole-punch buffer assignment
• Floorplan push-down (Obstructions, Power routes)
• Advanced netlist optimizations: timing, clock, power, and signal integrity
3. Compare the hierarchical and flattened design approaches related to ASIC design?
Flat Design
Advantages
• A flat design methodology ensures that there are no problems with boundary constraints
between the different levels of hierarchy.
• You have the ability to analyze I/O and hard macro to block paths. You have more accurate
timing analysis, because no block modeling is needed.
Disadvantages:
• Large data sizes
• Potentially long run times
Hierarchical Design
Advantages:
• You can save time by closing timing at the top level and at the block level in parallel.
• Generate early top-level timing analysis.
• Smaller data sets lead to faster run times.
• You can reuse blocks once they are implemented.
• If the design uses an IP block, it is easier to insert it into a hierarchical modular design than to
try and fit it into a flat design.
Disadvantages:
• Preliminary block characterization is inaccurate. and can yield false top and block-level
timing violations as well as mask timing violations that appear to meet timing.
• You need to update block timing models frequently when the blocks change.
173
• Details are hidden or lost due to modeling at boundaries.
What parameters (or aspects) differentiate Chip Design and Block level design?
o Chip design has I/O pads; block design has pins.

o Chip design uses all metal layes available; block design may not use all metal
layers.
o Chip is generally rectangular in shape; blocks can be rectangular, rectilinear.
o Chip design requires several packaging; block design ends in a macro.
4. What does the word "0.18 micron technology" signify? Does scaling theory really work as
we move into DSM technology?
5. Write the optimized layout of a 3 input NAND gate?
6. What does the technology rules file contain?
7. What is GDS2 file? What is the layer mapping file?
8. What are the commonly pre-routed blocks?
9. What is the difference between a LEF and a GDSII file related to a backend library?
LEF is a Abstract view of std Cells and Macros, But GDSii is a complete layout of blocks.
10. Which is preferred gate NAND or NOR?

11. What is meta file and macro file?
Input Files
Library Exchange Format Files (LEF):
A Library Exchange Format (LEF) file contains library information for a class of designs.
Library data includes layer, via, placement site type, and macro cell definitions. The LEF
file is an ASCII representation using the syntax conventions
You can define all of your library information in a single LEF file; or you can divide the
information into two files, a "technology" LEF file and a "cell library" LEF file. It
contain the following information’s,
1. Version 9. Extensions
2. Bus Bit Characters 10. Layer (Cut)
3. Divider Character 11. Layer (Implant)
4. Units 12. Layer (Masterslice or Overlap)
5. Manufacturing Grid 13. Layer (Routing)
6. Use Min Spacing
7. Property Definitions
8. Clearance Measure
174
14. Macro 18. Same-Net Spacing

Layer Geometries (Size) 19. Via
Macro Obstruction (Blockages) 20. Via Rule
Macro Pin Statement 21. Via Rule Generate
15. Maximum Via Stack 22. Nondefault Rule
16. Names Case Sensitive 23. Site
17. No Wire Extension
Managing LEF Files
A technology LEF file contains all of the LEF technology information for a design, such
as placement and routing design rules, and process information for layers. A technology
LEF file can include all of the following LEF statements:
VERSION statement
NAMESCASESENSITIVE statement
BUSBITCHARS statement
DIVIDERCHAR statement
[ UNITS statement ]
[ MANUFACTURINGGRID statement ]
[ NOWIREEXTENSIONATPIN statement ]
[ USEMINSPACING statement ]
[ CLEARANCEMEASURE statement ]
[ PROPERTYDEFINITIONS statement ]
{ LAYER (Nonrouting) statement
| LAYER (Routing) statement } ...
[ MAXVIASTACK statement ]
{ VIA statement } ...
{ VIARULE statement
| VIARULE GENERATE statement } ...
[ NONDEFAULTRULE statement ] ...
[ SPACING statement ]
{ SITE statement} ...
[ BEGINEXT statement ] ...
A cell library LEF file contains the macro and standard cell information for a design. A
library LEF file can include the following statements:
VERSION statement
[ SITE statement ]
{ MACRO statement
[ PIN statement ] ...
[ OBS statement ...] } ...
175
[ BEGINEXT statement ] ...
When reading in the LEF files, always read in the technology LEF file first.
What is Site in LEF?
Site
SITE siteName
CLASS {PAD | CORE} ;
[SYMMETRY {X | Y | R90} ... ;]
SIZE width BY height ;
END siteName
Defines a placement site in the design. A placement site gives the placement grid for a
family of macros, such as I/O, core, block, analog, digital, short, tall, and so forth.
CLASS {PAD | CORE}

Specifies whether the site is an I/O pad site or a core site.
SITE siteName
Specifies the name for the placement site.
SIZE width BY height
Specify the dimensions of the site in normal (or north) orientation, in microns.
SYMMETRY {X | Y | R90}
Indicates which site orientations are equivalent. The sites in a given row all have
the same orientation as the row. Generally, site symmetry should be used to
control the flipping allowed inside the rows.
What is nondefault rule in LEF?
Non-default Rule
Defines the wiring width, design rule spacing, and via size for regular (signal) nets. You
do not need to define cut layers for the non-default rule.
[NONDEFAULTRULE rulename1
{LAYER layerName
WIDTH width ;
SPACING minSpacing ;
[WIREEXTENSION value ;]
[RESISTANCE RPERSQ value ;]
[CAPACITANCE CPERSQDIST value ;]
[EDGECAPACITANCE value ;]
END layerName} ...
{VIA viaStatement} ...
176
[SPACING
[SAMENET layerName layerName minSpace [STACK] ;] ...
END SPACING]
[PROPERTY propName propValue ;] ...
END]
Design Exchange Format Files (DEF)
A Design Exchange Format (DEF) file contains the design-specific information of

a circuit and is a representation of the design at any point during the layout
process. The DEF file is an ASCII representation using the syntax conventions
DEF conveys logical design data to, and physical design data from, place-and-route tools.
Logical design data can include internal connectivity (represented by a netlist), grouping
information, and physical constraints. Physical data includes placement locations and
orientations, routing geometry data, and logical design changes for backannotation.
Place-and-route tools also can read physical design data, for example, to perform ECO
changes.
For standard-cell-based/ASIC flow tools, floorplanning is part of the design flow. You
typically use the various floorplanning commands to interactively create a floorplan. This
data then becomes part of the physical data output for the design using the ROWS, TRACKS,
GCELLGRID, and DIEAREA statements. You also can manually enter this data into DEF to
create the floorplan.
General Rules
Note the following information about creating DEF files:
• Lines in the DEF file are limited to 2,048 characters (extra characters are
truncated on input).
• Net names and cell names also are limited to 2,048 characters.
• DEF statements end with a semicolon ( ; ). You must leave a space before the
semicolon.
• Each section can be specified only once. Sections end with END SECTION.
• You must define all objects before you reference them except for the + ORIGINAL
argument in the NETS section.
• No regular expressions or wildcard characters are recognized except for ( *
pinName ) in the SPECIALNETS section.
DEF contains the following informations,
1. Version 3. Busbitchars
Namescasesensitive 4. Design
2. Dividerchar 5. Technology
177
6. Units
7. History
8. Propertydefinitions
9. Diearea
10. Rows
11. Tracks
12. Gcellgrid
13. Vias
14. Regions
15. Components
16. Pins
17. Pinproperties
18. Blockages
19. Slots
20. Fills
21. Specialnets
22. Nets
23. Scanchains
24. Groups
25. Beginext
26. End design
Physical Design 178
Order of DEF Statements
Standard DEF files can contain the following statements and sections. You must specify
the statements and sections in the following order.
VERSION statement
DESIGN statement
[ TECHNOLOGY statement ]
[ UNITS statement ]
[ HISTORY statement ] ...
[ PROPERTYDEFINITIONS section ]
[ DIEAREA statement ]
[ ROWS statement ] ...
[ TRACKS statement ] ...
[ GCELLGRID statement ] ...
[ VIAS statement ]
[ REGIONS statement ]
COMPONENTS section
[ PINS section ]
[ PINPROPERTIES section ]
[ BLOCKAGES section ]
[ SLOTS section ]
[ FILLS section ]
[ SPECIALNETS section ]
NETS section
[ SCANCHAINS section ]
[ GROUPS section ]
[ BEGINEXT section ] ...
END DESIGN statement
Note: You can include BEGINEXT sections at any point.
Interface Logic Modeling
An ILM is a partial netlist that retains the combinational logic from each input port to the first
stage of sequential elements of the block. It is also the combinational logic from the last stage of
sequential elements to each output port of the block. The clock paths to these sequential elements
are also retained. Combinational paths from the input ports that do not encounter a sequential
element and pass directly to an output port are also retained in the ILM.
Physical Design 179
The intent of an ILM is to produce a model that closely resembles the timing of the interface to
that of the block-level netlist. The ILM generator takes as input the gate-level netlist for a block
and generates a flattened Verilog netlist that contains only the interface logic, without the internal
register-to-register logic, as shown in Figure 3-1.
Figure 3-1 Generated Interface Logic Model
Benefits, Flow, and Limitations of ILM
An ILM partial netlist can provide a smaller memory footprint, faster runtimes, and an extremely
accurate timing of the interface logic of a block.
You can use ILMs in Standard Delay Format (SDF) or Standard Parasitic Exchange Format
(SPEF) based flows. In addition, you can use ILMs in PT SI using both crosstalk and noise
analysis.
To use the model in a hierarchical static timing analysis methodology, you must validate an ILM.
This validation requires that the timing and scope match the block-level netlist usage within the
design. A certain amount of time is needed to validate an ILM.
Specific Setups with ILM
High Fanout Ports
When generating an ILM, each input port that is not defined as a clock is considered as a data
port. When the tool generates an ILM, it traces each input port to the first level of the sequential
element. For input ports, such as scan_enable, this means that each flip-flop in the block netlist is
kept.
Latches
Physical Design 180
For designs with latches, you should define the number of levels of borrowing for the latches at
the interface. You should set the value of the –latch_level option of the create_ilm
command to match the number of levels of latch borrowing.
Extracted Timing Models
Model Extraction Overview
The extract_model command generates a static timing model for the current design from
its gate-level netlist. The generated model has the same timing behavior as the original netlist,
and can be used in place of the original netlist in a hierarchical timing analysis.
Using an extracted timing model has these advantages:
• The generated model is usually much smaller than the original netlist. When you use
extracted models in place of netlists in PT, you can significantly reduce the time needed
to analyze a large design.
• Using a model in place of a netlist prevents a user from seeing the contents of the block,
allowing the block to be shared while protecting the intellectual property of the block
creator.
Extraction Requirements
To generate an extracted timing model, you need the following:
• Block netlist
• Technology library
• Timing environment of the block (such as clocks and operating conditions)
Note:
Ensure that the netlist contains no timing violations before you generate a model.
Figure 4-1 Extraction Process

Physical Design 181
Extraction Process
Timing model extraction creates a timing arc for each path in the design from an input port to a
register, an input port to an output port, and from a register to an output port.
Figure 4-2 Gate-Level Netlist
Figure 4-3 Netlist of Extracted Model
The generated timing model is another design containing a single leaf cell, as shown in Figure 4-
3. The core cell is connected directly to input and output ports of the model design. This cell
contains the pin-to-pin timing arcs of the extracted model. Figure 4-4 shows the timing arcs of
the core cell. These arcs are extracted from the timing paths of the original design.
Figure 4-4 Timing Arcs of Core Cell

Physical Design 182
The delay data in the timing arcs is accurate for a range of operating environments. The extracted
delay data does not depend on the specific values from input transition times, output capacitive
loads, input arrival times, output required times, and so on. When the model is used in a design,
the arc delays vary with the input transition times and output capacitive loads. This is called a
“context-independent” model because it works correctly in a variety of contexts.
The characteristics of the extracted model depend on the operating conditions and wire load
model in effect at the time of extraction. However, clocking conditions and external constraints
do not affect the model extraction process. Commands such as create_clock,
set_clock_latency, set_clock_uncertainty, set_input_delay, and
set_output_delay do not affect the model extraction process, but the extracted model,
when used for timing analysis, is sensitive to those commands.
Extracting Timing Paths
The following sections describe the extraction process for nets, paths, interface latch structures,
minimum pulse width and period, false paths, clock-gating checks, and back-annotated delays.
Boundary Nets
The extracted model preserves the boundary nets of the original design, thereby maintaining
accuracy for computing net delays after the model design is instantiated in another design.
Internal Nets
When performing extraction, if the internal nets are not annotated with detailed parasitics, PT
computes the capacitance and resistance of internal nets. The delay values of the arcs in the
model are accurate for the wire load model you set on the design before extraction. To get a
model that is accurate for a different set of wire load models, set these models on the design and
Physical Design 183
perform a new extraction. If internal nets are annotated with detailed parasitics (DSPF, Reduced
Standard Parasitic Format (RSPF), or SPEF), PT does not use a wire load model to calculate the
net capacitance and resistance. Instead, it takes the values from the detailed parasitics.
If the internal nets are back-annotated with delay or capacitance information, the back-annotated
values are used instead of the computed values. For more information, see “Back-Annotated
Delays”.
Paths From Inputs to Registers
A path from an input to a register is extracted into an equivalent setup arc and a hold arc between
the input pin and the register’s clock. The setup arc captures the delay of the longest path from
the particular input to all registers clocked by the same clock, plus the setup time of the register
library cell. The hold arc represents the delay of the shortest path from the particular input to all
register clocks, including the hold times of the register library cell.
The register’s setup and hold values are incorporated into the arc values. The setup and hold
value of each arc is a function of the transition time of the input signal and the transition time of
the clock signal. If an input pin fans out to registers clocked by different clocks, separate setup
and hold arcs are extracted between the input pin and each clock.
Paths From Inputs to Outputs
A path from an input to an output is extracted into two delay arcs. One of the arcs represents the
delay of the longest path between the input pin and the related output pin. The other arc
represents the delay of the shortest path between the two pins.
The delay values for these arcs are functions of the input signal transition time and output
capacitive load. The extracted arc is context-independent, resulting in different delays when used
in different environments.
Paths From Registers to Outputs
A path from a register to an output is extracted into two delay arcs. One arc represents the longest
path delay between the register’s clock pin and the output pin, and the other arc represents the
shortest path delay between those pins. The clock-to-data output delay is included in the arc
value. Different clock edges result in different extracted arcs.
Similar to input-to-output arcs, the delays of register-to-output arcs are functions of input
transition times and output load capacitance. The arc delays differ depending on the environment
in which they are used.
Paths From Registers to Registers
Paths from registers to registers are not extracted. For timing arc extraction, PT only traverses the
interface logic.
Physical Design 184
Clock Paths
Delays and transition times of clock networks are reflected in the extracted model. However,
clock latency is not included in the model. Therefore, the source latency and network latency
must be specified when the timing model is used.
Interface Latch Structures
The extract_model command supports extraction of simple latch structures on the interface
of the design (latches with fanin from a primary input or fanout to a primary output). The
extracted model only preserves the borrowing behavior specified at the time of model extraction,
not all possible borrowing behaviors.
Specifying Latch Borrowing
The extract_model command has two options that affect the extraction of latch behavior:
-context_borrow and -latch_level . The -context_borrow option is the default
behavior, which you can override by using the -latch_level option.
When you use -context_borrow, the model extractor identifies latches on the interface that
borrow and traces through them, and stops each trace at a latch that does not borrow. On the other
hand, using the -latch_level option specifies that all latch chains at the interface of the
design have a specified length and definitely will borrow. Using the -latch_level option is
recommended only when you are certain of the borrowing behavior of latches at the interface of
the design, and you are able to specify a single latch chain length for the entire design.
The total amount of borrowing should not exceed one clock cycle. If it does, you need to
manually set multicycle paths in the extracted model (using the set_multicycle_path
command) to make the model timing match the netlist timing.
How the Model Extractor Handles Latches
When you use the extract_model command, PT handles the latches in the design as
follows:
• It traces through borrowing latches and stops when it encounters a flip-flop, port, or
nonborrowing latch.
• It extracts a setup arc when an input port goes through borrowing latches to a flip-flop or
nonborrowing latch.
• It extracts a delay arc when an input port, or a clock connected to a flip-flop or
nonborrowing latch, goes through borrowing latches to an output port.
• Neither the -context_borrow nor -latch_level option to extract_model
causes the actual time borrowed (by a latch) to be factored into the generated setup or
delay values.
• The timing of the extracted model matches that of the original netlist as long as the
specified borrowing behavior at the time of model generation remains valid for the arrival
times defined on input ports and clocks when the model is used. The actual time
Physical Design 185
borrowed on a latch does not need to remain the same. Only the borrowing status
(borrowing or not borrowing) must remain the same.
The model validation commands write_interface_timing and

compare_interface_timing are useful for checking the model timing against the netlist
timing, especially when there are latches on the interface. The write_interface_timing
command traverses any borrowing latch in the netlist, which is necessary for matching the
numbers reported for the model and for the netlist.
Minimum Pulse Width and Minimum Period
Minimum pulse width (MPW) and minimum period (MP) constraints on cell pins are propagated
as MPW and MP attributes on the clock pins that are present in the extracted model, as shown in
Figure 4-5.
Figure 4-5 Minimum Pulse Width and Minimum Period Extraction
In the original design A, all latches have MPW and MP attributes on their clock pins. In the
extracted model B, the MPW attributes are translated into attributes on the clock port. Only the
maximum of the MPW and MP values are used. CLK has the MPW_HIGH = 2.0 attribute set on
it. In the original design A, the input pin IN4 does not have MPW or MP attributes, even though it
is in the fanin of the clock pin of latch I3.
The extracted timing model only looks at the MPW attributes of the library pin, not the user
MPW constraints applied with the set_min_pulse_width command. When the extracted
timing model is instantiated, you can still include the user-defined MPW and MP constraints in
the scripts at a higher level in the hierarchy.
The delay effects (nonsymmetrical rise or fall) and slew propagation along the path are not taken
into consideration. Violations can occur when the clock pulse width decreases to less than the
required minimum pulse width during the course of its propagation toward the latch clock pin.
These violations are not reported for the model.
Physical Design 186
For example, in Figure 4-5 the clock waveform at the input latch I3 has a width of 1.9, which is
less than the required 2.0. Using 2.0 for the clock port attribute without considering the slew
effects causes this MPW violation to be missed.
False Paths
The model extraction algorithm recognizes and correctly handles false paths declared with the
set_false_path command.
Clock-Gating Checks
If your design has clock-gating logic, the model contains clock-gating checks. Depending on your
environment variable settings, these checks are extracted as a pair of setup and hold arcs between
the gating signal and the clock, or a pair of no-change arcs between the gating signal and the
clock. For more information, see “Extracting Clock-Gating Checks”.
Back-Annotated Delays
If the design to be extracted is back-annotated with delay information, the model reflects these
values in the extracted timing arcs. Transition time information for each arc is extracted in the
same way as if the design were not back-annotated.
The delays of boundary nets, including any back-annotated delay values, are extracted if the -
library_cell option is used. If the -library_cell option is not used, delays of
boundary nets are not extracted, whether or not they are back-annotated. These delays are
computed (or can be back-annotated) after the model is instantiated in a design and placed in
context.
If the delays of boundary cells (cells connected directly to input or output ports) are back-
annotated, the delays of the generated model are no longer context-independent. For example, the
delays of paths from inputs are the same for different transition times of input signals. In addition,
the delays of paths to outputs are not affected by the input transition time and output load.
Note:
Do not back-annotate the delays of output boundary cells if you want the output delays to change
as a function of output load. Similarly, do not back-annotate the delays of input boundary cells if
you expect the arc delays to depend on input transition times. To remove already-annotated
information, use the remove_annotated_delay command.
Block Scope
An extracted timing model is context-independent (valid in different contexts) as long as the

external timing conditions are within the ranges specified for block-level analysis. When the
timing model is used at a higher level of hierarchy, it is no longer possible to check the internal
clock-to-clock timing of the block. To ensure that the block context is valid for the original block-
level timing analysis, you can check the block “scope” at the higher level.
Physical Design 187
When you generate the extracted model, you can also generate a “block scope” file containing
information about the ranges of timing conditions used to verify the timing of the block. When
you use the timing model in a chip-level analysis, you can have PT check the actual chip-level
conditions for the block instance and verify that these conditions are within the ranges recorded in
the scope file. This process ensures the validity of the original block-level analysis.
To generate the block scope file, use the -block_scope option of the extract_model
command. To check the scope of the timing model during chip-level analysis, use the
check_block_scope command. For more information, see Chapter 6, “Hierarchical
Scope Checking.”
Noise Characteristics
PT SI users can analyze designs for crosstalk noise effects. An extracted timing model supports
noise analysis by maintaining the noise immunity characteristics at the inputs of the extracted
model, and by maintaining the steady-state resistance or I-V characteristics at the outputs of the
extracted model. However, an extracted model does not maintain the noise propagation
characteristics of the module. Also, any cross-coupling capacitors between the module and the
external circuit are split to ground. Therefore, PT SI does not analyze any crosstalk effects
between the extracted model and the external circuit.
Note:
To create timing models that can handle crosstalk analysis between modules and between
different levels of hierarchy, use interface timing models instead of extracted timing models. See
“Hierarchical Crosstalk Analysis”.
To include noise characteristics in the extracted model, use the -noise option of the
extract_model command. Otherwise, by default, no noise information is included in the
extracted model. If you use the -noise option, but no noise information is available in the
module netlist, then the only noise characteristics included in the extracted model are the steady-
state I-V characteristics of the outputs. In that case, the model extractor estimates the output
resistance from the slew and timing characteristics.
An extracted timing model can be created in two forms: a wrapper plus core or a library cell. A
wrapper-plus-core model preserves the input nets, the noise immunity curves of all first-stage
cells at the inputs, the output nets, and all last-stage driver cells at the outputs (including their I-V
characteristics). For a library cell, the model extractor must combine parallel first-stage cells at
each input to make a single noise immunity curve, and must combine parallel last-stage cells at
each output to make a single driver. For this reason, a wrapper-plus-core model provides better
accuracy for noise analysis than a library cell model.
An extracted timing model with noise can be created in two forms: wrapper-plus-core or library
cell. A wrapper-plus-core model preserves the input nets, the noise immunity curves of all first-
stage cells at the inputs, the output nets, the noise I-V curve or steady-state resistance at the
outputs, and the accumulated noise at the outputs. For a library cell, the model extractor combines
the inputs nets (including coupling) and all leaf-cell noise immunity curves or DC margins into a
single, worst-case noise immunity curve. Also, the library cell combines the worst-case resistance
of last-stage cells and net resistance at each output to make a single I-V curve or resistance for
Physical Design 188
each noise region. For this reason, a wrapper-plus-core model provides better accuracy for noise
analysis than a library cell model.
To create a library cell model, the model extractor considers the noise immunity curves of
individual cells connected in parallel within the module netlist. It considers the worst-case
(lowest) data points of multiple curves and combines them into a single worst-case curve for the
library cell input. For general information about static noise analysis, see the “Static Noise
Analysis” chapter of the PT SI User Guide.
Other Extracted Information
In addition to the timing paths, the model extraction algorithm extracts other types of
information:
Mode information
Timing modes define specific modes of operation for a block, such as the read and write
mode. PT extracts modes of the original design as modes for the timing arcs in the
extracted model.
For a description of how to define mode information for a design, see the PT User Guide:
Advanced Timing Analysis.
Generated clocks
Generated clocks you specify in the original design become generated clocks in the
extracted model. For more information about generated clocks, see the PT User Guide:
Advanced Timing Analysis.
Capacitance
PT transfers the capacitance of input and output ports of the original design to the
model’s extracted ports.
Design rules
PT extracts the maximum transition at input and output ports. PT reflects maximum
capacitance at output ports within the design in the extracted model.
Operating conditions
The values of timing arcs in the extracted model depend on the operating conditions you
set on the design when you perform the extraction.
Design name and date of the extraction
PT preserves the design name and the date of extraction in the extracted model.
Multicycle paths
Physical Design 189
PT extracts multicycle paths and writes that information to a script containing a set of
set_multicycle_path commands that can be applied to the extracted model.
Three-state arcs
Three-state arcs ending at output ports are included in the extracted model.
Preset and clear delay arcs
Preset and clear arcs are extracted if enabled. For more information, see “Extraction
Variables”.
Clock latency arcs
Clock latency arcs are extracted if enabled (see “Extraction Variables”). Clock latency
arcs are used by tools such as Astro and Physical Compiler to compensate and balance
clock tree skews at chip level. They are also reported by the report_clock_timing
command in PT.
Limitations of Model Extraction
This section provides general guidelines and lists the general limitations of model extraction in
PT, the limitations of using extracted models in Design Compiler, and the limitations of extracted
models in .lib format.
Observe the following model extraction guidelines:
• Complex latch structures on the design interface are not supported. For more information,
see “Interface Latch Structures”.
• Clocks with multiple-source pins or ports are not supported.
• Avoid using the -remove_internal_arcs and -latch_level options.
The following environment variables affect model extraction:
extract_model_enable_report_delay_calculation
extract_model_gating_as_nochange
extract_model_status_level
extract_model_num_capacitance_points
extract_model_num_clock_transition_points
extract_model_num_data_transition_points
extract_model_capacitance_limit
extract_model_clock_transition_limit
extract_model_data_transition_limit
extract_model_with_clock_latency_arcs
timing_clock_gating_propagate_enable
Physical Design 190
timing_disable_clock_gating_checks
timing_enable_preset_clear_arcs
See the man page of each variable for a description of its effects on the extracted model.
The following limitations apply to model extraction:
Minimum and maximum delay constraints
Paths in the original design that have a minimum or a maximum delay constraint set on
them are treated by extraction as follows:
• If you set the constraint on a timing path, PT ignores the constraint in the model.
• If you set the constraint on a pin of a combinational cell along a path, PT ignores
the timing paths that pass through this pin. These paths do not exist in the
extracted model.
For these reasons, it is recommended that you remove all minimum and maximum delay
constraints from the design before you perform extraction.
Input and output delays
PT ignores input and output delays set on design ports when it extracts a model, unless
your design contains transparent latches and you specify the -context_borrow
option of the extract_model command.
Input or output delay values set on pins of combinational cells along a timing path cause
the paths that pass through these pins to be ignored in the extracted model. It is
recommended that you remove input and output delay values set on internal paths (or set
on objects other than ports) from the design before performing an extraction.
Extraction of load-dependent clock networks
If the delay of a clock to register path in the original design depends on the capacitive
load on an output port, the delay of the extracted setup arc to the register in the model is
independent of the output load.
For example, consider the design shown in Figure 4-6. In this design, the setup time
from the IN input relative to the CLK clock depends on the load on the CLKOUT output.
This occurs because the delay of the clock network depends on the load on the CLKOUT
output and because the transition time at the register’s clock pin depends on the output
load.
Figure 4-6 A Load-Dependent Clock Network

Physical Design 191
In the extracted model, the setup time from input IN to input CLK is independent of the
load on output CLKOUT. However, the extracted CLK delay from input to CLKOUT
remains load dependent.
To avoid inaccuracies in the extracted model, isolate the delay of the clock network
inside the design to be modeled from the changes in the environment by inserting an
output buffer, as shown in Figure 4-7.
Figure 4-7 Isolating the Delay of the Clock Network
Limitations of Extracted Models in Design Compiler
Design Compiler does not support all the features of extracted timing models. Specifically,
Design Compiler ignores mode information. All modes are considered enabled.
Limitations of Extracted Models in .lib Format
You can optionally specify .lib format for the extracted model. This format is useful for exporting
the timing model to an external tool. The following limitations apply to a model extracted in this
format:
• Like extracted models in other formats, the .lib model captures only the timing behavior,
not the logic, of the original netlist.
Physical Design 192
Extracted Model Types
The extract_model command can create two different types of timing models: a library cell
or a wrapper with a core cell inside. A library cell serves as a port-to-port replacement for the
design being modeled, with the boundary net capacitances approximated inside the model. A
wrapper-and-core model consists of a central core cell surrounded by a wrapper design that
preserves the original boundary nets.
The type of model created by extract_model depends on the -library_cell switch. If

the -library_cell switch is present, PT creates a library cell. The name assigned to the new
cell is the same as the design name.
If the -library_cell switch is absent, PT creates a wrapper design with a core cell. The -
format option controls the output format of the core cell. However, PT always writes out the
wrapper design in .db format, irrespective of the -format setting. The name of the core cell is
design_name_core. The name of the wrapper design is output.db, where output is the value
specified by the -output option.
You can optionally create a test design containing an instance of the extracted library cell. To do
this, use the -test_design switch along with -library_cell in the
extract_model command . The test design is named design_name_test and the output file is
named output_test.db . PT does not write parasitics to the test design.
Extraction Variables
Several environment variables control the model accuracy and other aspects of timing model
extraction.To attain the level of accuracy and complexity you want, consider each variable
setting.
Table 4-1 lists the environment variables and summarizes how they affect the
extract_model command. For more information on any particular variable, see the man page
for that variable.
Table 4-1 Extraction Environment Variables
Effect on extract_model
Extraction environment variables
command
Specifies whether to allow the

final user of the extracted model to
get timing information using the
extract_model_enable_report_delay_
report_delay_calculatio
calculation
n command. Set this variable to
false if the timing calculations for
the model are proprietary.
extract_model_capacitance_limit Specifies the maximum load

Physical Design 193
capacitance on outputs. Model

extraction characterizes the timing
within this specified limit.
For clock input ports, specifies the

maximum input port transition
extract_model_clock_ transition_ limit time. Model extraction
characterizes the timing within this
specified limit.
For data input ports, specifies the

maximum input port transition
extract_model_data_ transition_ limit time. Model extraction
characterizes the timing within this
specified limit.
Specifies the number of

extract_model_num_capacitance_ points capacitance data points used in the
delay table for each arc.
extract_model_num_clock_transition_point Specifies the number of transition

time data points used to make the
s
delay table for each clock arc.
extract_model_num_data_transition_ Specifies the number of transition

data points used to make the delay
points
table for each data arc.
Specifies whether to enable

modeling of clock tree insertion
extract_model_with_clock_latency_ arcs
delay timing arcs in the extracted
model.
Specifies the amount of detail

extract_model_status_level provided in model extraction
progress messages.
Specifies whether to enable or

timing_enable_preset_clear_arcs disable preset and clear timing
arcs.
Extracts clock-gating setup and

extract_model_gating_as_nochange hold checks as corresponding no-
change arcs.
When set to true, disables all

timing_disable_clock_gating_checks clock-gating checks and does not
extract them to the model.
Determines whether data signals

timing_clock_gating_propagate_ enable that gate a clock are propagated
past the gating logic.
Physical Design 194
Variable Setting Guidelines
To generate accurate timing models, observe these guidelines:
• If the design contains latches on the interface, run extract_model with the
-context_borrow option.
• Avoid the -remove_internal_arcs and -latch_level options of the

extract_model command because they compromise accuracy.
Delay Table Generation
When you use extract_model, PT extracts a set of timing arcs and creates a delay table for
each arc. A delay table is a matrix that specifies the arc delay value as a function of the input
transition time and the output load capacitance. For example, the delay arc shown in Figure 4-8
uses a delay table like the 2-by-4 table shown in the figure. The amount of delay for the arc
depends on the input transition time and output load capacitance.
Figure 4-8 Delay Table Example
When you use the extracted model in a design, PT calculates the arc delay according to the
context where the model is being used. The delay table makes the model accurate for the range of
input transition times and output loads defined in the table.
For transition times or output loads at intermediate values within the table, PT uses interpolation
between the table points to estimate the delay. A table with a larger number of entries (for
example, a 10-by-10 matrix) provides better accuracy at the cost of more memory and CPU time
for model generation.
Physical Design 195
For transition times and output loads outside of the ranges defined in the table, PT uses
extrapolation to estimate the delay. A table that spans a larger range of transition time or load
capacitance provides better accuracy for a larger range of conditions, but wastes memory and
CPU resources if the range is larger than necessary to accommodate actual usage conditions.
You can control the number of data points and the range of conditions specified in delay tables of
models generated by model extraction. To do so, set the following variables:
extract_model_num_capacitance_points
extract_model_num_clock_transition_points
extract_model_num_data_transition_points
extract_model_capacitance_limit
extract_model_clock_transition_limit
extract_model_data_transition_limit
The “number or points” variables control the number of data points in the generated delay tables.
By default, these variables are set to 5, resulting in 5-by-5 delay tables. The “limit” variables
control the range of capacitance and transition times covered in the generated delay tables. The
default settings are 64 pf for the capacitance limit and 5 ns for the transition time limits. For more
information, see the man page for each variable.
Preparing for Extraction
To prepare your design for extraction, consider the following steps:
• Set the model extraction environment variables
• Set the operating conditions for the extracted model
• Define the wire load models
• Identify pins being used as clocks in your design
• Define the clocks in the current design
• Prepare for extraction of latch behavior
• Identify false paths in your design
• Remove input or output delays set on objects that are not input or output ports
• Set the design modes, if any, for extraction
• Check the timing
• Prepare for crosstalk analysis
The sections that follow describe how to perform these tasks.

Physical Design 196
Setting the Extraction Variables
Several environment variables affect the extraction process, as explained in “Extraction

Variables”. Set them as needed by using one of these methods:
• Specify variables and their corresponding values individually. For example, enter
pt_shell> set extract_model_data_transition_limit 2.0
pt_shell> set extract_model_capacitance_limit 5.0
• Specify a variable and its value in a script file, then source the batch file. For example,
enter
pt_shell> source script_file
• Specify the variable and its value in the .synopsys_pt.setup (PT setup) file.
Setting Operating Conditions
The operating conditions for vendor libraries vary. For example, some conditions might be
nominal, worst-case commercial (WCCOM), and best-case commercial (BCCOM).
Model extraction uses the current single operating condition or current minimum and maximum
operating conditions. For example, for a single operating condition, enter:
pt_shell> set_operating_conditions WCCOM

pt_shell> extract_model -output model
To create a single model that has setup and hold arcs using maximum and minimum operating
conditions, use commands like the following:
pt_shell> set_operating_conditions -min BEST_COND \

-max WORST_COND -lib your_lib -analysis_type bc_wc
pt_shell> extract_model -output file_name -format db
To create a single conservative model using on-chip variation to calculate the timing arcs, set the
-analysis_type option to on_chip_variation instead of bc_wc.
You can also extract two different models at two different operating conditions, and then invoke
the two models for min-max analysis. For example, you can use a script similar to the following:
set link_path "* your_library.db"

read_db BLOCK.db
link BLOCK
source constraint.pt
read_parasitics ...
read_sdf ...
set_operating conditions WORST_COND -lib your_library.db
extract_model -format db -output CORE_max
set_operating conditions BEST_COND -lib your_library.db
Physical Design 197
extract_model -format db -output CORE_min

remove_design -all
Then you can use instances of the core wrapper CORE_max.db in your design, and invoke the
two models for min-max analysis using a script similar to the following:
set link_path "* CORE_max_lib.db your_library.db"

read_db CHIP.v
set_min_library CORE_max_lib.db -min_version \
CORE_min_lib.db
link CHIP
...
Defining Wire Load Models
Defining the wire load models is a prerequisite for extraction unless the delays of all internal nets
in the design have been back-annotated. The extract_model command uses wire load
models to calculate the net capacitance and net delays in the extracted paths.
Use the set_wire_load_model and set_wire_load_mode commands to define one or

more wire load models.
For example, enter the following commands to specify a 20-by-20 wire load model for the top
design and a 05-by-05 wire load model for block u4.
pt_shell> set_wire_load_mode enclosed

pt_shell> set_wire_load_model -name 20x20 -lib class
pt_shell> set_wire_load_model -name 05x05 -lib class U4
The delay values of the arcs in the model are accurate for the wire load model you set on the
design before extraction. To get an accurate model for a different set of wire load models, set
wire load models on the design and perform a new extraction.
Defining Clocks
Defining all clocks in the current design is a prerequisite for extraction. You identify pins as
clocks by using the create_clock or create_generated_clock command.
The extract_model command uses the clock period and input delay information under the
following conditions:
• If you use the -context_borrow option, the model extractor uses the clock
information to determine which transparent latches are borrowing.
• If you set a multicycle path definition at a point that the model extractor cannot easily
move to the design boundary, the clock period determines which path is considered the
critical path.
Physical Design 198
Typically, you place the created clocks on input ports of your design. Clocks created with the
create_clock command on pins inside the design produce internal clocks in the generated
model that require special attention. That is, you must specify the clocks on the pins in the model
again; however, generated clocks referenced to boundary ports are extracted as expected and
require no extra setup when using the extracted model.
The model extractor does not support multiple-source clocks. A multiple-source clock is a clock
that is applied to more than one point in the design. For example, model extraction cannot work
with a clock defined as follows:
pt_shell> create_clock -name CLK -period 10 \

[get_pins {Clk1 Clk2}]
The model extractor also does not support multiple clocks applied to the same point in the design.
For example, model extraction cannot work with two clocks defined as follows:
pt_shell> create_clock -name CK1 -period 10 [get_pins Clk1]

pt_shell> create_clock -name CK2 -period 12 [get_pins Clk1]
Setting Up Latch Extraction
If the design you want to extract contains transparent latches and you want the generated model to
exhibit time-borrowing behavior, you can use the -context_borrow and -latch_level
options of the extract_model command to specify the method of latch extraction.
Observe the following guidelines when you use the -context_borrow and
-latch_level options:
• If your design has no transparent latches or has transparent latches with no time
borrowing, these option settings have no effect on the results.
• With a latch-based design, do not use the -latch_level option together with the -
context_borrow option.
• Using -context_borrow is preferred.
• If the extracted model is to be used in an environment where the clock waveforms or

input arrival times (or both) are expected to change drastically, do not use
extract_model . Instead, generate an interface logic model as described in Chapter
3, “Interface Logic Models.”
For more information on extraction of latch behavior, see “Interface Latch Structures”.
Identifying False Paths
Before you perform model extraction, define false paths in your design by using the
set_false_path command. Paths defined as false are not extracted into timing arcs by the
Physical Design 199
extract_model command. For example, enter the following command to define the path
between input IN4 and output OUT1 as a false path.
pt_shell> set_false_path -from IN4 -to OUT1
For more information about the set_false_path command, see the specifying timing
exceptions details in the PT User Guide: Fundamentals.
Removing Internal Input and Output Delays
Remove input or output delays set on design objects that are not input or output ports. These
objects are usually input or output pins of cells in the design. To remove delays, remove the
commands from the original script that set the delays.
Controlling Mode Information in the Extracted Model
A complex design might have several modes of operation with different timing characteristics for
each mode. For example, a microcontroller might be in setup mode or in monitor mode. A
complex design might also have components that themselves have different modes of operation.
A common example is an on-chip RAM, which has a read mode and a write mode.
The extract_model command creates a model that reflects the current mode settings of the
design. The generated model itself does not have modes, but contains timing arcs for all the paths
that report_timing detects with the modes at their current settings.
If you extract multiple timing models from a design operating under different modes, different
conditions set with case analysis, or different exception settings, you can merge those models into
a single model that has operating modes. For more information, see “Merging Extracted
Models”.
Performing Timing Checks
To check your design for potential timing problems before you extract, use the check_timing
command. Because problems reported by the check_timing command affect the generated
model, fix these problems before you generate the timing model. For more information about the
check_timing command, see the PT User Guide: Fundamentals.
Preparing for Crosstalk Analysis
PT SI is an optional tool that adds crosstalk analysis capabilities to PT. If you are a PT SI user
and crosstalk analysis is enabled, you can have the extract_model command consider
crosstalk effects when it calculates the timing arcs for the extracted model.
The model extractor cannot calculate the crosstalk-induced delays for all combinations of input
transitions times for victim and aggressor nets. Instead, it accounts for crosstalk effects in a
conservative manner. You specify a range of input delays and slews for the model prior to
extraction. When you do update_timing, PT SI uses this information to calculate the worst-
case changes in delay and slew that can result from crosstalk. The model extractor then adds the
calculated changes to the extracted timing arcs.
Physical Design 200
This is the procedure for including crosstalk effects during model extraction:
1. Use the set_input_delay command with both the -min and -max options to
specify the worst-case timing window for each input, given the current clock
configuration.
2. Use the set_input_transition command with both the -min and -max
options to specify the worst-case slew change for each input.
3. With PT SI crosstalk analysis enabled (by setting the si_enable_analyis variable

to true) and with the design back-annotated with cross-coupling capacitors, perform a
crosstalk analysis with update_timing . PT SI calculates the worst-case delay
changes and slew changes under the specified conditions using on-chip variation analysis.
4. Run the extract_model command in the usual manner. PT performs model

extraction without crosstalk analysis, then adds the fixed delta delay and delta slew
values to the resulting timing arc values.
In step 4, PT only adds crosstalk values that make the model more conservative. For example, it
adds a delta delay value to a maximum-delay arc only if the delta delay is positive, or to a
minimum-delay arc only if the delta delay is negative.
The transition times you define with the set_input_transition command are used to
calculate the delta delay values. These transition times are preserved in the extracted model as a
set of design rules. When you use the extracted model, if a transition time at an input port of the
model is outside of the defined range, you receive a warning message.
Model Extraction Options
The extract_model command has a -format option, which can be set to any
combination of dbor lib to generate models in .db format or .lib format. The .db format can
be used directly by most Synopsys tools. Use the .lib format when you want to be able to read and
understand the timing arcs contained in the model, or for compatibility with a third-party tool that
can read .lib files. The .lib model can be compiled by Library Compiler to get a .db file. The
extract_model command provides two command options that control the level of detail and
accuracy of the extracted model:
• -library_cell, which generates the model as a library cell rather than a wrapper and
core
• -remove_internal_arcs, which generates the model with internal arcs and timing
points removed
By default, the generated model is a design containing a single core cell. The model preserves all
the boundary nets in the original design and is the more accurate type of model.
Physical Design 201
The -library_cell option causes extract_model to generate the model as a library

cell instead of a wrapper design and core. In this case, all boundary net delays are added to the
arcs in the model.
The library cell model is simpler than the detailed model. However, the boundary net delays are
not as accurate. In the case where outputs are shorted, the dependence of output delay on the
capacitance of other outputs is lost.
You can use the -test_design option with the -library_cell option to have the
model extractor generate a test design that instantiates the model. You can link the model to this
design and obtain timing reports using the report_timing command. This design is not part
of the model. It is provided as a convenience for testing the model after extraction.
If you have a PT PX license, you can use the -power option to generate a power model. By
using this option, you can store power data for IPs and large blocks in a model that you can
instantiate. This option performs an implicit update_power, if necessary; therefore, you must
set the power_enable_analysis variable to true before using the extract_model -
power option. For more information about this option, see the PT PX User Guide and the
extract_model command man page.
Extracted Model Examples
Figure 4-9 shows a gate-level netlist for a design called simple.
Figure 4-9 Gate-Level Netlist
Figure 4-10 shows the extracted model when you do not use the -library_cell option. The
generated model is a design called simple. This design contains an instance of a single cell called
simple_core, which contains all the timing arcs in the model.
Figure 4-10 Extracted Model Without -library_cell

Physical Design 202
Figure 4-11 shows the core cell and its timing arcs.
Figure 4-11 Core Cell and Timing Arcs
Figure 4-12 shows the model generated when you specify the -library_cell option. The
model is a library cell called simple. This cell has the same input ports and output ports as the
model. It also contains all the timing arcs. This model has no boundary nets. All boundary net
delays are lumped into the generated model.
Figure 4-12 Model Extracted With -library_cell

Physical Design 203
Figure 4-13 shows a test design generated when you specify the -test_design option. The
design is called simple_test, which instantiates the model. This design is generated for your
convenience in obtaining model and timing reports for the model if the model is generated as a
library cell.
Figure 4-13 Test Design That Instantiates the Model
Extracting Clock-Gating Checks
The clock-gating setup and hold constraints, which are between the clock-gating pin and the
clock, are converted to setup and hold checks between the primary input pin and input clock pin,
and then written out to the model.
The following items can affect the way clock-gating checks are extracted:
Physical Design 204
Clock propagation
You can select whether to enable or disable clock delay propagation by using the
set_propagated_clock and remove_propagated_clock commands. For
more information, see the PT User Guide: Advanced Timing Analysis.
Clock-gating checks
You can use the set_clock_gating_check command to add clock-gating setup or

hold checks of any desired value to any design object. See the information about clock-
gating setup and hold checks in the PT User Guide: Advanced Timing Analysis.
Enabling or disabling gating checks
Extraction of clock-gating checks can be enabled or disabled with the

timing_disable_clock_gating_checks variable prior to extraction.
Extraction of Combinational Paths Through Gating Logic
Combinational paths that start at input or inout ports, go through clock-gating logic, and end at
output or input ports are extracted in the model.
In Figure 4-14, the path from GATE through U1/G to CLK_OUT is a combinational path in the
clock-gating network and is extracted if the timing_clock_gating_propagate_enable
variable is set to true.
Figure 4-14 Combinational Path Through Clock-Gating Logic
Extraction of Clock-Gating Checks As No-Change Arcs
Clock-gating setup and hold checks can be grouped and merged to form a no-change constraint
arc. The no-change arc is a signal check relative to the width of the clock pulse. PT establishes a
Physical Design 205
setup period before the start of the clock pulse and a hold period after the clock pulse (see Figure
4-15).
Figure 4-15 No-Change Arc
A clock-gating setup check can be combined with its corresponding clock-gating hold check to
produce two no-change arcs. One arc is the no-change condition with the clock-gating signal low
during the clock pulse, the other is the gating signal high during the clock pulse.
The extract_model_gating_as_nochange variable, when set to true, causes the model

extractor to convert all clock-gating setup and hold arcs into no-change arcs. When set to false
(the default), the clock-gating checks are represented as a clock-gating constraint.
For example, if the variable is set to true, and if the clock pulse leading edge is rising and the
trailing edge is falling, the no-change arcs produced are as follows:
• NOCHANGE_HIGH_HIGH Rise table taken from the setup arc rise table. Fall table
taken from the hold arc fall table. See Figure 4-16.
• NOCHANGE_LOW_HIGH Rise table taken from the hold arc rise table. Fall table taken
from the setup arc fall table. See Figure 4-17.
Figure 4-16 NOCHANGE_HIGH_HIGH Arc
Figure 4-17 NOCHANGE_LOW_HIGH Arc

Physical Design 206
Extracting Constant Values
If the output ports are driven to a constant value, this value is preserved in the model. If the
extracted model is used in a design, the constant value is propagated into its fanout logic.
Extracting Timing Exceptions
When you specify a timing exception for a path, PT does not treat that path as an ordinary single-
cycle path. The most common type of exception is a false path. Other exception types are
multicycle, max_delay, and min_delay paths. You can also use mode analysis
(define_design_mode , set_mode) to control the timing analysis applied to certain defined
paths.
The following rules apply to conflicts between timing exceptions and mode analysis:
• If a conflict arises between a specified false path and a moded endpoint, the false path
specification prevails.
• If a conflict arises between a specified multicycle path and a moded endpoint, the mode is
propagated.
PT extracts paths with timing exceptions automatically, including exceptions you specify using
the -through option of the exception-setting commands.
PT supports the following exceptions:
• False paths
• Multicycle paths
• Moded paths
Figure 4-18 shows an original design and an extracted timing model when false paths are
present.
Figure 4-18 Original Design With False Paths and Extracted Model
Physical Design 207
If you set the following false paths in the design shown in (a), the extracted model represented by
(b) is the result.
pt_shell> set_false_path -from {A0 C0} -through U3/A

pt_shell> set_false_path -from {B0 D0} -through U2/A
There are timing arcs from A0 and C0 to X, but none from A0 and C0 to Y. Similarly, there are
timing arcs from B0 and D0 to Y, but none from B0 and D0 to X. Figure 4-19 shows a design in
which modes are defined with the -through option, together with the extracted timing model.
Figure 4-19 Extracting Modes With the -through Option
If you define the following modes for the netlist shown in (a), the result is the set of arcs
represented in (b).
• Raddr to out in read mode
• Waddr to out in write mode
• An unmoded arc from S to out

pt_shell> set_mode -from Raddr -through U1/A read
pt_shell> set_mode -from Waddr -through U1/B write
Physical Design 208
If the original design has multicycle paths, the model extractor analyzes the multicycle paths and
then writes out a script containing a set of equivalent set_multicycle_path commands
that can be applied to the extracted model. When necessary, it also adjusts the setup, hold, and
delay values for the timing arcs to correctly model the multicycle paths.
The name of the script file containing the multicycle path definitions is output_constr.pt, where
output is the name specified by the -output option of the extract_model command.
You need to apply this script when you use the extracted timing model. For example, Figure 4-
20 shows a design in which a multicycle path has been defined at a point just inside the interface
logic. The model extractor creates a setup arc from CLK to IN and writes the
set_multicycle_path command shown in Figure 4-20, which must be applied to the
extracted model for accurate results.
Figure 4-20 Multicycle Path Extraction With an output_mcp.pt File
A timing exception that only applies to clocks (for example, a false path between to clocks) is
written to the same constraint file as the multicycle paths, output_constr.pt. You need to apply
this script when you use the extracted timing model.
If a multicycle path has been defined that cannot be moved to the boundary of the design, the
model extractor does not write out a multicycle path definition. Instead, it creates worst-case
Physical Design 209
setup, hold, and delay arcs using the clock period defined at the time of model extraction, as
demonstrated in Figure 4-21.
Figure 4-21 Multicycle Path Extraction Without an output_mcp.pt File
Restricting the Types of Arcs Extracted
By default, the extract_model command extracts a full set of timing arcs for the model,
including the following types: minimum sequential delay, maximum sequential delay, minimum
combinational delay, maximum combinational delay, setup, hold, recovery, removal, clock
gating, and pulse width arcs.
You can optionally extract only certain arc types for a model. This feature can be useful for
debugging purposes when you are only interested in one type of arc, and you want to run multiple
extractions under different conditions. Model extraction runs faster with this option because PT
only spends time extracting the requested arcs.
To restrict the types of arcs extracted, use the -arc_types option of the extract_model
command, and specify the types of arcs you want to extract. These are the allowed arc type
settings:
• min_seq_delay : minimum-delay sequential arcs

Physical Design 210
• max_seq_delay : maximum-delay sequential arcs
• min_combo_deay : minimum-delay combinational arcs
• max_combo_delay : maximum-delay combinational arcs
• setup : setup arcs
• hold : hold arcs
• recovery : recovery arcs
• removal : removal arcs
• pulse_width : pulse width arcs
Back-Annotated Delay and Layout Information
You can back-annotate two types of information to a design in PT:
• Layout information, including lumped net capacitance or resistance and detailed RC

information using standard parasitic exchange formats.
• Delay information, including net delays, cell delays, or both, using SDF. These delays are
calculated for a given transition time.
In the absence of both types of information, PT calculates arc delays in the model using the cell
libraries and calculates net delays using the wire load model set on the design.
Back-Annotated Delay on Nets and Cells
PT handles back-annotation of delays on internal nets and boundary nets in different ways.
Figure 4-22 shows the locations of boundary nets and internal nets in a simple design.
Figure 4-22 Boundary Nets and Internal Nets

Physical Design 211
Internal net delays are included in the extracted arcs of the model. Boundary net delays cannot be
computed until the model is used because the delays depend on the connection of the model to the
outside world, unless the -library_cell option is used for model extraction, in which case
boundary net delays are included in the extracted timing arcs.
Internal Nets
When the internal nets in the design are back-annotated with lumped capacitance, PT computes
the net delays, cell delays, and transition times at cell outputs for model generation using this
capacitance instead of the wire load models.
When SDF is back-annotated to internal nets, PT uses the back-annotated net delays during
model extraction. For the transition times at cell outputs to be accurately computed, the net
capacitance must also be back-annotated.
The extractor also supports extraction of designs in which internal nets are back-annotated with
detailed parasitics in DSPF, RSPF, or SPEF.
Boundary Nets
By default, PT writes all annotated parasitics of the boundary nets to the extracted timing model,
including both detailed and lumped RC information. This preserves the dependence of the net
delays on the environment when the model is used. However, using the
ignore_boundary_parasitics option of the extract_model command causes PT to
ignore the boundary parasitics for timing model extraction, including both detailed and lumped
RC information.
When the extracted model type is a library cell (created by using the -library_cell option
of extract_model), PT lumps all of the boundary net capacitors onto the ports of the model.
For primary input nets, it adds the wire delay resulting from using the driving cell present on the
input port at the time of model extraction. For primary output ports, it calculates the wire delay by
using the range of external loads characterized for the driving device.
Cells With Annotated Delays
If the cells in the design are back-annotated with SDF delay information, PT uses this information
when it extracts arc delays in the model. Because the SDF information is computed at a particular
Physical Design 212
transition time, the delays of arcs in the model are accurate for this transition time. The model can
be inaccurate for other transition times.
To ensure that the model is context independent, do not annotate SDF to cell delays. If you need
to annotate cell delays, the extracted model is accurate for the transition time at which the SDF is
generated. To create some dependence on transition time and capacitive load, you can remove the
annotations on boundary cells by using the remove_annotated_delay and
remove_annotated_check command before you extract the model.
Guidelines for Back-Annotation
When you perform model extraction, keep in mind the following guidelines for various types of
layout and delay data back-annotation:
Internal nets
Use detailed RC data if available. This data generates the most accurate context-
independent model.
• Use both SDF and lumped RC data if both are available.
• Use lumped RC data if only this data is available.
• Use SDF data alone if only this data is available. In this case, the extracted model
is accurate only for the transition times at which the SDF is generated. However,
using SDF data alone is not recommended.
Cell delays
To ensure that the model is context-independent, do not annotate SDF to cell delays. If
you need to annotate cell delays, the extracted model is accurate only for the transition
times at which the SDF is generated. To create some dependence on transition time, you
can remove the annotations on boundary cells by using the
remove_annotated_delay command and the remove_annotated_check
command before you extract the model.
Boundary nets
If you have the detailed parasitics for the boundary nets, annotate the information before
you extract.
Performing Model Extraction
After you understand the tasks necessary to set up your modeling environment (see “Preparing
for Extraction”), you can extract a timing model.
The following sections explain how to do this:

Physical Design 213
• Loading and Linking the Design
• Preparing to Extract the Model
• Generating the Model
Loading and Linking the Design
Load and link your design into PT by following these steps:
1. Set the
search path of your library. For example, enter
pt_shell> set search_path \
". /remote/release/v2000.11/libraries/syn"
2. Set the link path of your library:

pt_shell> set link_path "* class.db"
3. Read your design into PT:

pt_shell> read_db design.db
4. Link your design:

pt_shell> link_design design
Preparing to Extract the Model
Preparing a model for extraction includes the following steps:
1. Define wire load models for your design. Enter
pt_shell> set_wireload_model -name wire_model_name
2. Define the clocks in your model. For example, enter
pt_shell> create_clock -period 10 CLK1

pt_shell> create_clock -period 20 CLK2
3. Set the false paths in the design:
pt_shell> set_false_path -from IN4 -to OUT1
4. Check your design for potential timing problems:
pt_shell> check_timing
5. Verify that the design meets timing requirements:
Physical Design 214
6. Set the model extraction variables, if applicable. PT uses the default values for any
variables you do not set. For example, enter
pt_shell> set extract_model_capacitance_limit 5.0

pt_shell> set extract_model_transition_limit 2.0
Generating the Model
Determine the options you want to use for the extract_model command and issue the
command. For example, enter the following command to extract a timing model for the current
operating conditions and create a .db model file and a design in .db format:
pt_shell> extract_model -output example_model \

-format {db}
PT displays a report similar to this:
Warning: Environment variable

‘extract_model_min_resolution’ is
not defined.
Using default value ‘0.1’. (MEXT-6)
Using default value ‘0.45’. (MEXT-6)
Wrote model library core to ‘./example_model_lib.db’
Wrote model to ‘./example_model.db’
If you have generated a .lib version of the timing model, you may notice it contains user-defined
attributes. For a description of these attributes, see “PT User-Defined Attributes in .lib”.
PT User-Defined Attributes in .lib
User-defined attributes are used by PT and can be used by other Synopsys tools. These attributes
do not affect timing analysis when using the model.
• min_delay_flag - Used to help merge_models separate minimum and maximum

arcs between a pair of pins with the same sense. This attribute is used to properly merge
the arcs and maintain the arc configuration across different modes.
• original_pin - Used to help maintain the mapping of extracted time model cell pins
to the original pin names that were defined in the block netlist prior to extraction.
Merging Extracted Models
A module can have different operating modes, such as test mode and normal operating mode. The
timing requirements for a module can be quite different for different operating modes. In these
cases, you need to extract a separate model for each mode. For each extraction, place the module
into the applicable mode by setting the instance or design modes, by using case analysis, and by
setting the applicable timing exceptions.
Physical Design 215
To use different models extracted under different operating modes, you can swap each model into
the higher-level design by using swap_cell. However, instead of keeping and using multiple
extracted models, you can optionally merge them into a single, comprehensive model that has
different timing arcs enabled for different operating modes. Then you can use this single model
and change its behavior by setting it into different modes.
This is the basic procedure for creating and merging timing models for different operating modes:
1. Load and link the module netlist.
2. Back-annotate the SDF data or detailed parasitics.
3. Apply the constraints for the first operating mode.
4. Extract a model in .lib format for the operating mode.

pt_shell> extract_model -format lib -output model_1
5. Remove all constraints on the design.
6. Repeat steps 3, 4, and 5 for each additional operating mode.
7. Merge the generated .lib models

pt_shell> merge_models \
-model_files {model_1.lib model_2.lib ...} \
-mode_names {mode_1 mode_2 ...} \
-group_name etm_modes \
-output my_model \
-formats {db lib} \
-tolerance 0.1
Each extract_model command generates a .lib file and a .data file for the extracted model.
The merge_models command merges the extracted models into a single model that has
different operating modes. You specify the operating mode when you use the model.
In the merge_models command, you specify the .lib files, the names of the modes
corresponding to those models, the name of the new model being generated, the model formats to
be generated (.db and .lib), an optional mode group name, and an optional tolerance value. For
more information about mode groups, see PT User Guide: Fundamentals.
The tolerance value specifies how far apart two timing values can be to merge them into a single
timing arc. If the corresponding arc delays in two timing models are within this tolerance value,
the two arcs are considered the same and are merged into a single arc that applies to both
operating modes. The default tolerance value is 0.04 time units.
PT can handle more than one mode per timing arc, but some tools cannot. To generate a merged
model that can work with these tools, use the -single_mode option in the merge_models
command. This forces the merged model to have no more than one mode per timing arc, resulting
in a larger, less compact timing model.
Physical Design 216
It might be necessary to disable all arc merging. For instance, if you are performing two
independent merges and the resulting merged models must have the same number of arcs. This
occurs when one merged model has the maximum and another has the minimum operating
condition. To use these two models in the set_min_library command, they must have
exactly the same number of arcs. To disable all arc merging, you can use the –keep_all_arcs
option of the merge_models command.
The models being merged must be consistent, with the same I/O pins, operating conditions
(process/voltage/temperature), and so on. Timing arcs that are different are assigned to the modes
specified in the merge_models command. Design rule constraints (DRC), such as minimum
and maximum capacitance and transition time, are allowed to be different. In those cases, the
more restrictive value is retained in the merged model.
Figure 4-23 shows an example of a module from which two timing models are extracted, where
the extracted models are merged into a single timing model having two operating modes.
Figure 4-23 Model Extraction and Merging Example

Physical Design 217
To use a merged timing model with modes:
1. Set the link_path variable to include the path to the merged model in .db format.
2. Load and link the top-level design.
3. Apply the constraints and back-annotation on the design.
4. Using the set_mode command, set the mode on the module instance to the desired
mode.
5. Run the timing analysis.
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for each mode that you want to analyze.
Here are some points to consider for model merging:
• To retain in the merged model, case values propagated to the output pins of the models
being merged must be the same in all models. If there are mismatching case values, PT
ignores them and issues a warning message.
• Any model that already has modes or moded arcs defined in it cannot be merged.
• Any generated clocks in the models to be merged must be exactly the same.
For more information, see the man page for the merge_models command.
What are all the SDC Constraints and related commands?

Operating conditions
set_operating_conditions
Wire load models
set_wire_load_min_block_size set_wire_load_mode
set_wire_load_model set_wire_load_selection_group
System interface
set_drive set_driving_cell
set_fanout_load set_input_transition
set_load set_port_fanout_number
Design rule constraints
set_max_capacitance set_max_fanout
set_max_transition set_min_capacitance
Timing constraints
create_clock create_generated_clock
set_clock_gating_check set_clock_latency
set_clock_transition set_clock_uncertainty
set_data_check set_disable_timing
set_input_delay set_max_time_borrow
Physical Design 218
set_output_delay set_propagated_clock
set_resistance set_timing_derate
Timing exceptions
set_false_path set_max_delay
set_min_delay set_multicycle_path
Area constraints
set_max_area
Power constraints
set_max_dynamic_power
set_max_leakage_power
Logic assignments
set_case_analysis set_logic_dc
set_logic_one set_logic_zero
Multivoltage constraints
create_voltage_area
set_level_shifter_strategy
set_level_shifter_threshold
design current_design A container for cells. A block.

clock1 get_clocks A clock in a design.
all_clocks All clocks in a design.
port get_ports An entry point to or exit point from a design
all_inputs All entry points to a design.
all_outputs All exit points from a design
cell get_cells An instance of a design or library cell.
pin get_pins An instance of a design port or library cell pin.
net g get_nets A connection between cell pins and design ports.
library get_libs A container for library cells.
lib_cell get_lib_cells A primitive logic element.
lib_pin get_lib_pins An entry point to or exit point from a lib_cell.
18. Designs Executed (Project Related)
Details DDR DXO PT2 PT1
Full chip (Flat Full chip (Flat

Type Block Design Block Design
Design) Design)
Technology 65 nm 130 nm 130nm 130 nm
Tech Lib Name 065lv CL013G CL013lv CL013lv
125 MHz/500
Operating 133 MHz Half
195 MHz MHz (Derived
Frequency Cycle Pah
clock)
No of Clocks 3 Clocks 1 Clocks 9 Clocks
Physical Design 219
8 Sq.mm
4 Sq.mm 15 Sq.mm
Area size 2.82 x 2.82
size 2 x 2 mm size 5 x 3mm
mm
13 Macro and 1
No of Macros 16 61
PLL
Total 189
No of IO Pins 473 656 120 Signal, 60
Power Pads
No of Layers 6 layers used 7 layers used 8 layers used
used out of 8 out of 8 out of 8
Std Cell
260 k gates 200 k gates 520 k gates
Instances
Utilization 85 % 94 % 83
Operating Core 1.0 V,

1.0 V / 3.3 V 1.0 V / 3.3 V
Voltage IO 2.5v
Congestion
Number
Area of NAND2 5 Sq.um 5 Sq.um
854 219 219

Gate Density
kgates/Sq.mm kgates/Sq.mm kgates/Sq.mm
3.6 um /
Std Cell Height
9 tracks
TSMC Advanced Technology Overview
Parameters 65 nm 90 nm 130 nm 180 nm
Voltage Range 1.0 to 1.2 V 1.0 to 1.2 V 1.0 to 1.5 V 1.2 to 1.8 V
2.5 and 3.3, 3.5

IO Voltage 1.8, 2.5 / 3.3V 1.8, 2.5 /3.3 V
V
854 436 219 110
Gate Density
kgates/Sq.mm kgates/Sq.mm kgates/Sq.mm kgates/Sq.mm
0.97 Sq.um(8T)
1.99 Sq.um(8T)
SRAM Memory 0.499
0.99 Sq.um(6T)
Density Sq.um(6T)
Physical Design 220
1. To get the guidelines to be followed for doing sanity tests on the inputs received from
the front-end.
2. If Five Memories are placed closed to each other and placed in the Top corner of the
Design. What are the issues are faced in the design?
3. Evaluating the hard macro for suitability towards any tool.
4. Memory requirements needed for any block backend implementation to be worked out.
5. Scan chain reordering concepts at backend level.Selection of IO pad
6. How are nets crossing multi-voltage domain handled?
Standared Low Power Methods:

Therea are number of power reduction methods,
1. Clock gating
2. Gate level Power Optimization
3. Multi-VDD
4. Multi-Vt
1. Clock Gating:
Up to 50% or even more of the dynamic power can be spent in the clock buffers. This result
makes intuitive sense since the buffers have the highest toggle rate in the system, there are lots of
them, and they often have the high drive strength to minimize the clock delay. In addition, the
flops receiving the clock dissipate some dynamic power even if the input and output remain the
same.
The most common way to reduce this power is to turn clocks off when they are not required. This
approach is known as clock gating.
From some analysis and experiments, It is decided to use clock gating only on registers with a bit-
width of at least three. The clock gating on one-bit registers was not power or area efficient.
2. Gate Power Optimization:

There are a number of logic optimizations that the tools can perform to minimize
dynamic power. The examples of gate level power optimization include cell sizing and
buffer insertion. In cell sizing, the tool can selectively increase cell drive strength throughout
the critical path to achieve timing and then reduce dynamic power to minimum.
In buffer insertion, the tool can insert buffers rather than increasing the drive strength of the
fate itself. If done in the right situation, this can result in low power.
3. Multi Vdd:
Since dynamic power is proportion to the square of VDD, lowering VDD on selected blocks
helps reduce power significantly. Unfortunately, lowering the voltage also increases the delay
of the gates in the design.
Mixing blocks at different VDD supplies adds some complexity to the design – not only do
we need to add IO pins to supply the different power rails, but we need a more complex
power grid and level shifters on signals running between blocks.
4. Multi – Threshold Logic:

Physical Design 221
As geometries have shrunk to 130nm, 90nm, and below, using libraries with multiple Vt
has become a common way of reducing leakage current. The sub-threshold leakage
depends exponentially on Vt delay has much weaker dependence on Vt.
May libraries today offer two or three versions of their cells : Low vt, Standard Vt, and
High Vt. The implementation tools can take adventage of these libraries to optimize
timing and power simultaneously.
Thus, each major compenent of the system is running at the lowest voltage consistent
with meeting system timing. This approach can provide significant savings in power.
It is now quite common to use a “Dual Vt” flow during synthesis. The goal of this
approach is to minimize the total number of fast, leaky low Vt transistors vy deploying
them a primary library followed by an optimization step targeting one(or more) additional
libraries with differing thresholds.
Usually there is a minimum performance which must be met before optimizing power. In
practice this usually means synthesizing with the high performance , high leakage library
first and then relaxing back any cells not on the critical path by swapping them for their
lower performing, lower leakage equivalents.
What is the need Well tap cells?
An integrated circuit includes a set of standard cells, referred to as tap cells, each having a well
tap and a substrate tap for coupling a well region and a substrate region to a power source and
ground, respectively. The tap cells are disposed at intervals that do not exceed a maximum
allowable distance as specified by a set of design rules associated with the integrated circuit. A
method for designing the integrated circuit includes determining the positions at which the tap
cells will be fixed and creating a design layout for the integrated circuit using a place and route
tool that incorporates the positions.
Undesired bipolar transistors are inherently formed in integrated circuits that are manufactured
using conventional integrated circuit manufacturing techniques. These undesired bipolar
transistors may cause the integrated circuit to have robustness problems including, for example, a
phenomenon known as latch-up. Latch-up occurs when the undesired bipolar transistors in
combination with desired transistors create a positive feedback circuit in which the current
flowing through the circuit increases to a magnitude that exceeds the current capacity of the
integrated circuit. The excess current causes the integrated circuit to become defective and thus,
unusable.
As is well known in the art, latch-up is prevented by placing well taps and substrate taps at
positions in the integrated circuit that are located appropriate distances from one another. Each
well tap is an electrically conductive lead that couples a well region of the integrated circuit to a
power source and each substrate tap is an electrically conductive lead that couples a substrate
region of the integrated circuit to ground. Coupling the well and substrate regions to power and
ground, respectively, reduces the substrate resistance, thus causing the positive feedback to be
removed.
In particular, the taps must be positioned so that the distance between any two well taps and any
two substrate taps does not exceed a maximum allowable distance that is obtained using a set of
design rules associated with the integrated circuit. As will be understood by one having ordinary
Physical Design 222
skill in the art, the design rules typically specify that the distance from any point in either the
substrate or well regions must not be located farther than a maximum distance from the nearest
substrate tap or well tap, respectively. Thus, the maximum allowable distance specified in the
design rules is not defined as being equal to the maximum allowable distance as that term is used
for purposes of this discussion, i.e., the maximum allowable distance between tap cells. Rather,
the maximum allowable distance between tap cells is equal to the maximum distance specified in
the design rules multiplied by a factor of two. As is well known in the art of integrated circuit
design, the design rules may also specify various other physical parameters necessary for the
proper construction of the integrated circuit such as, for example, the minimum allowable
distance between wires or conducting paths disposed in the integrated circuit and the minimum
allowable width of such wires.
Currently, methods for positioning well and substrate taps in an integrated circuit are performed
during the circuit design process which begins with defining the desired functions or computing
tasks to be performed by the integrated circuit. These functions, once defined, are described in a
hardware description language that is then translated by hand or using a computerized synthesis
tool, into a netlist. As will be understood by one having ordinary skill in the art, a netlist defines a
set of logic gates and the connectivity between the logic gates needed to implement the functions
described in the hardware description language. For example, the netlist may include a list of the
logic gates, wires and input/output ports needed to implement the integrated circuit. After the
netlist has been created, the integrated circuit designer provides the netlist and a floorplan as data
input to a computerized "place and route" tool that creates a layout associated with netlist. The
floorplan specifies various physical constraints associated with the integrated circuit design
including, for example, the location of the power grid, the locations of input and output ports and
the locations where the various wires or conducting paths will be located. The "place and route"
tool uses the netlist and floorplan to determine the physical design of the integrated circuit from
which the integrated circuit will ultimately be fabricated. Each logic gate is represented in the
netlist by a logic cell and thus, the resulting layout is comprised of a set of logic cells that, when
formed in the integrated circuit, will implement the logic dictated by the corresponding logic
gates. To reduce the time required to perform the design process, cell libraries have been created
wherein standard cell designs are available. Of course, there are applications that may require one
or more specialized cells in which case the designer will either create a custom cell for the layout
or alter a library cell in a manner required by the desired design. Once complete, the resulting
layout is used to manufacture the desired integrated circuit.
Two well-known methods for positioning taps in an integrated circuit occur at different stages of
the circuit design process. In a first tap positioning method, the positions of the taps were
determined by virtue of using a standard cell library for cell selection. More particularly, each
standard cell, also referred to as a library cell, was designed to include at least one well tap and
one substrate tap. Thus, when the "place and route" tool used the netlist to extract standard library
cells to use for the layout, the tap locations were defined in the resulting layout by default. This
technique of placing at least one of each type of tap per library cell was effective for earlier-
generation integrated circuits because earlier integrated circuits and the cells associated with these
integrated circuits were physically larger than the integrated circuits of today. More particularly,
at least one well tap and one substrate tap had to be placed in each library cell to satisfy the
design rule related to the maximum allowable distance between taps. In some instances, the
dimensions of a cell must be increased in order to fit the taps thereby causing an undesired
increase in the size of the integrated circuit.
In a second tap positioning method, a layout was prepared using cells that are not designed to
include taps and then proper locations for the taps were determined by engineers. Although this
Physical Design 223
second method yielded the optimal result for layout density, it was extremely costly in terms of
engineering hours. Using this method, an engineer determined appropriate locations for a set of
taps and then used a design rule checker to determine whether the taps were indeed appropriately
positioned, i.e., are in compliance with the design rules. As is well known in the art, a design rule
checker is a computer-aided design tool that determines whether the resulting layout complies
with the design rules associated with the integrated circuit. These steps were then repeated in an
iterative fashion until the resulting measurements indicated that the tap locations had been
properly positioned. Unfortunately, the iterative and manual nature of the process caused it to be
a time consuming and thus costly task.
However, due to continuing developments in the design and manufacture of integrated circuits,
cell dimensions are shrinking. As a result, a well tap and a substrate tap are no longer required in
each cell and the engineering hours spent positioning taps in library cells are needlessly spent.
Moreover, the positioning of unnecessary taps needlessly consumes the area of the cell that may
otherwise be available for other cell circuitry and further consumes the area available for wires in
the cell.
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
FIG. 1A is a plan view of an integrated circuit having tap cells positioned in accordance with the
present invention;
FIG. 1B is a plan view of the integrated circuit of FIG. 1A with portions of a set of layers of the
integrated circuit removed to show features associated with the layers;
FIG. 2 is a plan view of a tap cell in accordance with the present invention; and,
FIG. 3 is a flow chart that illustrates a method for positioning tap cells in an integrated circuit in
accordance with the present invention.
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
The present invention is directed to an integrated circuit having standard cells that contain well
and substrate taps and that are located at equally spaced intervals that do not exceed a maximum
allowable distance. The tap cells each include a well tap and a substrate tap and are positioned at
generally equally spaced intervals to prevent the formation of positive feedback circuits which
may cause latch-up. A method for designing an integrated circuit having tap cells located at
generally equally spaced intervals includes determining a set of positions at which the tap cells
are to be located and then creating a layout for the integrated circuit that incorporates the
positions.
DETAILED DESCRIPTION
Referring now to FIG. 1A, an integrated circuit having a set of tap cells 10 positioned in
accordance with the present invention is indicated generally at 12. The integrated circuit
12 includes a placeable area 14 in which logic cells 11 and wiring (not shown) may be
placed and that is partitioned into a set of rows 16 of equal height. The height of each row
16 is also equal to the height of a standard library cell, and thus, each row 16 is
dimensioned to support a plurality of standard library cells 11. The width of each
standard library cell 11 may vary, and as a result, the number of standard library cells
disposed in any given row 16 will vary depending on the widths of the cells disposed
Physical Design 224
therein.
As will be appreciated by one having ordinary skill in the art, integrated circuits 12 are
constructed by forming layers comprised of a semiconductor material, such as silicon, an
insulating material and a metal. For illustrative purposes, the detail associated with
various layers of the integrated circuit 12 are represented in the sectionalized view of
FIG. 1B. Specifically, the placeable area 14, which extends through all layers of the
integrated circuit, is shown in a section 13 of FIG. 1B. In addition, the rows 16 of the
integrated circuit 12 are associated with all layers of the integrated circuit and are shown
in a section 15 of FIG. 1B. In a section 17, layers of the integrated circuit 12 having a set
of well regions 18 and substrate regions 20 are shown. In particular, each row 16 of the
integrated circuit 12 includes a well region 18 and a substrate region 20. The well and
substrate regions 18 and 20 are formed by a process, referred to as doping, which is
performed by adding impurities to the various layers of silicon. Adding impurities causes
the electrical qualities of the silicon to change such that the silicon becomes either more
or less electrically conductive depending on the type of material added. More
specifically, the substrate region 20 is formed using a layer of silicon that spans the entire
placeable area 14 and that may be doped with, for example, a P-type dopant and the well
regions 18 are formed by adding a layer of N-type dopant on top of select areas of the
layer that forms the substrate region 20. Thus, the well regions 18 are defined as the
select areas that are doped with the N-type dopant and the substrate regions 20 are, by
default, the portions of the placeable area 14 that are not occupied by well regions 18.
The well regions 18 and substrate regions 20 are positioned so that each row 16, except
the first and last rows, shares a well region 18 with an adjacent row 16 and each row 16
shares a substrate region 20 with an adjacent row 16. A section 19, shows a layer of the
integrated circuit 12 at which at set of power rails 22 and a set of ground rails 24 are
disposed. The power and ground rails 22, 24 span the width of the placeable area 14 and
are positioned so that each power rail 22, except for the power rail 22 disposed in the top
row 16, straddles two adjacent rows 16 and each ground rail 24, except the ground rail 24
disposed in the bottom row 16, straddles two adjacent rows 16. The ground rail 24 is
connected to ground potential and the power rail 22 is coupled to a power source. In a
section 21, the position of the tap cells 10 relative to the rows 16, the well and substrate
regions 18, 20 and the power and ground rails 22, 24 is shown. Of course, integrated
circuits may be configured in any number of ways and the configuration of the integrated
circuit 12 of FIGS. 1A and 1B is merely intended to be representative of a typical
integrated circuit design. For example, the power and ground rails 22 and 24, which are
shown as being disposed in the same layer of the integrated circuit 12, may be disposed
in any layer of the integrated circuit 12 and both rails 22 and 24 need not be disposed in
the same layer of the integrated circuit 12. Likewise, the features associated with the
other layers of the integrated circuit 12 may be reconfigured in any of a number of
possible ways.
Referring now to FIGS. 1 and 2, tap cells 10 are preferably, though not necessarily,
positioned at equally spaced intervals 26 in alternating rows 16 of the integrated circuit
12. A well tap 28 is disposed near a first end 30 of each tap cell 10 and a substrate tap 32
is disposed near a second end 34 of each tap cell 10. Each well and substrate tap 28, 32
acts as a lead by which the well and substrate regions 18, 20 are coupled to the power and
ground rails 22, 24 respectively. More particularly, each well tap 28 extends from a layer
of the circuit 12 at which the well region 18 is disposed to a layer at which the power rail
22 is disposed. In addition, each well tap 28 is doped with a dopant that causes the well
tap 28 to be electrically conductive so that the well region 18 is thereby electrically
Physical Design 225
coupled to the power rail 22. Due to the nature of the doping process, the doping pattern
is more diffused in an outer region 36 of the well tap 28 and becomes more concentrated
and thus more conductive in an inner region 38 of the well tap 28. Similarly, each
substrate tap 32 extends from a layer of the circuit 12 at which the substrate region 20 is
disposed to a layer at which the ground rail 24 is disposed. In addition, each substrate tap
32 is doped with a dopant that causes the substrate tap 32 to be electrically conductive so
that the substrate region 20 is thereby electrically coupled to the ground rail 24. Again,
the doping process causes the doping pattern of the substrate tap 32 to be more diffused
in an outer region 40 of the substrate tap 32 and more concentrated and thus more
conductive in an inner region 42 of the substrate tap 32.
The interval 26, or distance between tap cells 10 does not exceed the maximum allowable
distance obtained using the design rules (not shown) that are associated with the
integrated circuit 12. Specifically, as described above, the design rules specify the
maximum distance from any point in the substrate or well region to the nearest substrate
or well tap, respectively. Further, the distance specified in the design rules is multiplied
by a factor of two to obtain the maximum allowable distance between tap cells. Thus, in
order to satisfy the design rules related to tap positioning and thereby prevent latch-up,
every substrate region 20 is populated with a set of substrate taps 32 that are separated by
an interval 26 that does not exceed the maximum allowable distance and every well
region 18 is populated with a set of well taps 28 that are separated by an interval 26 that
does not exceed the maximum allowable distance.
Although in many instances, the maximum allowable distance between substrate taps 32
will be equal to the maximum allowable distance between well taps 28, there may be
instances in which the distances are not equal. When the distances are not equal, the
length of the interval 26 must be designed so that it does not exceed the smaller of the
two maximum allowable distances. In addition, because each well and substrate region
18, 20 is disposed in two adjacent rows 16, the tap cells 10 in which the well and
substrate taps 28, 32 are disposed need only be located in every other row 16 to satisfy
the design rules. Of course, the dimensions of the tap cells 10 will affect the length of the
interval 26 separating the tap cells 10. For example, if the width 44 of the tap cell 10
exceeds the width 46 of the well or substrate tap 28, 32 disposed therein, then the length
of the interval 26 must be reduced to take into account the distance 48 between the edge
of the tap 28, 32 and the edge of the tap cell 10. Specifically, the length of the interval 26
plus the length of the distance 48 between the edge of the tap 28, 32 and the edge of the
tap cell 10 must not exceed the maximum allowable distance. As will be appreciated by
one having ordinary skill in the art, the exact positions at which the tap cells 10 are
located may vary, provided that the intervals 26 do not exceed the maximum allowable
distance. In addition, although the intervals 26 are preferably spaced at equal distances,
the distance between the intervals 26 may vary provided, of course, that the largest
distance between any two tap cells 10 does not exceed the maximum allowable distance
associated with the integrated circuit. Further, FIG. 1 is only intended to provide
sufficient detail to indicate the positions at which the tap cells 10 are located relative to
each other and relative to the well and substrate regions 18, 20 and the power and ground
rails 22, 24. As a result, only two of the plurality of logic cells 11 that are used to
implement the desired logic of the integrated circuit 12 and that would typically be
disposed in the portions of the rows 16 that are not occupied by the tap cells 10, are
shown in FIG. 1.
Referring now to FIG. 3, a flowchart illustrating a method of designing an integrated

Physical Design 226
circuit that incorporates a set of steps for determining the positions at which a set of tap
cells 10 will be located begins at a step 50 where the desired functionality of the
integrated circuit 12 is defined. For example, if the integrated circuit 12 is going to be
used as a microprocessor, then the desired functionality of the microprocessor is defined.
If, instead the integrated circuit 12 is going to be used as an application specific
integrated circuit (ASIC) then the desired functionality of the ASIC is defined. Next, at a
step 60, the desired functionality of the integrated circuit 12 is described using a
hardware description language such as, for example, Verilog or VHDL.
Continuing at a step 70, the hardware description language is converted into a netlist
using any of a number of synthesis tools such as, for example, Design Compiler by
Synopsys.RTM. or Build Gates by Cadence.RTM.. As described above, the netlist is a
listing of the logic gates, the connections between the gates, wiring and input/output ports
required to implement the functionality of the integrated circuit as described in the
hardware description language. In particular, each of the logic gates required to
implement the integrated circuit is represented in the netlist by a logic cell which defines
the circuitry required to implement the logic gate. As described above, the logic cells
listed in the netlist may be standard library cells or may instead be customized cells
having application-specific functions. Also, at the step 70, the netlist version of the
integrated circuit design may be used to perform computer simulations to test the
integrated circuit design for defects.
Next, at a step 80, the dimensions of a set of tap cells 10 are defined and a set of positions
at which the tap cells will be located in the placeable area 14 of the integrated circuit 12
are determined. More particularly, a floorplan associated with the integrated circuit is
used to provide the physical dimensions of the basic structure of the integrated circuit. As
will be understood by one having ordinary skill in the art, the floorplan defines the
physical constraints of the integrated circuit, including, for example, the location of a
power grid, the location of input/output ports, the dimensions of the integrated circuit
block and the areas of the integrated circuit in which wires associated with the power grid
and other pre-existing circuitry are disposed. Specifically, the designer obtains the
orientation, number and dimensions of the rows 16 of the integrated circuit 12 in which
the logic cells 11 and tap cells 10 will be located. In addition, the designer obtains the
maximum allowable distance between tap cells 10 from the design rules associated with
the integrated circuit 12 and defines the dimensions of the tap cells 10. Using the row
information, the tap cell dimensions and the maximum allowable distance, the designer
calculates the number of tap cells 10 that will be placed in each row 16 and the length of
the interval 26 that will be interposed between each tap cell 10 located in a row 16 such
that the positions of the tap cells 10 are located at equally spaced intervals 26 and such
that the interval 26 between the tap cells 10 located in a given row 16 does not exceed the
maximum allowable distance. Of course, as described above, the designer must take into
account the distance 48 between the edge of the tap 28 or 32 and the edge of the tap cell
10 when determining the length of the interval 26.
Once the dimensions and positions of the tap cells 10 have been defined, at a step 90, the
floorplan associated with the integrated circuit design is modified to include the
dimensions and positions of the tap cells 10 at a step 90. Typically, the floorplan exists in
a computer file format written in a physical netlist syntax such as Design Exchange
Format ("DEF") by Cadence.RTM. that is easily modifiable to include the dimensions
and positions of the tap cells 10. After the netlist version of the integrated circuit 12 has
been completely tested and debugged, at the step 70, and after the floorplan has been
Physical Design 227
modified to include the dimensions/positions of the tap cells, at the step 90, the netlist
and the floorplan are provided as data input to a computer-automated design tool referred
to as a "place and route" tool such as, Silicon Ensemble by Cadence.RTM., at a step 100.
The "place and route" tool then uses the netlist and the floorplan to design a layout for the
integrated circuit 12. As will be understood by one having ordinary skill in the art, the
layout is a representation of the integrated circuit 12 that includes the physical
dimensions and configuration of the integrated circuit components and serves as a
blueprint from which the integrated circuit 12 may be manufactured. For example, the
"place and route" tool determines where the logic cells listed in the netlist are to be
located in the placeable area 14 of the integrated circuit 12 and further determines the
routing of any wires needed to support the logic cells. In addition, the "place and route"
tool automatically incorporates the information provided in the floorplan such that the
resulting layout incorporates the positions at which the tap cells 10 are located.
Finally, at a step 110, the layout may be used to manufacture the desired integrated
circuit. As will be appreciated by one having ordinary skill in the art, the step 70 of
determining positions where the tap cells 10 will be located may be done before, during
or after the step 60 of converting the hardware description language into the netlist. In
addition, the design method of FIG. 3 is not limited to design processes that use a "place
and route" tool. In fact, any layout tool may be used to create the integrated circuit layout.
In addition, the layout may even be created using a process that includes steps that are
performed manually by a designer who, for example, incorporates the positions of the tap
cells determined at the step 80.
From the foregoing description, it should be understood that an improved integrated

circuit with tap cells fixed at equally spaced intervals and a method for positioning the
tap cells in the integrated circuit have been shown and described, both of which have
many desirable attributes and advantages. The integrated circuit having tap cells fixed at
equally spaced intervals is less costly to design and the method of designing integrated
circuits that include tap cells located at equally space intervals will eliminate the need to
place well and substrate taps into each and every library cell, thereby potentially reducing
library cell dimensions. Moreover, the method of determining the positions at which the
tap cells shall be located is compatible with existing design processes, including design
processes that use a computerized layout tool such as a "place and route" tool.
While various embodiments of the present invention have been shown and described, it
should be understood that other modifications, substitutions and alternatives are apparent
to one of ordinary skill in the art. Such modifications, substitutions and alternatives can
be made without departing from the spirit and scope of the invention, which should be
determined from the appended claims.
Various features of the invention are set forth in the appended claims.
Physical Design 228
Timing Analysis Conditions

Input Delays
Excluding Clocks
Output Delays
Drive Characteristics at Input Ports

Setting the Port Driving Cell
Setting the Port Drive Resistance
Setting a Fixed Port Transition Time
Displaying Drive Information
Removing Drive Information From Ports
Port Capacitance
Wire Load Models

Setting Wire Load Models Manually
Automatic Wire Load Model Selection
Setting the Wire Load Mode
Reporting Wire Load Models
Operating Conditions
Interconnect Model Types
Creating Operating Conditions
Operating Condition Information
Slew Propagation
Design Rules
Maximum Transition Time
Handling Slew in Multiple Threshold and Derate Environment
Conversion of single-float slews between thresholds and derates:
Maximum Transition Constraint Storage
Evaluation of Max Transition Constraint
Example 1
Example 2 - Scaling the Max Transition with Different Library Slew Threshold
Example 3 - Scaling the Max Transition with Slew Derate Factor Specified in Library
Minimum and Maximum Net Capacitance
Maximum Fanout Load
Fanout Load Values for Output Ports
A timing analysis by Timing Engine depends on the conditions that you specify. These can
include such conditions as input delays, output delays, port capacitance, wire load models, and
operating conditions.
The specification and usage of these conditions are described in the following sections:
Physical Design 229
• Input Delays
• Output Delays
• Drive Characteristics at Input Ports
• Port Capacitance
• Wire Load Models
• Operating Conditions
• Slew Propagation
• Design Rules
Input Delays
Specifies the amount of delay from an edge of the CLK clock to the arrival of data on input pins.
Shown in figure 7.0a
An input delay is the specification of an arrival time at an input port relative to a clock edge. The
set_input_delay command specifies the timing of external paths leading to an input port..
Specifies the drive characteristics of the external cell presumed to be driving all the input ports of
the design.
Driving-cell delay
The ports have a cell delay that is the load-dependent value of the external driving-cell delay. To
prevent this delay from being counted twice, estimate the load-dependent delay of the driving
cell, then subtract that amount from the input delays on the port. Shown in figure 7.0b. This can
be Applied using set_drive_resistance or set_driving_cell commands to the port.
The input delay should equal the path length from the clock pin of the source flip-flop to the
output pin of the driving cell, minus the load-dependent portion of the driving cell’s delay. For
example, see the external path for the L1 clock port to port IN1 in Figure 7-1.
Physical Design 230
Figure 7.0a Input and Output Delays
Figure 7.0b Driving Cell
Figure 7-1 Two-Phase Clocking Example for Setting Port Delays

Physical Design 231
When you use the set_input_delay command, you can specify whether the delay value includes
the network latency or source latency. For details, see the set_input_delay man page.
Example 1
If the delay from L1 clock port to IN1 (minus the load-dependent delay of the driving cell) is 4.5,
this set_input_delay command applies:
set_input_delay 4.5 -clock PHI1 {IN1}
Example 2
If paths from multiple clocks or edges reach the same port, specify each one using the -add_delay
option. If you omit the -add_delay option, existing data is removed. For example:
set_input_delay 2.3 -clock PHI2 -add_delay {IN1}
If the source of the delay is a level-sensitive latch, use the -level_sensitive option. This allows
Timing Engine to determine the correct single-cycle timing constraint for paths from this port.
Use the -clock_fall option to denote a negative level-sensitive latch; otherwise the -
level_sensitive option implies a positive level-sensitive latch.
To see input delays on ports, use report_port -input_delay.
To remove input delay information from ports or pins in the current design set using the
set_input_delay command, use remove_input_delay. The default is to remove all input delay
information in the port_pin_list.
Excluding Clocks
Timing Engine considers the input delay on clock source ports or pins as source latency if the
clock is propagated.
Physical Design 232
The input delay can be relative to no clock, or to the clock of that source. The source latency
value is added to the clock network delay to determine total latency.
A common mistake is to use the following command, which sets delay on all the inputs,
including the clock input:
set_input_delay 2 -clock CLK [all_inputs]
Instead, use this command:
set_input_delay 2 -clock CLK \

[remove_from_collection [all_inputs] [get_port CLK]]
Use the set_clock_latency command with the -source option to define the actual source latency, if
any.
Output Delays
Specifies the amount of delay from each output to the external device, that captures the output
data with respect to the CLK. Shown in figure 7.0a
An output delay represents an external timing path from an output port to a register. The
maximum output delay value should be equal to the length of the longest path to the register data
pin, plus the setup time of the register. The minimum output delay value should be equal to the
length of the shortest path to the register data pin, minus the hold time.
The set_output_delay command specifies output delays.
To show output delays associated with ports, use report_port -output_delay.
To remove output delay from output ports or pins set through set_output_delay, use
remove_output_delay. By default, all output delays on each object in the port or pin list are
removed. To restrict the removed output delay values, use -clock, -clock_fall, -min, -max, -rise,
or -fall.
Example
To set an output delay of 4.3 relative to the rising edge of clock PHI1 on port OUT1 (see Figure
7-1):
set_output_delay 4.3 -clock PHI1 {OUT1}
Drive Characteristics at Input Ports
You need to define the drive capability of the external cell driving each input port. Timing Engine
uses this information to calculate the load-dependent cell delay for the port and to produce an
accurate transition time for calculating cell delays and transition times for the following logic
stages.
Physical Design 233
The set_driving_cell command can specify a library cell arc for the driving cell so that timing
calculations are accurate even if the capacitance changes. This command causes the port to have
the transition time calculated as if the given library cell were driving the port.
For less precise calculations, you can use the set_drive or set_input_transition command. The
most recent drive command has precedence. If you issue the set_drive command on a port delay
and then use the set_driving_cell command on the same port, information from the set_drive
command is removed.
Setting the Port Driving Cell
The set_driving_cell command directs Timing Engine to calculate delays as though the port were
an instance of a specified library cell. The port delay is calculated as a cell delay that consists of
only the load-dependent portion of the port.
The transition time for the port is also calculated as though an instance of that library cell were
driving the net. The delay calculated for a port with information from the driving_cell command
takes advantage of the actual delay model for that library cell, whether it is nonlinear or linear.
The input delay specified for a port with a driving cell or drive resistance should not include the
load-dependent delay of the port.
To display port transition or drive capability information, use the report_port command with the -
drive option.
With the set_driving_cell command you can specify the input rise and fall transition times for the
input of a driving cell using the -input_transition_rise or the -input_transition_fall option. If no
input transition is specified, the default is 0.
For more information, see the set_driving_cell man page.
Setting the Port Drive Resistance
The set_drive command models the external driver as a linear resistance, as in the linear
generic_cmos delay model. The port has a transition time equal to Rdriver * Ctotal. Timing
Engine uses this transition time in calculating the delays of subsequent logic stages. Timing
Engine performs detailed delay calculation based on a 0 input transition to the driving cell, the
total net cap, and the drive resistance specified using this command.The cell delay of the port is
also equal to half of the Rdriver * Ctotal.
The set_drive command is useful when you cannot specify a library cell (for example, when the
driver is a custom block not modeled as a Synopsys library cell).
For more information, see the set_drive man page.
Setting a Fixed Port Transition Time
The set_input_transition command defines a fixed transition time for input ports. The port has
zero cell delay. Timing Engine uses the specified transition time only in calculating the delays of
logic driven by the port.
Physical Design 234
A fixed transition time setting is useful for
• Comparing the timing of a design to another tool that supports only input transition time.
• Defining transition for ports at the top level of a chip, where a large external driver and a
large external capacitance exist. In this case, the transition time is relatively independent
of capacitance in the current design.
For more information, see the set_input_transition man page.
Port Capacitance
The set_load command sets load capacitance on ports. To accurately time a design, you need to
describe the external load capacitance of nets connected to top-level ports, including pin
capacitance and wire capacitance.
For more information, see the set_load man page.
Example 1
To specify the external pin capacitance of ports, enter
set_load -pin_load 3.5 {IN1 OUT1 OUT2}
You also need to account for wire capacitance outside the port. For prelayout, specify the external
wire load model and the number of external fanout points. This process is described in “Setting
Wire Load Models Manually”.
Example 2
For post-layout, specify the external annotated wire capacitance as wire capacitance on the port.
For example, enter
set_load -wire_load 5.0 {OUT3}
To remove port capacitance values, use the remove_capacitance command.
Wire Load Models
A wire load model attempts to predict the capacitance and resistance of nets in the absence of
placement and routing information.
The estimated net capacitance and resistance are used for delay calculation. Technology library
vendors supply statistical wire load models to support estimation of wire loads based on the
number of fanout pins on a net.
You can set wire load models manually or automatically.

Physical Design 235
Setting Wire Load Models Manually
The set_wire_load_model command manually sets a named wire load model on a design,
instance, list of cells, or list of ports.
For example, consider this design hierarchy:
TOP
MID (instance u1)
BOTTOM (instance u5)
MID (instance u2)
BOTTOM (instance u5)
To set a model called 10x10 on instances of BOTTOM, a model called 20x20 on instances of
MID, and a model called 30x30 on nets at the top level, use these commands:
set_wire_load_mode enclosed
set_wire_load_model -name 10x10 all_instances BOTTOM]
set_wire_load_model -name 20x20 all_instances MID]
set_wire_load_model -name 30x30
To capture the external part of a net that is connected to a port, you can set an external wire load
model and a number of fanout points. For example, to do this for port Z of the current design:
set_wire_load_model -name 70x70 [get_ports Z]

set_port_fanout_number 3 Z
To calculate delays, Timing Engine assumes that port Z has a fanout of 3 and uses the 70x70 wire
load model.
To see wire load model settings for the current design or instance, use the report_wire_load
command. To see wire load information for ports, use the report_port command with -wire_load
option. To remove user-specified wire load model information, use the remove_wire_load_model
command.
Automatic Wire Load Model Selection
Timing Engine can set wire loads automatically when you update the timing information for your
design. If you do not specify a wire load model for a design or block, Timing Engine
automatically selects the models based on the wire load selection group, if specified.
If you do not apply a wire load model or selection group but the library defines a
default_wire_load model, Timing Engine applies the library-defined model to the design.
Otherwise, the values for wire resistance, capacitance, length, and area are all 0.
Automatic wire load selection is controlled by selection groups, which map the block sizes of the
cells to wire load models. If you specify the set_wire_load_selection_group command on the top
design, or if the main technology library defines a default_wire_load_selection_group, Timing
Engine automatically enables wire load selection.
Physical Design 236
For more information, see the set_wire_load_selection_group man page.
When wire load selection is enabled, the wire load is automatically selected for hierarchical
blocks larger than the minimum cell area, based on the cell area of the block.
Example
To set the minimum block size for automatic wire load selection, enter:
set_wire_load_min_block_size size
In this command, size is the minimum block size for automatic wire load selection, in library cell
area units. The specified size must be greater than or equal to 0.
The auto_wire_load_selection variable specifies automatic wire load selection. The default
setting is true, enabling automatic wire load selection if a selection group is associated with the
design. To disable automatic wire load selection, enter
set auto_wire_load_selection false
To remove the wire load selection group setting, use remove_wire_load_selection_group.
Setting the Wire Load Mode
The current wire load mode setting, which can be set with the set_wire_load_mode command,
determines the wire load models used at different levels of the design hierarchy. There are three
possible mode settings: top, enclosed, or segmented.
If the mode for the top-level design is top, the top-level wire load model is used to compute wire
capacitance for all nets within the design, at all levels of hierarchy. If the mode for the top-level
design is either enclosed or segmented, wire load models on hierarchical cells are used to
calculate wire capacitance, resistance, and area for nets inside these blocks.
If the enclosed mode is set, Timing Engine determines net values using the wire load model of
the hierarchical cell that fully encloses the net. If the segmented mode is set, Timing Engine
separately determines net values for segments of the net in each level of hierarchy, and then
obtains the total net value from the sum of all segments of the net.
If you do not specify a mode, the default_wire_load_mode setting of the main technology library
is used. The enclosed mode is often the most accurate. However, your ASIC vendor might
recommend a specific mode.
For more information, see the set_wire_load_mode man page.
Example
To set the wire load mode to enclosed on the current design, enter
set_wire_load_mode enclosed
Physical Design 237
Example
The design in Figure 7-2 has the following wire load models set:
set_wire_load_model -name Big (the current design)

set_wire_load_model -name Medium (instances U1 and U2)
set_wire_load_model -name Small (instance U2/U1)
Figure 7-2 Example Design for Wire Load Mode Settings
Table 7-2 lists the resulting wire load modes and models that apply to the nets in Figure 7-2.
Table 7-2 Wire Load Models
Wire load setting Wire load model Applies to these nets
top Big All nets
enclosed Big n3, U1/n2, U2/n4, U2/U1/n5
Medium U1/n1
Small U2/U1/n6
segmented Big n3
Medium U1/n1, U1/n2, U2/n4
Small U2/U1/n5, U2/U1/n6
Operating Conditions
Integrated circuits exhibit different performance characteristics for different operating conditions:
fabrication process variations, power supply voltage, and temperature. The technology library
defines nominal values for these parameters and specifies delay information under those
conditions.
Physical Design 238
An set of operating conditions contains the following values:
Process derating factor
This value is related to the scaling of device parameters resulting from variations in the
fabrication process. A process number less than the nominal value usually results in
smaller delays.
Ambient temperature
The chip temperature affects device delays. The temperature of the chip depends on
several factors, including ambient air temperature, power consumption, package type, and
cooling method.
Supply voltage
A higher supply voltage usually results in smaller delays.
Interconnect model type
This value defines an RC tree topology that Timing Engine uses to estimate net
capacitance and resistance during prelayout analysis.
The delay information for each timing arc is specified at nominal process, temperature, and
voltage conditions. If your operating conditions are different from this, Timing Engine applies
scaling factors to account for the variations in these conditions. Many libraries use linear scaling
for process, temperature, and voltage.
If the technology library contains scaled cell information, you can include the exact delay tables
or coefficients for specific operating conditions. This method can be very accurate for library
cells that do not scale linearly. For more information, see the Library Compiler and Design
Compiler reference manuals.
You can use a single set of operating conditions to do analysis (for setup and hold) or you can
specify minimum and maximum conditions. If you do not set operating conditions on your
design, Timing Engine uses the default set of operating conditions if the main library contains
them, or the nominal values of the main library.
Interconnect Model Types
Timing Engine uses interconnect model information when it calculates net delays for prelayout
designs, when annotated net delays and parasitic information are not available. Two nets with the
same total resistance and capacitance, but different RC tree topologies, can have different pin-to-
pin delays.
This section provides background information about interconnect model types. You cannot
modify the types in Timing Engine. For more information, see the Library Compiler reference
manuals.
Physical Design 239
The interconnect model is defined by the tree_type specification in each technology library’s set
of operating conditions. A tree_type specification indicates the type of wire resistance and
capacitance topology: best_case_tree, worst_case_tree, or balanced_tree. For example:
operating_conditions(BEST) {
process : 1.1;
temperature : 11.0;
voltage : 4.6;
tree_type : ”best_case_tree”;
}
operating_conditions(TYPICAL) {
process : 1.3;
temperature : 31.0;
voltage : 4.6;
tree_type : ”balanced_tree”;
}
operating_conditions(WORST) {
process : 1.7;
temperature : 55.0;
voltage : 4.2;
tree_type : ”worst_case_tree”;
}
If the technology library does not define the tree type, Timing Engine uses the balanced_tree
model.
Figure 7-3 shows the tree type model networks.
Figure 7-3 RC Interconnect Topologies for Fanout of N

Physical Design 240
The set_operating_conditions command sets process, temperature, and voltage conditions for
timing analysis.
The operating conditions you specify must be defined in a specified library or a library in the link
path. You can create custom operating conditions for a library with the
create_operating_conditions command. Use the report_lib command to get a list of the available
operating conditions in a technology library before you use the set_operating_conditions
command.
For more information, see the set_operating_conditions man page.
Example 1
To set WCCOM from the tech_lib library as a single operating condition, enter
set_operating_conditions WCCOM -library tech_lib
Example 2
To set WCCOM as the maximum condition and BCCOM as the minimum condition, enter
set_operating_conditions -analysis_type bc_wc \

-min BCCOM -max WCCOM
Physical Design 241
Because you do not specify a library, Timing Engine searches all libraries in the link path. After
you set the operating conditions, you can report or remove operating conditions.
Creating Operating Conditions
A technology library contains a fixed set of operating conditions. You can use the
create_operating_conditions command to create new operating conditions in a library you specify
and use these custom operating conditions to analyze your design during the current session.
You cannot write these operating conditions to a library .db file.
To see the operating conditions defined for a library, use the report_lib command.
To set operating conditions on the current design, use the set_operating_conditions command.
Example
To create a new operating condition called WC_CUSTOM in the library tech_lib , enter
create_operating_conditions -name WC_CUSTOM \

-library tech_lib -process 1.2 \
-temperature 30.0 -voltage 2.8 \
-tree_type worst_case_tree
Operating Condition Information
These commands report, remove, or reset operating condition information.
To do this Use this
List the operating condition settings for the design. report_design
remove_operating_conditions
Remove operating conditions from the current design.
Reset operating conditions to the default and remove all user-

reset_design
specified data, such as clocks, input and output delays.
Slew Propagation
The timing_slew_propagation_mode variable allows you specify how Timing Engine propagates
slew through the circuit. You can set this variable to worst_slew (the default), which gives a
possibly pessimistic but safe analysis; or worst_arrival , which gives a more accurate but possibly
optimistic analysis. The method of slew propagation affects the delay of a cell arc or net.
Physical Design 242
In the worst_slew (default) mode, at a pin where multiple timing arcs meet (or merge), Timing
Engine computes the slew per driving arc at the pin, then selects the worst slew value at the pin to
propagate along. Note that the slew selected might not be from the input that contributes to the
worst path, so the calculated delay from the merge pin could be pessimistic.
In the worst_arrival mode, Timing Engine selects and propagates the slew of the input with the
worst arrival time, selecting from multiple inputs propagated from the same clock domain.
Timing Engine selects and propagates different slews from different clock domains.
Each slew propagation method, worst-arrival or worst-slew, has its own advantages. The worst-
arrival method generally provides more accurate analysis for the worst path for each timing
endpoint. However, it can potentially produce optimistic results that miss timing violations. The
worst-slew method performs a pessimistic analysis that can be relied upon for timing signoff.
You can use both methods to benefit from their respective advantages. If the two results are
nearly the same, it suggests that both reports are reasonably accurate. However, if the worst-
arrival method shows significantly improved slack, more analysis is necessary to make sure that
there is no optimism in the results.
Minimum slew propagation is similar to maximum slew propagation. In other words, Timing
Engine selects minimum slew based on the input with the best delay at the merge point. With the
worst-arrival method, if the operating condition was originally set to single
( set_operating_conditions -analysis_type single ), Timing Engine automatically switches the
operating condition to on_chip_variation to ensure that both minimum and maximum slews are
propagated, and also issues a message to indicate the new analysis mode.
Associated with the worst-arrival mode are two options to the set_input_transistion and
set_driving_cell commands, -clock clock_name and -clock_fall . To set the input transition time
and delay relative to a clock, use the -clock option. This means the transition applies only to
external paths driven by the clock. By default, the transition time and delay are set relative to the
rising edge of the clock. To use the falling edge instead, use the -clock_fall option.
Using the -clock or -clock_fall option is meaningful only in the worst-arrival slew propagation
mode. In the worst-slew (default) mode, Timing Engine takes the worst value over all clocks
specified with the command.
Design Rules
Timing Engine checks for violations of electrical rules that are defined in the library or by Timing
Engine commands. These rules include
• Maximum limit for transition time
• Maximum and minimum limits for capacitance
• Maximum limit for fanout
To get a report on design rule violations in a design, use the report_constraint command.
Physical Design 243
Maximum Transition Time
The maximum transition time in Timing Engine is treated in a similar fashion as the slew. First
we will discuss slew in the context of thresholds and derate and extend the discussion to
maximum transition time.
A spice waveform can be represented as a floating point number in Liberty tables, which we will
illustrate with an example Figure 7-4:
• Spice waveform is measured 10-90
• Spice waveform is showing in blue line
• Spice measured transition time with slew threshold 10-90 is 10 ps
• Linearized waveform is measuring transition time with slew threshold 0-100 is 12.5 ps =
10 * (100-0) / (90-10)
• Representation as single float with slew threshold 30-70 is 5 ps = 12.5 * (70-30) / (100-0)
The spice waveform can thus be represented as a floating point number in Liberty tables or in
Timing Engine report as follows:
• A -> 10 ps slew threshold as 10-90 with slew derate 1.0
• B -> 12.5 ps slew threshold as 10-90 with slew derate 0.8
• C -> 5 ps slew threshold as 10-90 with derate 2.0
Note that slew threshold in library are always the threshold used for spice measurement. The case
‘A’ is the native representation, measured in the Liberty. The ‘B’ and ‘C’ are rescaled to the slew
threshold 0-100 and 30-70, respectively.
Figure 7-4 Spice Waveform

Physical Design 244
Handling Slew in Multiple Threshold and Derate Environment
Liberty allows arbitrary slew threshold to minimize the error due to slew linearization for various
process technologies. Therefore whenever slew information from library interacts with another
library (or even a pin of the same library with different slew threshold), a conversion to common
base is required.
Conversion of single-float slews between thresholds and derates:
Assume that you have a library L1 with thresholds TL1-TH1, derate SD1, and L2 with TL2-TH2,
derate SD2. Note that the L1, L2 are just entities that have their own local thresholds, such as
library, design, library pin.
Assume S1 - slew in local thresholds and derate of L1, S2 - slew in local thresholds and derate of
L2. Same conversion rule will apply if we considered maximum transition instead of slews.
Then we can obtain slews expressed in the local thresholds and derate of the other object as
follows:
Equivalent slew S2_1 which is slew S2 expressed in local derate/threshold of L1:
S2_1 = S2 * (SD2 / (TH2 - TL2)) * ((TH1 - TL1)/ SD1)
The meaning of S2_1 is a float number that represents a waveform of slew S2 but measured in the
context of L1. The S1 and S2_1 can be directly compared. The S1 and S2 cannot.
Note that in presence of detailed RC, slew is computed appropriately in the context of threshold
and derate.
Physical Design 245
Next we will discuss the how max transition constraint is handled in the context of thresholds and
derate.
Maximum Transition Constraint Storage
Max transition constraint can come from user, library and library pin. User max transition
constraint is expressed with main library derate and slew threshold of Timing Engine.
The set_max_transition command sets a maximum limit on transition time for the nets attached to
specified ports, for a whole design, or for pins within a specified clock domain. The
set_max_transition command places the max_transition attribute (a design rule constraint) on the
specified objects. Setting a maximum transition limit on a port applies to the net connected to that
port. Setting the limit on a design sets the default maximum transition time for all nets in the
design. Setting the limit on a clock domain applies to all pins within that clock domain. Within a
clock domain, you can optionally restrict the constraint further to clock paths or data paths only,
and to rising or falling transitions only. Where there is a conflict between design, port, or clock
constraints, the most restrictive constraint (the smaller value) applies. This is also true where
multiple clocks launch the same path. In Timing Engine the slews and max transition constraint
attributes are reported in local threshold and derate of each pin or library. For example, maximum
transition time set in the context of design threshold and derate will be scaled to that of the design
pin's threshold and derate. The scaling of transition time for slew threshold is on by default.
The following table describes the conversion of slews between different slew threshold and
derates:
Table 7-3 Conversion of Slews
Main
Local Cell Instance
Object Library Library Pin Design
Library pin
(L1)
The more local

Yes for slew Uses main trip points have
Threshold
threshold. library derate higher
and Derate Yes Yes
Inherits derate and slew precedence that
Source
of the library threshold the more
general ones
Yes - in main The most

Limit (max
Yes Yes Yes lib threshold restrictive limit
transition)
and derate applies
Uses main
20/80 40/60 30/70 30/70 (rise/fall)
Thresholds library
(rise/fall) (rise/fall) (rise/fall)
threshold
0.5 0.6 (defined) 0.6 (inherited) 0.5 (inherited)

Derate 0.6 (inherited)
(defined)
Example
Physical Design 246
Timing
Engine or
Liberty value 10 ps 10 ps 10 ps 10 ps 10 ps
(slew or
limit)
Linearized
spice
waveform:
(rise) Similar
for fall
Expressed in
10 * (0.6 / 10 * (0.6 /
derate and 10 * 0.5 / (0.8 10 * 0.6 / (0.7 –
(0.6 – 0.4)) * (0.7 – 0.3)) *
threshold of 10 ps – 0.2) * ((0.8 – 0.3) * ((0.8 –
( (0.8 – ((0.8 – 0.2)/ /
the main 0.2) / 0.5) 0.2) / 0.5)
0.2)/0.5) 0.5)
library
Timing
Engine or
Liberty value 10 ps - - - -
(slew or
limit):
Main lib limit

expressed in 10 * (0.5/(0.8 10 * (0.5/(0.8 10*(0.5/((0.8 – 10 * (0.5/(0.8 –
local 10 ps -.02)) * ((.6 - – 0.2)) * ((0.7 0.2)) * ((0.8 – 0.2)) * ((0.7 –
threshold and .4)/.6) – 0.3) / 0.6) 0.2)/0.5) 0.3)/0.6)
derate
Evaluation of Max Transition Constraint
To see the maximum transition constraint evaluations, use the report_constraint -max_transition
command. Timing Engine reports all constraints and slews in threshold and derate of the pin of
cell instance and the violations are sorted based on the absolute values (that is, they are not
expressed in that of design threshold and derate).
To see the port maximum transition limit, use the report_port -design_rule command. To see the
default maximum transition setting for the current design, use the report_design command. To
undo maximum transition limits previously set on ports, designs, or clocks, use
remove_max_transition.
Example 1
To set a maximum transition limit of 2.0 units on the ports of OUT*, enter:
set_max_transition 2.0 [get_ports "OUT*"]

Physical Design 247
To set the default maximum transition limit of 5.0 units on the current design, enter:
set_max_transition 5.0 [current_design]
To set the maximum transition limit of 4.0 units on all pins the CLK1 clock domain, for rising
transitions in data paths only, enter:
set_max_transition 4.0 [get_clocks CLK1] \ -type

data_path -rise
For more information, see the set_max_transition man page.
Example 2 - Scaling the Max Transition with Different Library Slew Threshold
Consider library lib1 having slew threshold 10/90. Design has max transition limit set by the user
at 0.3 ns. The main library slew threshold for rise and fall is 30/70. By using the
report_constraints -max_transition -all_violators -sig 4 command:
Required Actual
Pin Transition Transition Slack
---------------------------------------------------------
FF1/D 0.6000 0.4000 0.2000
Example 3 - Scaling the Max Transition with Slew Derate Factor Specified in Library
Library lib1 having slew derate factor 0.5 and slew threshold for rise and fall 30/70. User sets a
max transition on the design at 0.3 ns. The main library slew threshold for rise and fall is 30/70
and slew derate is 1.0. By using the report_constraints -max_transition -all_violators -sig 4
command:
Required Actual
Pin Transition Transition Slack
----------------------------------------------------------
FF1/D 0.6000 0.4000 0.2000
Minimum and Maximum Net Capacitance
The set_min_capacitance command sets a minimum capacitance limit for the nets attached to
specified ports or for the whole design. The set_min_capacitance command places the
min_capacitance attribute (a design rule constraint) on the specified objects.
Similarly, the set_max_capacitance command sets a maximum limit on total capacitance for each
net.
Setting a capacitance limit on a port applies to the net connected to that port. Setting a
capacitance limit on a design sets the default capacitance limit for all nets in the design. In case of
conflict between these two values, the more restrictive value applies.
Physical Design 248
To see the capacitance constraint evaluations, use the report_constraint -min_capacitance or -

max_capacitance command. To see port capacitance limits, use the report_port -design_rule
command. To see the default capacitance settings for the current design, use the report_design
command.
To undo capacitance limits you set on ports or designs, use remove_min_capacitance and
remove_max_capacitance.
Examples
To set a minimum capacitance limit of 0.2 units on the ports of OUT*, enter
set_min_capacitance 0.2 [get_ports "OUT*"]
To set the default minimum capacitance limit of 0.1 units on the current design, enter
set_min_capacitance 0.1 [current_design]
For more information, see the Design Compiler Reference Manual: Constraints and Timing.
Maximum Fanout Load
The set_max_fanout command sets a maximum fanout load for specified output ports or designs.
The command sets the max_fanout attribute (a design rule constraint) on the specified objects.
Setting a maximum fanout load on a port applies to the net connected to that port. Setting a
maximum fanout load on a design sets the default maximum for all nets in the design. In case of
conflict between these two values, the more restrictive value applies.
Library cell pins can have a max_fanout value specified. Timing Engine uses the more restrictive
of the limit you set or the limit specified in the library.
To see maximum fanout constraint evaluations, use the report_constraint -max_fanout command.
To see port maximum fanout limits, use the report_port -design_rule command. To see the default
maximum fanout setting for the current design, use the report_design command.
To undo maximum fanout limits you set on ports or designs, use the remove_max_fanout
command.
Examples
To set a maximum fanout limit of 2.0 units on the ports IN*, enter
set_max_fanout 2.0 [get_ports "IN*"]
To set the default maximum fanout limit of 5.0 units on the current design, enter
set_max_fanout 5.0 [current_design]

Physical Design 249
Fanout Load Values for Output Ports
The fanout load for a net is the sum of fanout_load attributes for the input pins and output ports
connected to the net. Output pins can have maximum fanout limits, specified in the library or set
through the set_max_fanout command. By default, ports are considered to have a fanout load of
0.0.
The set_fanout_load command specifies the expected fanout load for output ports in the current
design.
Example
To set the fanout load on ports matching OUT* to 3.0, enter
set_fanout_load 3.0 "OUT*"
For more information, see the Design Compiler Reference Manual: Constraints and Timing.
Timing Exceptions
By default, Timing Engine assumes that data launched at a path startpoint ought to be captured at
the path endpoint by the very next occurrence of a clock edge at the endpoint. For paths that are
not intended to operate in this manner, you need to specify a timing exception. Otherwise, the
timing analysis will not match the behavior of the real circuit.
This chapter covers the following timing exception topics:
• Timing Exception Overview

• Single-Cycle (Default) Path Delay Constraints
• Setting False Paths
• Setting Maximum and Minimum Path Delays
• Setting Multicycle Paths
• Specifying Exceptions Efficiently
• Exception Order of Precedence
• Reporting Exceptions
• Checking Ignored Exceptions
• Removing Exceptions
• Transforming Exceptions
Timing Exception Overview
Timing Engine supports the following ways to specify timing exceptions:

Physical Design 250
• Setting false paths. Use the set_false_path command to specify a logic path that exists in
the design but should not be analyzed. Setting a false path removes the timing constraints
on the path.
• Setting minimum and maximum path delay values. Use the set_max_delay and
set_min_delay commands to override the default setup and hold constraints with specific
maximum and minimum time values.
• Setting multicycle paths. Use the set_multicycle_path command to specify the number of
clock cycles required to propagate data from the start to the end of the path.
Each timing exception command can apply to a single path or to a group of related paths, such as
all paths from one clock domain to another, or all paths that pass through a specified point in the
design.
When you specify a path by its startpoint and endpoint, be sure to specify a timing path that is
valid in Timing Engine. A path startpoint must be either a register clock pin or an input port. A
path endpoint must be either a register data input pin or an output port.
To view a list of timing exceptions that have been applied to a design, use the report_exceptions
command. To restore the default timing constraints on a path, use the reset_path command.
Single-Cycle (Default) Path Delay Constraints
To determine whether you need to set a timing exception, you need to understand how Timing
Engine calculates maximum and minimum delay times for paths, and how this calculation is like
(or is not like) the operation of the design being analyzed.
Path Delay for Flip-Flops Using a Single Clock
Figure 8-1 shows how Timing Engine determines the setup and hold constraints for a path that
begins and ends on rising-edge-triggered flip-flops. In this simple example, the two flip-flops are
triggered by the same clock. The clock period is 10 ns.
Timing Engine performs a setup check to verify that the data launched from FF1 at time=0
arrives at the D input of FF2 in time for the capture edge at time=10. If the data takes too long to
arrive, it is reported as a setup violation.
Figure 8-1 Single-Cycle Setup and Hold for Flip-Flops

Physical Design 251
Similarly, Timing Engine performs a hold check to verify that the data launched from FF1 at time
0 does not get propagated so soon that it gets captured at FF2 at the clock edge at time 0. If the
data arrives too soon, it is reported as a hold violation.
The setup and hold requirements determined by Timing Engine for sequential elements take into
account all relevant parameters such as the delay of the combinational logic elements in the path,
the setup and hold requirements of the flip-flop elements as defined in the technology library, and
the net delays between the flip-flops.
Path Delay for Flip-Flops Using Different Clocks
The algorithm for calculating path delays is more complicated when the launch and capture flip-
flops belong to different clock domains.
Consider the circuit shown in Figure 8-2. The flip-flops at the beginning and end of the timing
path are clocked by different clocks, CLK1 and CLK2. The two clocks are declared by the
create_clock commands shown in the figure.
Figure 8-2 Setup Constraints for Flip-Flops With Different Clocks

Physical Design 252
By default, Timing Engine assumes that the two clocks are synchronous to each other, with a
fixed phase relationship. If this is not the case for the real circuit (for example, because the two
clocks are never active at the same time or because they operate asynchronously), then you need
to declare this fact by using any of several methods. Otherwise, Timing Engine will spend time
checking constraints and reporting violations that do not exist in the actual circuit.
Setup Analysis
Timing Engine looks at the relationship between the active clock edges over a full repeating
cycle, equal to the least common multiple of the two clock periods. For each capture (latch) edge
at the destination flip-flop, Timing Engine assumes that the corresponding launch edge is the
nearest source clock edge occurring before the capture edge
In Figure 8-2, there are two capture edges in the period under consideration. For the capture edge
at time=5, the nearest preceding launch edge is at time=0. The corresponding setup relationship is
labeled Setup 1.
For the capture edge at time=30, the nearest preceding launch edge is at time=20. This setup
relationship is labeled Setup 2. The source clock edge at time=30 occurs at the same time as the
capture edge, not earlier, so it is not considered the corresponding launch edge.
Setup 1 allows less time between launch and capture, so it is the more restrictive constraint. It
determines the maximum allowed delay for the path, which is 5 ns for this example.
Physical Design 253
Hold Analysis
The hold relationships checked by Timing Engine are based on the clock edges adjacent to those
used to determine the setup relationships. To determine the most restrictive hold relationship,
Timing Engine considers all valid setup relationships, including both Setup 1 and Setup 2 in
Figure 8-2.
For each setup relationship, Timing Engine performs two different hold checks:
• The data launched by the setup launch edge must not be captured by the previous capture
edge.
• The data launched by the next launch edge must not be captured by the setup capture
edge.
Figure 8-3 shows the hold checks performed by Timing Engine for the current example. First
consider the setup relationship labeled Setup 2. Timing Engine confirms that the data launched by
the setup launch edge is not captured by the previous capture edge; this relationship is labeled
Hold 2a. It also confirms that the data launched by the next clock edge at the source is not
captured by the setup capture edge; this relationship is labeled Hold 2b.
Timing Engine similarly checks the hold relationships relative to the clock edges of Setup 1, as
indicated in the figure. The most restrictive hold check is the one where the capture edge occurs
latest relative to the launch edge, which is Hold 2b in this example. Therefore, Hold 2b
determines the minimum allowed delay for this path, 0 ns.
Single-Cycle Path Analysis Examples
The following examples further illustrate how Timing Engine calculates the delay requirements
for edge-triggered flip-flops in the absence of timing exceptions.
Figure 8-3 Hold Constraints for Flip-Flops With Different Clocks

Physical Design 254
In Figure 8-4, CLK1 has a period of 20 ns and CLK2 has a period of 10 ns. The most restrictive
setup relationship is the launch edge at time=0 to the capture edge at time=10. The most
restrictive hold relationship is the launch edge at time=0 to the capture edge at time=0
In Figure 8-5, CLK1 has a period of 4 ns and CLK2 has a period of 3 ns. The most restrictive
setup relationship is the launch edge at time=3 to the capture edge at time=4. The most restrictive
hold relationship is the launch edge at time=7 to the capture edge at time=7, based on the setup
relationship shown by the dashed-line arrow in the timing diagram.
Figure 8-4 Delay Requirements With 20ns/10ns Clocks

Physical Design 255
Figure 8-5 Delay Requirements With 4ns/3ns Clocks

Physical Design 256
Setting False Paths
A false path is a logic path in the design that exists but should not be analyzed for timing. For
example, a path can exist between two multiplexed logic blocks that are never selected at the
same time, so that path is not valid for timing analysis.
For example, to declare a false path from pin FFB1/CP to pin FFB2/D:
set_false_path -from [get_pins FFB1/CP] -to [get_pins FFB2/D]
Declaring a path to be false removes all timing constraints from the path. Timing Engine still
calculates the path delay, but does not report it to be an error, no matter how long or short the
delay.
Setting a false path is a point-to-point timing exception. This is different from using the
set_disable_timing command, which disables timing analysis for a specified pin, cell, or port.
Using the set_disable_timing command removes the affected objects from timing analysis, rather
than simply removing the timing constraints from the paths. If all paths through a pin are false,
using set_disable_timing [get_pins pin_name] is more efficient than using set_false_path -
through [get_pins pin_name] .
Another example of a false path is a path between flip-flops belonging to two clock domains that
are asynchronous with respect to each other.
To declare all paths between two clock domains to be false, you can use a set of two commands
such as the following:
set_false_path -from [get_clocks ck1] -to [get_clocks ck2]

set_false_path -from [get_clocks ck2] -to [get_clocks ck1]
For efficiency, be sure to specify each clock by its clock name, not by the pin name (use
get_clocks, not get_pins).
An alternative is to use the set_clock_groups command to exclude paths from consideration that
are launched by one clock and captured by another. Although this has the same effect as declaring
a false path between the two clocks, it is not considered a timing exception and is not reported by
the report_exceptions command.
Timing Engine has the ability to detect the presence of certain types of false paths in the design
when you use case analysis. To do this, use the report_timing command with the -justify option.
For more information, see the section Timing Engine User Guide: Advanced Timing Analysis
manual.
Setting Maximum and Minimum Path Delays
By default, Timing Engine calculates the maximum and minimum path delays by considering the
clock edge times. To override the default maximum or minimum time with your own specific
time value, use the set_max_delay or set_min_delay command.
Physical Design 257
For example, to set the maximum path delay between registers REGA and REGB to 12, use the
following command:
set_max_delay 12 -from [get_cells REGA] -to [get_cells REGB]
With this timing exception, Timing Engine ignores the clock relationships. A path delay between
these registers that exceeds 12 time units minus the setup requirement of the endpoint register is
reported as a timing violation.
Similarly, to set the minimum path delay between registers REGA and REGB to 2, use the
following command:
set_min_delay 2.0 -from [get_cells REGA] -to [get_cells REGB]
Again, Timing Engine ignores the clock relationships. A path delay between these registers that is
less than 2 time units plus the hold requirement of the endpoint register is reported as a timing
violation.
You can optionally specify that the delay value apply only to rising edges or only to falling edges
at the endpoint.
Setting Multicycle Paths
The set_multicycle_path command specifies the number of clock cycles required to propagate
data from the start of a path to the end of the path. Timing Engine calculates the setup or hold
constraint according to the specified number of cycles.
For example, consider the circuit shown in Figure 8-6. The path from FF4 to FF5 is designed to
take two clock cycles rather than one. However, by default, Timing Engine assumes single-cycle
timing for all paths. Therefore, you need to specify a timing exception for this path.
Figure 8-6 Multicycle Path Example

Physical Design 258
One timing exception method is to specify an explicit maximum delay value with the
set_max_delay command. However, you might want to use set_multicycle_path instead because
the maximum delay value is automatically adjusted when you change the clock period.
To set the multicycle path for the design shown in Figure 8-6, you can use the following
command:
set_multicycle_path -setup 2 -from [get_cells FF4] -to [get_cells FF5]
The first command tells Timing Engine that the path takes two clock cycles rather than one,
establishing the new setup relationship shown in Figure 8-7. The second capture edge (rather than
the first) following the launch edge becomes the applicable edge for the end of the path.
Figure 8-7 Multicycle Path Setup

Physical Design 259
Figure 8-8 Multicycle Path Hold Based on New Setup
The hold relationship shown in Figure 8-8 is probably not the correct relationship for the design.
If FF4 does not need to hold the data beyond the first clock edge, you need to specify another
timing exception.
Although you could use the set_min_delay command to specify a particular hold time, it is better
to use another set_multicycle_path command to move the capture edge for the hold relationship
backward by one clock cycle. For example:

set_min_delay 0 -from [get_cells FF4] -to [get_cells FF5]
or preferably:

set_multicycle_path -hold 1 -from [get_cells FF4] -to [get_cells FF5]
Physical Design 260
Figure 8-9 shows the setup and hold relationships set correctly with two set_multicycle_path
commands. The second set_multicycle_path command moves the capture edge of the hold
relationship backward by one clock cycle, from the dashed-line arrow to the solid-line arrow.
Figure 8-9 Multicycle Path Hold Set Correctly
With set_multicycle_path -setup 5 , the setup relationship spans five clock cycles rather than one,
from time=0 to time=50, as shown by the long solid-line arrow. This implicitly changes the hold
relationship to the prior capture edge at time=40, as shown by the long dashed-line arrow.
To move the capture edge for the hold relationship back to time=0, you need to use
set_multicycle_path -hold 4 to move the capture edge back by four clock cycles .
To summarize, Timing Engine determines the number of hold cycles as follows:
(hold cycles) = (setup option value) – 1 – (hold option value)
By default, hold cycles = 1 – 1 – 0 = 0.
For Figure 8-9, hold cycles = 2 – 1 – 1 = 0.
For Figure 8-10, hold cycles = 5 – 1 – 4 = 0.
You can optionally specify that the multicycle path exception apply only to rising edges or only
with falling edges at the path endpoint. If the startpoint and endpoint are clocked by different
clocks, you can specify which of the two clocks is considered for adjusting the number of clock
cycles for the path.
Figure 8-10 Multicycle Path Taking Five Clock Cycles

Physical Design 261
Specifying Exceptions Efficiently
In many cases, you can specify the exception paths many different ways. Choosing an efficient
method can reduce the analysis runtime.
For example, consider the circuit shown in Figure 8-11. The three 16-bit registers are clocked by
three different clocks. Each register represents 16 flip-flops. Register REG2 is only used for test
purposes, so all paths from REG2 to REG3 are false paths during normal operation of the circuit.
Figure 8-11 Multiplexed Register Paths

Physical Design 262
To prevent analysis of timing from REG2 to REG3, you can use any of the following methods:
• Use case analysis to consider the case when the test enable signal is 0
• Set an exclusive relationship between the CLK1 and CLK2 clock domains.
• Declare the paths between clock domains CLK2 and CLK3 to be false.
set_false_path -from [get_clocks CLK2] -to [get_clocks CLK3]
This method is an efficient way to specify the false paths because Timing Engine only needs to
keep track of the specified clock domains. It does not have to keep track of exceptions on
registers, pins, nets, and so on.
• Declare the 16 individual paths from REG2 to REG3 to be false.

set_false_path -from [get_pins REG2[0]/CP] -to [get_pins REG3[0]/D]
set_false_path -from [get_pins REG2[1]/CP] -to [get_pins REG3[1]/D]
This method is less efficient because Timing Engine must keep track of timing exceptions for 16
different paths.
• Declare all paths from REG2 to REG3 to be false.

set_false_path -from [get_pins REG2[*]/CP] -to [get_pins REG3[*]/D]
This method is even less efficient because Timing Engine must keep track of paths from each
clock pin of REG2 to each data pin of REG3, a total of 256 paths.
• Declare all paths from REG2 to be false.

set_false_path -from [get_pins REG2[*]/CP]
This method is similar to the previous one. Timing Engine must keep track of all paths
originating from each clock pin of REG2, a total of 256 paths.
Physical Design 263
In summary, look at the root cause that is making the exceptions necessary and find the simplest
way to control the timing analysis for the affected paths. Before using false paths, consider using
case analysis (set_case_analysis), declaring an exclusive relationship between clocks
(set_clock_groups), or disabling analysis of part of the design (set_disable_timing). These
alternatives can be more efficient than using set_false_path.
If you must set false paths, avoid specifying a large number of paths using the -through argument,
by using wildcards, or by listing the paths one at a time. After you set false paths and other timing
exceptions, you might be able to simplify the set of exception-setting commands by using the
transform_exceptions command
Exception Order of Precedence
If different timing exception commands are in conflict for a particular path, the exception Timing
Engine uses for that path depends on the exception types or the path specification methods used
in the conflicting commands. A set of rules establishes the order of priority for different
exception-setting situations.
Note that Timing Engine applies the exception precedence rules independently on each path (not
each command). For example, suppose that you use the following commands:
set_max_delay -from A 5.1

set_false_path -to B
The set_false_path command has priority over the set_max_delay command, so any paths that
begin at A and end at B are false paths. However, the set_max_delay command still applies to
paths that begin at A but do not end at B.
Exception Type Priority
The following pairs of timing exception types are not considered to be in conflict, so both settings
can be valid for a path:
• Two set_false_path settings
• set_min_delay and set_max_delay settings
• set_multicycle_path -setup and -hold settings
In case of conflicting exceptions for a particular path, the timing exception types have the
following order of priority, from highest to lowest:
1. set_false_path
2. set_max_delay and set_min_delay
3. set_multicycle_path
Physical Design 264
For example, if you declare a path to be false and also set its maximum delay to some value, the
false path declaration has priority. The maximum delay setting is ignored. You can list ignored
timing exceptions by using report_exceptions -ignored .
Path Specification Priority
If you apply the same type of timing exception using commands with different path
specifications, the more specific command has priority over the more general one. For example:
set_max_delay 12 -from [get_clocks CLK1]
set_max_delay 15 -from [get_clocks CLK1] \

-to [get_clocks CLK2]
The first command sets the maximum delay of all paths starting from CLK1. However, the
second command is more specific, so it overrides the first command for paths starting at CLK1
and ending at CLK2. The remaining paths starting from CLK1 are still controlled by the first
command.
The various -from/-to path specification methods have the following order of priority, from
highest to lowest:
1. -from pin, -rise_from pin, -fall_from pin
2. -to pin, -rise_to pin, -fall_to pin
3. -through, -rise_through, -fall_through
4. -from clock, -rise_from clock, -fall_from clock
5. -to clock, -rise_to clock, -fall_to clock
Use the preceding list to determine which of two conflicting timing exception commands has
priority (for example, two set_max_delay commands). Starting from the top of the list:
1. A command containing -from pin, -rise_from pin, or -fall_from pin has priority
over a command that does not contain -from pin, -rise_from pin, or -fall_from
pin .
2. A command containing -to pin, -rise_to pin, or -fall_to pin has priority over a
command that does not contain -to pin, -rise_to pin, or -fall_to pin .
... and so on down the list until the priority is resolved.
Here are some possible path specification combinations, listed in order of priority from highest to
lowest, according to the preceding priority rules:
Physical Design 265
1. -from pin -to pin
2. -from pin -to clock
3. -from pin
4. -from clock -to pin
5. -to pin
6. -from clock -to clock
7. -from clock
8. -to clock
Reporting Exceptions
To get a report on timing exceptions that have been set, use the report_exceptions command. You
can reduce the scope of the report by using the path specification arguments -from , -to , -through ,
-rise_from , -fall_to , and so on, to match the path specifiers used when the original exceptions
were created.
The report_exceptions command causes a complete timing update, so be sure to use it only after
you have set up all timing assertions and you are ready to receive the report.
Exception-setting commands are sometimes partially or fully ignored for a number of reasons.
For example, a command that specifies a broad range of paths can be partially overridden by
another exception-setting command that specifies a subset of those paths. For a partially ignored
command, the exception report shows the reason that some part of the command is being ignored.
By default, a command that is fully ignored is not reported by the report_exceptions command.
To get a report on just the commands that are fully ignored, use the -ignored option with the
report_exceptions command.
Consider the simple design shown in Figure 8-12 and the following exception-setting and
exception-reporting commands.
Figure 8-12 Design to Demonstrate Ignored Exceptions

Physical Design 266
set_false_path -from A -to D

set_multicycle_path 2 -from A -to D
set_multicycle_path 2 -from {A B C} -to D
report_exceptions
...
Reasons:
f - invalid startpoint(s)
t - invalid endpoint(s)
p - non-existent paths
o - overridden paths
From To Setup Hold Ignored

--------------------------------------------------
A D FALSE FALSE
{ABC} D 2 * f,o
report_exceptions -ignored
...
From To Setup Hold Ignored
--------------------------------------------------
A D 2 * o
The first exception-setting command sets a false path from port A to port D. This is the highest-
priority command, so it is fully enforced by Timing Engine.
The second exception-setting command attempts to set a multicycle path from port A to port D. It
is fully ignored because it is overridden by the higher-priority false path command. Because this
command is fully ignored, it is reported only when you use the -ignored option of the
report_exceptions command. In the report, the letter code “o” in the “Ignored” column shows the
reason the command is being ignored.
The third exception-setting command attempts to set multicycle paths from ports A to D, B to D,
and C to D. It is partially valid (not fully ignored), so it is reported by the report_exceptions
command without the -ignored option. The path from A to D is ignored because it is overridden
by the false path command. The path from B to D is valid, so that multicycle path is enforced by
Timing Engine. The path from C to D is invalid because port C is not a valid startpoint for a path.
In the report, the letter codes in the “Ignored” column indicate the reasons that some of the paths
specified in the command are being ignored.
Physical Design 267
Checking Ignored Exceptions
A timing exception entered by the user but not accepted by Timing Engine is called an ignored
exception. There are several reasons an exception can be ignored:
• The specified startpoint or endpoint is not valid. The startpoint must be a register clock pin
or input port. The endpoint must be a register data input pin or output port.
• The specified path is not constrained (for example, the startpoint is an input port with no
input delay set, or the capture flip-flop at the endpoint is not clocked by a defined clock
signal).
• The path is invalid because of set_disable_timing , constant propagation, loop breaking, or

case analysis.
• The exception has a lower priority than another exception applied to the same path.
The report_exceptions command reports exceptions that are fully and partially valid. To get a
report on all fully ignored exceptions, use report_exceptions -ignored . It is a good idea to
examine these reports to confirm that you have specified all exceptions correctly.
If ignored exceptions are reported, you should determine the cause and correct them by changing
the path specifications or removing the exception-setting commands. Large numbers of ignored
exceptions can increase memory usage and analysis runtime.
If the reason that an exception is partially or fully ignored is not immediately apparent, check the
reasons listed in the “Ignored” column of the exception report and consider the possible causes
listed above. It might be helpful to get more information using the following commands:
transform_exceptions -dry_run
report_exceptions -ignored
To find out if there is a logical path between two points, use:
all_fanout -from point_a -endpoints_only

all_fanin -to point_b -startpoints_only
After a timing update, to examine the path timing, you can use:
report_timing -from point_a -to point_b
To convert the current set of exception-setting commands to a simpler, equivalent set of

commands, use the transform_exceptions command.
For an example of a report on ignored exceptions, see Figure 8-12.

Physical Design 268
Removing Exceptions
To remove a timing exception previously set with set_false_path , set_max_delay , set_min_delay ,

or set_multicycle_path , use the reset_path command.
You control the scope of exception removal in the reset_path command by specifying -from , -to ,
-through , -rise_from , -fall_to , and so on. The path specification and object (such as pin, port, or
clock) must match the original path specification and object used to set the exception. Otherwise,
the reset_path command will have no effect. For example:
set_false_path -from [get_clocks CLK]

reset_path -from [get_pins ff1/CP] # ff1 clocked
by CLK
set_false_path -through [get_pins {d/Z g/Z}]

reset_path -through [get_pins a/Z] # where a fans
out to d
In each of these two examples, the object in the reset_path command does not match the original
object, so the paths are not reset, even though they might have exceptions applied.
You can use the -reset_path option in an exception-setting command to reset all of the exceptions
set on a path before the new exception is applied. For example:
set_false_path -through [get_pins d/Z] -reset_path
This example first resets all timing exceptions previously applied to the paths through the
specified point, then applies the false path exception to these paths.
To remove all exceptions from the design, you can use the reset_design command, which
removes all user-specified clocks, path groups, exceptions, and attributes (except those defined
with set_attribute ).
Transforming Exceptions
Exceptions set by the user are sometimes partially or completely ignored for various reasons.
Multiple exception-setting commands with overlapping path specifications can make it difficult
to understand the scope of each command.
To gain a better understanding of these exceptions, you can use the report_exceptions command.
The generated report indicates the reasons that paths were ignored for each exception-setting
command, based on the exceptions originally entered by the user. However, the report does not
always make it clear what exceptions apply to a particular path.
The transform_exceptions command has the ability to transform the current set of exceptions into
a new, simpler set of equivalent exception-setting commands. The command can be used to get
information about the exceptions that apply to a particular path or group of related paths, or to
Physical Design 269
transform a complex set of exception-setting commands into a simpler, equivalent set of

commands.
The simple design and exception-setting commands shown in Figure 8-13 demonstrate some of
the principles of exception transformation.
Figure 8-13 Design to Demonstrate Transformed Exceptions
The false path through u1/Z sets the two false paths shown in the figure, starting at ports A and B
and both ending at port D.
The set_multicycle_path 2 command specifies two paths that start at port A and end at port D:
one through u0 and the other through u1. However, the path through u1 is overridden by the
set_false_path command, which has a higher priority.
The set_multicycle_path 3 command specifies two paths: one starting at port B and the other
starting at port C, with both ending at port D. However, the path starting at port B is overridden
by the set_false_path command.
There are many ways you could specify this same set of exceptions. For example, you could
simplify the last command as follows:
set_multicycle_path 3 \
-from [get_ports C] -to [get_ports D]
After you set the exceptions on a design, you can use the transform_exceptions command to
automatically eliminate invalid, redundant, and overridden exceptions and find a simpler,
Physical Design 270
equivalent set of commands. You can then write out the new set of commands with write_sdc or
write_script. A simpler set of commands is easier to understand and is easier for back-end tools to
use. To write out just the exception-setting commands (without the other timing context
commands), use -include {exceptions} in the write_sdc or write_script command.
By default, transform_exceptions transforms all exceptions throughout the design. For example,
using the command on the design shown in Figure 8-13 gives the following results:
transform_exceptions
...
Transformations Summary false multicycle delay Total
----------------------------------------------------------
non-existent paths 0 1 0 1
----------------------------------------------------------
Total transformations 5
Exceptions Summary false multicycle delay Total

----------------------------------------------------------
Modified 0 1 0 1
Analyzed 1 2 0 3
To restrict the scope of the design on which the command operates, you can use the options -
from, -through, -to, -rise_from , and so on. In that case, Timing Engine only transforms exception
commands that operate on at least one of the specified paths.
To generate a transformation report without actually performing the transformation, use the -
dry_run option. The generated report can help you understand why certain paths are being
ignored in the original exception-setting commands.
Exception transformation depends on the design context as well as the set of exception-setting
commands that have been used. If you change the design, the transformed exceptions might not
be equivalent to the original exceptions. To keep a record of the current set of exception-setting
commands, use write_sdc or write_script before doing the transformation.
Exception Removal
A major effect of exception transformation is the removal of invalid, redundant, and overridden
paths from the original exception-setting commands. To find out the reasons that paths are being
eliminated, use the -verbose option in the transform_exceptions command. For example:
transform_exceptions -verbose
...
From Through To Setup Hold
----------------------------------------------------------
* u1/Z * FALSE FALSE
A * D cycles=2 cycles=0
{BC} u2/C D cycles=3 cycles=0

Physical Design 271
NON_EXISTENT_PATH
-from B
-through u2/C
-to D
...
Each time Timing Engine eliminates paths from the exception-setting commands, it reports one of
the following reasons:
• Non-existent path: The path does not exist in the design or has been disabled (for
example, by set_disable_timing, set_false_path, or case analysis).
• Overridden: The exception applied to the path is overridden by another exception

of higher priority.
• Invalid startpoint: The path startpoint is not a primary input or a clock pin of a
sequential element.
• Invalid endpoint: The path endpoint is not a primary output or a data input pin of
a sequential element.
• Unconstrained path: The path is not constrained (for example, a primary input
with no input delay specified).
• Clock network path: The path is part of a clock network, which by default is
unconstrained.
• Single-cycle MCP: The exception is a multicycle path with the number of cycles
set to the default value (1 for a setup check or 0 for a hold check).
• Mode analysis: The path has been invalidated by mode analysis (for example, a
path that involves writing to RAM with the RAM module set to read mode).
• Exclusive domains: The path crosses between clock domains that have been
defined to be exclusive by the set_clock_groups command.
By default, transform_exceptions removes exceptions for all of the reasons listed above. To
selectively restrict exception removal to certain reasons, use the -remove_ignored option and
specify the types of ignored exceptions to remove. For example:
transform_exceptions -remove_ignored overridden
These are the possible settings for the -remove_ignored option:
• invalid_specifiers : paths specified with an invalid startpoint or endpoint, single-

cycle multicycle paths
Physical Design 272
• no_path : paths that do not exist or are inactive due to case analysis,
set_disable_timing, or other reasons
• overridden : paths overridden by other exceptions or mode analysis; and paths

between exclusive clock domains
• clock_path : clock network paths
• unconstrained_path : paths that are not constrained
Exception Flattening
The transform_exceptions command performs flattening when you use the -flatten option.
Flattening separates multiple -from, -through, or -to objects in a single command into multiple
commands. For example:
set_false_path -through {u0/Z u1/Z}

transform_exceptions -flatten
...
write_script -include {exceptions}
The script written by the write_script command contains the result of flattening the original
commands:
set_false_path -through [get_pins {u0/Z}]

set_false_path -through [get_pins {u1/Z}]
The single set_false_path command is flattened into two commands by separating the two -
through objects.
19. Multi-Voltage Designs
The multivoltage design steps are

• Insert buffer-type level shifters.
• Create voltage areas and associate or align the logic hierarchies
• Perform placement in the voltage areas
• Optimize the design
Physical Design 273
Using Buffer-Type Level Shifters

General Properties of Buffer-Type Level Shifters. buffer-type level-shifter cell is modeled as a
buffer with the following properties:
• Two power supplies: a master (or primary) supply and a secondary supply
Input and output pin voltages that are different
• PVT operating conditions set on the output side of the cell (otherwise, tool creates new
operating conditions under-the-hood that are not written out and passed to the rest of the
flow)
Buffer-type level shifters are used to connect drive and load pins operating at significantly
different voltages. The following commands are used to manage the level shifters in your design:
• Check level shifters – Checks the design for existing level shifters, including enable-type
level shifters
• Insert level shifters – Inserts only buffer-type level shifters to accommodate voltage
mismatches on nets, according to level shifter strategy and threshold settings.
• Level shifter threshold – Sets the minimum allowed voltage difference between a source
and sink, beyond which voltage differences are adjusted by insertion of level shifters. (0
threshold voltage difference and 0 percentage difference).
Both voltage step-up and voltage step-down buffer-type level shifters are used. For example, in
the case where design blocks are working on two different voltage rails, at least two types of level
shifters are required:
(i) shifts the level mismatch from the lower voltage to the higher voltage (step-up).
(ii) shifts from the higher voltage to the lower voltage (step-down).
Buffer-Type Level-Shifter Insertion Flow
The flow has the following steps:
1. Check design for buffer-type level shifters and level-shifter violations

2. Insert buffer-type level shifters
3. Import voltage area information from Tool create the voltage areas in Physical Compiler
and associate logic modules with the voltage areas.
4. Place cells and level shifters (both types), and optimize the design
These steps are described in greater detail in the following sections.
Optionally Setting Buffer-Type Level-Shifter Strategy
If you do not explicitly set a level-shifter strategy before inserting or checking buffer-type level
shifters, the default strategy is -all, which allows the use of both step-up and step-down buffer-
type level shifters.
Physical Design 274
Level-Shifter Threshold
Determining Level-Shifter Threshold
Determine level-shifter thresholds if the target library cells have the following attributes (usually
described by equations involving the rail voltages, for example, VDD1+0.5):
• Vih – Lowest input voltage for logic 1

• Vil – Highest input voltage for logic 0
• Vimax – Maximum input voltage for logic 1
• Vimin – Minimum input voltage for logic 0
• Voh – Lowest output voltage for logic 1
• Vol – Highest output voltage for logic 0
• Vomax – Maximum output voltage for logic 1
• Vomin – Minimum output voltage for logic 0
These voltage parameters are used to determine output and input voltage bands (ranges) for both
logic 1 and logic 0. For logic 1, the input voltage band is (Vimax-Vih) and the output voltage
band is (Vomax-Voh). Similarly, for logic 0, the input voltage band is (Vil-Vimin) and the output
voltage band is (Vol-Vomin).
Therefore, for any pair of driver and load pins, if the output voltage band of the driver pin is
completely overlapped (contained within) the input voltage band of the load pin, no level shifter
is required. This criteria holds for both logic 1 and logic 0.
Conversely, a sufficient voltage difference between the driver and load pins exists and buffer-type
level-shifter insertion is required if any of the following conditions hold:
• Driver pin Vomax > Load pin Vimax

• Driver pin Vomin < Load pin Vimin
• Driver pin Voh < Load pin Vih
• Driver pin Vol > Load pin Vil
For any of these four conditions, the driver voltage band does not fall completely within the load
voltage band, and buffer-type level shifters are needed.
User-Specified Level-Shifter Threshold
You can explicitly specify the minimum voltage difference beyond which the voltage is to be
adjusted by use of a buffer-type level shifter.
Checking the Design for Level Shifters and Level-Shifter Violations
• Incorrect operating condition – The level shifter does not have the correct annotated
operating condition.
• Wrong level shifter – The given level shifter cannot be used to shift the voltage levels as
needed.
Physical Design 275
• Multiple fanin voltages – The fanins of the level shifter are not all at the same voltage
level.
• Multiple fanout voltages – The fanouts of the level shifter are not all at the same voltage
level.
• Not required – The level shifter is not required according to the defined strategy and/or
threshold.
All nets that cross boundary hierarchies with different operating conditions are checked for
supply voltage, level-shifter strategy, and level-shifter threshold.
Inserting Buffer-Type Level Shifters
Level shifters are inserted on nets where significant voltage differences occur between drive pins
and load pins. The voltage differences are determined either automatically by the tool or
according to voltage threshold conditions you define. Also, you can accept the default level-
shifter strategy, which allows both step-up and step-down buffer-type level shifters.
Although you can insert buffer-type level shifters at a number of points in the logic synthesis-
physical synthesis flow, it is recommended that you insert them early in the flow—preferably
before logic synthesis.
By default, level shifters are not inserted on clock nets. if you want level shifters inserted on
clock nets.
The information reported includes library name and type, level-shifter cell name, operating
condition(s), input and output voltages, process ID,temperature, and tree type. Also, the number
of inserted level shifters is reported.
In general, the buffer-type level shifters are inserted between the blocks. This is the case when the
operating voltage is set on the instance and not on any of its ports. However, if an operating
voltage different from the block operating voltage is set on a port of the block, the buffer-type
level shifter for that port is inserted inside the block.
Figure shows an example of buffer-type level-shifter insertion at both the top level for a block
port that has the default block voltage and within a block for a port that is set at the top-level
voltage.
Figure Buffer-Type Level Shifter Insertion at the Top Level and Block Level
Physical Design 276
Placing Level Shifters
Level shifters (both types) can be placed at regular sites (single-height cells) or at special sites
(multiheight cells) with multiple power rails. For regular sites, you are responsible for connecting
secondary power to the level shifters.
If special sites are needed for level shifters, these sites must be instantiated in the floor plan at
locations where these level shifters could be placed. Such sites should usually be defined along
the voltage area boundaries. They can overlap with the base site array.
Creating Voltage Areas

A voltage area is a placement area for one or more logic partitions operating at the same voltage.
The cells of the logic partition are associated with the partition’s voltage area and are constrained
to placement within that area.
A nested voltage area is a logical construct. The physical floorplan does not support physically
nested voltage areas. Therefore, for logically nested voltage areas, you must define the physical
voltage areas using disjoint rectangular and rectilinear shapes in such a way that no physical
shape is embedded within or overlapping another physical shape.
In addition, Physical Compiler checks the operating condition voltage of each module against the
voltage area specification to ensure that all modules inside the voltage area operate at the correct
voltage.
Voltage areas are specified manually or derived automatically by Physical Compiler on the basis
of row types and site types. Both rectangular and rectilinear voltage areas are allowed. Voltage
areas can consist of disjoint rectilinear and rectangular shapes, but it is recommended that you
avoid using disjoint structures – except in the case of logically nested voltage areas – because of
possible QoR impact.
Physical Design 277
The logic hierarchies are assigned to specific voltage areas when you create or update these
voltage areas. Care must be taken to align the hierarchies correctly.
Physical Compiler derives a default voltage area for placement of cells not assigned to other
voltage areas. The default voltage area can contain top-level leaf cells and buffer-type level
shifters, as well as the blocks.
Level shifters and isolation cells can have site heights that differ from the standard cell site height
by either integer multiples or noninteger multiples. Physical Compiler supports the placement of
both types. Note that you need to define appropriate site arrays for these nonstandard cell heights.
In this design, the floorplan has four voltage areas: Ra, Rb, Rc, and Rd. The default voltage area
is Rd. Each voltage area has a corresponding logic partition, A, B, C, or D, that aligns with its
respective voltage areas. A hard bound can be defined inside a voltage area, but not across voltage
areas. In this example, a hard bound, BB, is defined inside voltage area Ra.
Optionally, guard bands can be specified for some or all voltage areas to prevent shorts. Guard
bands define hard keepout margins surrounding the voltage areas in which no cells, including
level shifters and isolation cells, can be placed. Guard bands can be defined when creating voltage
areas automatically or when updating the voltage areas
. Figure3-2 shows a floorplan similar to Figure3-1 but with guard bands protecting voltage areas
Ra and Rc.
Figure 3-1 Multivoltage Design With Several Voltage Areas
Figure 3-2 Multivoltage Design With Several Voltage Areas and Guard Bands
Physical Design 278
Creating Voltage Areas Manually
Voltage areas can be manually by specifying the exact coordinates of the voltage area. You also
specify the list of cells to be associated with a given voltage area.
Note the following limitations:
• Overlapping voltage areas are not supported.

• All voltage area geometries must be mutually exclusive.
• An error occurs if the voltage area defined when you use the -coordinate option is too
small for all the cells to fit into it.
• It is recommended that each derived voltage area not be disjoint. The size of a voltage
area must be greater than the sum of the areas of all the placed cells in the hierarchy.
Updating Voltage Areas in a Design
Once you have created a voltage area and associated hierarchical cells with the voltage area,
However, you might prefer to change the size of the voltage areas and keep the utilization the
same.
Including Guard Bands With the Voltage Areas
You can use guard bands to ensure that no shorts occur at the boundaries of the voltage areas.
Guard bands define hard keepout margins surrounding the voltage areas. No cells, including level
shifters and isolation cells, can be placed within the guard band margins.
For example, using guard bands is recommended in the case when the rows are the same for all
the voltage areas. The guard bands guarantee the cells in different voltage areas are separated so
that power planning does not introduce shorts.
Figure3-3 shows two voltage areas with guard bands of different widths. For both voltage areas,
the x-width is 10 and the y-width is 20. Notice the x-width defines the width of the vertical part of
the guard band, and the y-width defines the width of the horizontal part.
Physical Design 279
Figure 3-3 Two Voltage Areas With Guard Bands
When generating guard bands you should be aware of the following conditions:
• If some coordinates of a voltage area are defined outside the core area, the tool does not
generate the voltage area and issues warning and error messages.
• If a voltage overlaps an existing one, the tool does not generate the voltage area and
issues error messages.
• If a guard band of a voltage area overlaps another voltage area, the command generates
the guard band and issues warning message
• The x (y) guard band width applies to both the left and right (top and bottom) side of a
voltage area.
• Overlapping guard bands are allowed and do not generate warning messages.
• A guard band that lies outside the core area does not generate a warning message.
Handling Logically Nested Voltage Areas
Voltage areas can be nested with respect to the logic hierarchy, but they cannot be physically
nested. You resolve logically nested voltage areas into separate physical areas by using the
methods described in the preceding sections to create several voltage areas, some of which would
consist of abutted rectangular or rectilinear shapes, as needed. Each abutted shape must not
overlap, intersect, or be embedded within any other shape of the voltage area that it belongs to,
nor with the shapes of any other voltage area. A composite voltage area can appear to violate this
rule, when it is, in fact, a set of properly abutted, separate rectangular or rectilinear shapes.
Figure3-4 shows two examples of logically nested voltage areas and shows how you might
resolve them into physically abutted, separate areas. In these two examples, the logically nested
voltage areas are labeled VA1 and VA2.
Physical Design 280
In the first example, you create a voltage area VA1 that consists of the four sequentially abutted
rectangles VA1_b, VA1_l, VA1_t, and VA1_r with a central, rectangular gap. Voltage area VA2
is a simple rectangle that “fits” into this gap. The following commands would create the two
voltage areas:
create_volatage_area -name VA1 -coord {

10 10 150 30
10 30 70 80
10 80 150 120
140 30 150 80}
create_voltage_area -name VA2 -coord {
70 30 140 80}
In the second example, you create two voltage areas. VA1 is a single, eight-sided rectilinear
shape, and VA2 consists of two disjoint rectangles, VA2_l and VA2_r.
These examples do not represent the only way you might resolve the logically nested voltage
areas into unnested physical areas
Figure 3-4 Examples of Physically Resolved Nested Voltage Areas
Removing Voltage Areas From a Design
If needed you can remove all voltage areas or specified voltage areas from the design. Any move
bound belonging to a removed voltage area is also removed. If you remove a logically nested
voltage area, the subhierarchy logic inherits the voltage area properties of the parent hierarchy.
Physical Design 281
Checking Isolation Cells
check for the presence of isolation cells in the mapped logic hierarchies (blocks) or the voltage
areas associated with the power domains of the design.
Voltage Area-Aware Capabilities
which means that it can carry out placement and optimization steps in multivoltage designs.
Important capabilities include
• Automatic high-fanout synthesis
• Virtual hierarchy routing
• Maximum net length optimization
• Voltage area-based optimization
Buffer trees are built with dedicated subtrees for the fanouts in each voltage area. In particular,
automatic high-fanout synthesis (AHFS) selects buffers according to the associated operating
condition. Buffers are inserted and placed correctly.
Virtual Hierarchy Routing
The virtual route estimator takes the presence of voltage areas into account
Automatic High-Fanout Synthesis
When this feature is enabled, the virtual route estimator observes the following constraints:
• Virtual routes for nets connecting cells within a voltage area do not go outside the voltage
area.
• Virtual routes for nets connecting cells outside a voltage area detour around the voltage
area.
• Virtual routes for nets crossing a voltage area do not zig-zag in and out of the voltage area
(the number of boundary crossings are minimized).
Also, routing driven synthesis (for example, max_net_length) use voltage area-aware routing.
Multivoltage Relative Placement
You can use relative placement with multivoltage designs. Relative placement is most often
applied to physical datapaths. It provides a way for you to create structures in which you specify
the relative column and row positions of instances with respect to each other. During placement
and legalization, these structures are preserved and the cells in each structure are placed as a
Physical Design 282
single entity.
After you group the relevant cells of a voltage area into an relative placement grouping, you can
place them as a single structure within the voltage area. The flow is identical to a typical relative
placement flow, and the entire relative placement feature set is available.
However, you should be aware of these limitations:
• An relative placement group should not span voltage areas. If it is necessary to span
voltage areas, break the relative placement group into multiple relative placement groups,
each contained within its voltage area.
• In situations where a relative placement group is placed very close to a voltage area
boundary, legalization might place part of the group outside the multivoltage area. When
this happens, the group is broken in a way that respects the voltage area constraint.
Maximum Net Length Optimization
The maximum net length optimization carried out into account the presence of voltage areas,
basically routing around them. Routes for nets connecting two cells within a voltage area stay
inside the voltage area, and routes for nets crossing into a voltage area do not excessively zig-zag
in and out of the voltage area.
Voltage Area-Based Optimization
Cell placement and buffer optimization is one-pass voltage area aware. When the tool buffers a
net that crosses voltage areas, the net is divided into multiple segments, each of which is confined
within a single voltage area, and buffering is confined to the segments.
Tie-high and tie-low cells are handled consistently. Constant signals are fed to the correct cells for
a given voltage area.
Placing and Optimizing the Design
The last step in the multivoltage design flow is to place the cells and optimize the design. The tool
places level shifters and isolation cells near the boundaries of defined voltage areas
No buffering is done between the placed level shifter and the edge of the voltage area.
Subsystem Multi-VDDt
Tool provides the following support for multi-VDD designs throughout the Tool design flow:
Common graph and hierarchical common graph

The common graph stores the following information:
• A pointer for each cell to the voltage area index
• A pointer for each cell to the minimum-and-maximum operating condition pair
• The can mapping table specified
• The hierarchical common graph stores the voltage area and operating condition of each
Physical Design 283
logic hierarchy.
Timer
A timing arc in the cell library contains multiple delay tables, indexed by a set of operating
conditions. It is the operating condition of a cell, from the design, that decides which delay
table is to be used. Interpolation among different timing tables is not supported.
In the case of multiple NLDM, all .db files need to be searched and preprocessed to extract
the matching criteria.
Placement and overlap removal

The boundaries that define a voltage area form a rigid boundary, which works to confine
cells to their voltage domains. All cells must stay within their corresponding voltage areas
during global placement and overlap removal. To be accepted, any new cells created during
these processes must have an appropriate voltage area associated with them before
optimization.
Region and plan group constraints are also honored. The placer fails when voltage area
constraints are inconsistent with region and plan group constraints. For example, if a cell
belongs to Region R1 and voltage area V1 but R1 and V1 have no overlap, it is impossible
for the placer to find any legal location for the cell.
Filler cell insertion

Filler cell insertion can be restricted to a named voltage area.
Optimization
Major optimization operations (such as buffer insertion and collapse, and remapping) are
not applied across different voltage domains. Sizing and moving must stay within the
original voltage area of the cell. Optimization does not add or delete level-shifter cells.
Virtual routing
Virtual routing behaves like global routing. It takes account of voltage areas and constructs
the appropriate routing obstructions and detours.
Scan chain
Flip-flops in different voltage domains should belong to different scan groups when level
shifting is required. Make sure you define the proper scan groupings, so that they match the
voltage domains. Violations are reported by the scan chain subsystem.
Clock tree synthesis

• During clock tree synthesis, Tool queries the overlap removal engine to retrieve the
voltage area’s physical information. It uses this information to modify groups of sink pins
according to voltage areas. That is, clock tree synthesis generates a subtree for each group
of sink pins in a voltage area. Then clock tree synthesis assigns the buffers in the subtree
to the voltage area. (The overlap removal engine provides the legal location of the
buffers, based on voltage area.)
• The same rules for assigning operating conditions to new cells in the common graph are
also applied during clock tree synthesis. The timer computes delay, based on the assigned
operating conditions. This means that skew computation reflects the delay differences
caused by operating voltages.
• Voltage area constraints (when present) are automatically detected by clock tree
Physical Design 284
synthesis. The command usage for performing clock tree synthesis is the same with or
without multiple operating voltages.
Global routing
• During global routing, Tool queries the overlap removal engine to retrieve the voltage
area boundaries. The voltage area of each cell is also stored. For nets that are in the same
voltage area, the global router generates temporary routing guides that work to restrict the
routes to the voltage area.
• When a net spans several voltage areas, the global router decomposes it into subnets,
where each subnet is in one voltage area. The global router applies the single-voltage area
algorithm to each subnet and then routes the remaining “border crossing” parts of the net
without temporary route guides.
• Voltage area constraints, if any, are automatically detected by the global router. The
command usage for performing global routing is the same with or without multiple
operating voltages.
• For consistency with the database, which allows multiple polygons to be defined for one
voltage area, the global router recognizes all the polygons that belong to the same voltage
area.
• Diode insertion
The diode insertion operation takes account of voltage areas when inserting diode cells
for antenna fixing.
• Rail analysis
Each voltage has a scaling factor that is specified by the operating condition. The scaling
factor is used for rail analysis.
Multivoltage Threshold Filler Cells
For a design with multivoltage threshold cells, the filler cell insertion process must take into
account the voltage threshold type of adjacent cells, so that tool can select the appropriate filler
cell to insert in the gap between two cells. Specifically, the requirements are these:
• Two adjacent cells of different voltage threshold types must be separated by a special
interface cell, known as a filler cell.
• The filler cell to be inserted depends on the voltage threshold types of the two adjacent
cells.
• A gap between two adjacent cells of the same voltage threshold type must be filled by a
filler cell of that voltage threshold type.
The flow for inserting multivoltage threshold filler cells includes these major steps:
1. Mark the voltage threshold type of all the available standard cells that are relevant.
2. Assign special filler cells for filling the gaps between cells of certain voltage threshold
types
Physical Design 285
3. Insert filler cell
Marking the Voltage Threshold Type for Cells
specify the cells for each voltage threshold type in your design. Attach the voltage threshold type
property to each instance of a named cell master or to all the cells in a named library,
respectively.
You can also do the following:
• Write the voltage threshold type information for a cell master to an output file.
• Remove the voltage threshold type property from the cell master
Marking All Cells in a Library
• Write the voltage threshold type information of each cell in the named cell library to an
output file.
• Remove the voltage threshold type property from all cells in the named cell library
Mapping Filler Cells to Voltage Threshold Cells
creates the voltage threshold rule table information, which maps the filler cells to various
combinations of different voltage threshold cells. You apply the information in the table to
your design.
allows a filler cell to be placed to the left or right of a voltage threshold cell for the following
conditions:
• End of a row
• Beginning of a row
• Space between a nonstandard cell (a macro cell) and a standard cell (a voltage threshold
cell)
• Space between a placement blockage and a standard cell (a voltage threshold cell)
• Write the filler cell list that is stored for the two specified voltage threshold types to an
output file
• Remove the filler cell list that is stored to be used for filling between cells of two
specified voltage threshold types.
Physical Design 286
• Write all special filler cells and their voltage threshold type filling information to an
output file
Voltage Threshold Rule Table Information
The voltage threshold rule table information allows filler cells to honor one or more voltage
threshold rules. Support for multiple rules, in the form of a two-dimensional table, is useful when
your design requires that filler cells be inserted between multiple voltage threshold types
Here is a sample two-dimensional table:
<default> VTType1 VTType2
<default> Filler5 Filler3 Filler4
VTType1 X Filler1,Filler2 Filler2
VTType2 X X Filler1
Reference Library Handling
Generally, you have only read permission to the reference library (changes to the reference
library should be avoided). However, you should be aware of the following points relating to
reference library handling during filler cell insertion.
• Voltage threshold rule information is now stored in the open design view, but for
backward compatibility Tool honors voltage threshold rules defined in the reference
library. If there are conflicting rules, Tool uses the rules defined in the open design view
and issues a warning message to this effect.
• Check whether there are voltage threshold rules stored in the reference library and
removes them when found.
• Lists the voltage threshold rules that are defined in the open design view. It will continue
to list the voltage threshold rules from each reference library.
Inserting Multivoltage Threshold Filler Cells
1. Specify the filler cell lists to be loaded for use during insertion. You can do one or more
of the following:
o Enter the names of the master cells.
o Specify whether all or only specific voltage threshold filler cells are to be loaded.
To specify that all threshold filler cells are to be loaded, select “include all VT
filler” (the default).
o When left-and-right rules and voltage threshold rules are defined for a design,
and the filler cell names in the rules are also entered in either the Master Cell
Name(s), Tool inserts filler cells based on left-and-right rules first, followed by
cells based on voltage threshold rules, and then fills the remaining empty spaces
in the design with regular filler cells listed in the master cell names boxes.
Physical Design 287
2. Select other options, depending on your requirements. You can

o Specify that filler cells be placed in named voltage areas only by entering the
voltage area names.
o check that fillers are inserted correctly, based on the specified requirements.
check that
The left-and-right filler cells are inserted as specified
The filler cells do not overlap with neighboring cells
The filler cells are not outside of the cell row
The filler cell’s power and ground pins are connected to the specified power and
ground nets
The filler cells are assigned the correct voltage area in multivoltage designs
The correct voltage threshold filler cells are inserted between voltage threshold
cells
There are no empty spaces big enough for a filler cell
A filler cell name has the correct hierarchy and user-specified name identifier
Optimization and Voltage Areas
The optimization processes use hierarchy-based voltage areas instead of connectivity-based

voltage areas in the hierarchical flow (block level). This allows a hierarchical timing view (HTV)
model for a block to have a different voltage area than the top level. SDC constraints must specify
an operating condition for the target HTV block. Also, there cannot be multiple voltage areas
inside the HTV block.
During optimization, nets crossing different voltage areas are treated differently, depending on
whether level-shifter cells or isolation cells are present. For example, consider a net with cell
instances A and B that are assigned voltage areas VA_a and VA_b, respectively. During buffer
insertion, Tool treats the different cases as follows:
• If neither cell instance A or B is an isolation or level-shifter cell, buffers can be

added to VA_a, VA_b, or both.
• If only cell instance A is an isolation or level-shifter cell, buffers can be added

only to VA_b.
• If only cell instance B is an isolation or level-shifter cell, buffers can be added

only to VA_a.
• If both cell instances A and B are isolation or level-shifter cells, no buffers can be
added to the net.
To summarize the rules, when a net is connected to an isolation or level-shifter cell in voltage
area V, buffering of the net cannot occur at voltage area V (see Figure 4-3). This rule preserves
the integrity of the isolation or level-shifting capability of the netlist. If this rule is violated, the
isolation or level-shifting capability might fail. The same rule is applied to any optimization
operations that involve netlist changes. If all cell instances of a net belong to an identical voltage
area, these rules do not apply.
Physical Design 288
Clock Tree Synthesis and Voltage Areas
When all the flip-flops and roots of a clock net belong to the same voltage area, the clock tree
generated during clock tree synthesis is placed in that voltage area. Complications arise when the
clock net spans multiple voltage areas. In such a case, Tool attempts to minimize the number of
clock nets that cross different voltage areas and tries to keep all sink pins of the same voltage area
within one clock subtree. To do so, Tool does the following during clock tree synthesis:
1. Groups the sink pins on the net by voltage area.
2. Inserts a subtree for each voltage area. From the guide buffer, Tool creates a subtree for
each voltage area. All buffers in the subtree are assigned and placed in the same voltage
area.
3. Inserts the necessary buffers between the clock root and the subtrees. These buffers are
assigned and placed in the same voltage area as the clock root
Figure 4-3 Optimization for Nets Crossing Multiple Voltage Areas

Physical Design 289
A special case occurs when a level-shifter cell or isolation cell is connected to a boundary port
(see Figure 4-4). In this case, the net is not optimized regardless of the existence of voltage areas.
Clock tree synthesis also observes the same rule, and buffers will not be added in the net marked
“no optimization.”
Figure 4-4 No Optimization Between I/O Port and Level-Shifter or Isolation Cell
Physical Design 290
These steps should minimize the number of clock nets that cross different voltage areas and
should allow these nets to be near the root of the clock tree. Note that at step 2, the lower-level
subtrees are contained within their voltage area boundaries. The guide buffer on the clock net is
not inserted when a level-shifter or isolation cell is already present in the voltage area, as shown
in Figure 4-3.
When a buffer is inserted during clock tree synthesis, its voltage area is determined, based on the
bottom-up construction principle described in the previous steps. The operating condition of the
buffer is also assigned, based on the mapping information.
Clock tree synthesis inserts guide buffers that are based on the operating condition as well as the
voltage area, which helps make hierarchy maintenance easier. That is, the hierarchy updating that
occurs at the end of the clock tree synthesis operation will take into account the cell’s voltage
area and operating condition, as assigned by clock tree synthesis. This style of insertion and
hierarchy updating is consistent.
For multivoltage designs, clock tree synthesis performs the following steps:
1. Groups the sink pins on the clock net by using a combination of voltage area and
operation condition criteria.
2. Inserts a guide buffer for each group. The guide buffer should be assigned the same
voltage area and operating condition as the group.
The guide buffer is also used to create a subtree for each group. All buffers in the subtree
are assigned to and placed in the same voltage area and operating condition.
3. Inserts the buffers, as needed, between the clock root and the subtree root of different
groups. These buffers are assigned to and placed in the same group as the clock root.
After these steps are completed, the hierarchy is updated, at which time the buffers added during
clock tree synthesis are inserted in the proper hierarchy.
For multi-VDD designs, the hierarchy repair process takes the cell voltage areas assigned by
clock tree synthesis into account. If a buffer is assigned VA_1 and all its sinks also reside in
VA_1, the buffer needs to be pushed down to a lower logic hierarchy that operates at a matching
voltage area VA_1. If this adjustment is not performed, the cell might experience inconsistent
voltage area and logic hierarchy assignment after clock tree synthesis.
Physical Design 291
Global Routing Within Voltage Areas
An important multi-VDD routing requirement is to minimize the number of “border crossing”

routes. That is, when all the cells of a net are in a single voltage area, it is desirable to keep the
routes within the boundaries of the voltage area. This is especially important when buffering
decisions are based on the routing results.
Tool meets this requirement by automatically generating routing guides, using voltage area
information, in a three-step process:
1. Tool divides the nets that span multi-VDD areas into subnets, so that each subnet
connects only one voltage area. This minimizes border crossing.
2. Tool generates temporary routing guides (routing blockages) for each subnet and
routes the subnets. This keeps each subnet inside its voltage area boundary.
3. Tool removes the temporary routing guides so that it can complete the routing
between all the subnets.
For multi-VDD designs, the global router follows these constraints:
• When all the ports of a net are in the same voltage area, the routing for the net is
restricted to the voltage area.
This is a hard constraint. The global router routes outside the voltage area only
when it fails to find a routing solution, due to blockages; it does not go outside
because of congestion.
The main reason for this constraint is to allow better QOR for buffer insertion.
• When a net connects across more than one voltage area, the global router tries to
minimize the number of intersections between the routing and the voltage area
boundaries.
Power Net Connections
Create and modify power net connections. Because this command takes voltage area constraints
into account, it can connect or reconnect power and ground nets that are based on the voltage area
of a cell instance.
Often you might generate a Verilog netlist with pins connected to 1’b1 and 1’b0. When reading in
a Verilog netlist, Tool requires you to specify global net names for the pins connected to 1’b1 and
1’b0. When you run the aprPGConnect command, which take voltage into account, the
connections to 1’b1 and 1’b0 are based on the voltage area of the cell instance. Only cell
instances matching the specified voltage area are processed. Cell instances not matching the
specified voltage area are ignored.
When a new cell is added to a voltage area, power and ground nets are automatically connected
whenever possible. When there is a unique power net in a voltage area, the new cell’s power net
is automatically connected. The same rule applies to ground nets. When a given voltage area has
Physical Design 292
multiple power and ground nets, such automatic connection is not possible, and Tool issues a
warning. In this case, you must connect the power nets of the new cells that were added during
optimization. Automatic connection of power and ground nets is also not performed in non-multi-
VDD designs.
Multicorner and Multimode Analysis and Optimization
Multicorner and multimode scenarios provide for analysis and optimization of designs at various
process corners, voltages, and temperatures in different functional modes.
This chapter contains the following sections:
• Analyzing With Sequential Multiple Corner Cases
• Analyzing With Sequential Multiple Modes
• Analyzing With Sequential Multiple Corner Cases in Multiple Modes
• Working With Multicorner TLUPlus
Analyzing With Sequential Multiple Corner Cases
In deep submicron processes, the behavior of cell delay and wire delay is different depending on
the process variations. As a result, you need to do analysis and optimization at more than the
current single minimum corner and single maximum corner. The multicorner capability enables
you to analyze and optimize at all these corner cases.
To do multicorner analysis and optimization, you need to
• Set up the environment
• Define the scenarios
• Load the SDC file
• Analyze the timing reports from multiple scenarios
• Determine which scenario to optimize
For each corner case, you need to provide one or more separate .db files with process,
temperature, and voltage information.
You also need to provide one SDC constraints file (.sdc) that applies for all the process corner
cases.
Creating the Scenarios for Multicorner Analysis

Use the scaling options to define the cell delay and wire delay scaling factors.
Physical Design 293
Note:
Consider the following when using the parasitic scaling factor
• When you specify both the parasitic multipliers and the parasitic scaling factor ,tool
scales parasitics based only on the parasitic scaling factor.
• When you specify both the parasitic scaling options and the wire delay scaling options,
tool calculates the initial delay based on the scaled parasitics and then scales the resultant
delay by the delay scaling factor.
20. Physical Design Objective Type of Questions and Answers

• 1) Chip utilization depends on ___.
a. Only on standard cells c. Only on macros

b. Standard cells and macros d. Standard cells macros and IO pads
• 2) In Soft blockages ____ cells are placed.
a. Only sequential cells c. Only Buffers and Inverters

b. No cells d. Any cells
• 3) Why we have to remove scan chains before placement?
a. Because scan chains are group of flip flop c. It is series of flip flop connected in FIFO
b. It does not have timing critical path d. None
• 4) Delay between shortest path and longest path in the clock is called ____.
a. Useful skew c. Global skew

b. Local skew d. Slack
• 5) Cross talk can be avoided by ___.
a. Decreasing the spacing between the metal c. Using lower metal layers
layers d. Using long nets
b. Shielding the nets
• 6) Prerouting means routing of _____.
a. Clock nets c. IO nets

b. Signal nets d. PG nets
• 7) Which of the following metal layer has Maximum resistance?
a. Metal1 c. Metal3
b. Metal2 d. Metal4
• 8) What is the goal of CTS?
Physical Design 294
a. Minimum IR Drop c. Minimum Skew

b. Minimum EM d. Minimum Slack
• 9) Usually Hold is fixed ___.
a. Before Placement c. Before CTS

b. After Placement d. After CTS
• 10) To achieve better timing ____ cells are placed in the critical path.
a. HVT c. RVT
b. LVT d. SVT
• 11) Leakage power is inversely proportional to ___.
a. Frequency c. Supply voltage

b. Load Capacitance d. Threshold Voltage
• 12) Filler cells are added ___.
a. Before Placement of std cells c. Before Floor planning

b. After Placement of Std Cells d. Before Detail Routing
• 13) Search and Repair is used for ___.
a. Reducing IR Drop c. Reducing EM violations

b. Reducing DRC d. None
• 14) Maximum current density of a metal is available in ___.
a. .lib c. .tf
b. .v d. .sdc
• 15) More IR drop is due to ___.
a. Increase in metal width c. Decrease in metal length

b. Increase in metal length d. Lot of metal layers
• 16) The minimum height and width a cell can occupy in the design is called as ___.
a. Unit Tile cell c. LVT cell

b. Multi heighten cell d. HVT cell
• 17) CRPR stands for ___.
a. Cell Convergence Pessimism Removal c. Clock Convergence Pessimism Removal

b. Cell Convergence Preset Removal d. Clock Convergence Preset Removal
• 18) In OCV timing check, for setup time, ___.
a. Max delay is used for launch path and Min delay for capture path
b. Min delay is used for launch path and Max delay for capture path
c. Both Max delay is used for launch and Capture path
d. Both Min delay is used for both Capture and Launch paths
Physical Design 295
• 19) "Total metal area and(or) perimeter of conducting layer / gate to gate area" is
called ___.
a. Utilization c. OCV
b. Aspect Ratio d. Antenna Ratio
• 20) The Solution for Antenna effect is ___.
a. Diode insertion c. Buffer insertion

b. Shielding d. Double spacing
• 21) To avoid cross talk, the shielded net is usually connected to ___.
a. VDD c. Both VDD and VSS

b. VSS d. Clock
• 22) If the data is faster than the clock in Reg to Reg path ___ violation may come.
a. Setup c. Both
b. Hold d. None
• 23) Hold violations are preferred to fix ___.
a. Before placement c. Before CTS

b. After placement d. After CTS
• 24) Which of the following is not present in SDC ___?
a. Max tran c. Max fanout

b. Max cap d. Max current density
• 25) Timing sanity check means (with respect to PD)___.
a. Checking timing of routed design with out net delays

b. Checking Timing of placed design with net delays
c. Checking Timing of unplaced design without net delays
d. Checking Timing of routed design with net delays
• 26) Which of the following is having highest priority at final stage (post routed) of
the design ___?
a. Setup violation c. Skew

b. Hold violation d. None
• 27) Which of the following is best suited for CTS?
a. CLKBUF c. INV
b. BUF d. CLKINV
• 28) Max voltage drop will be there at(with out macros) ___.
Physical Design 296
a. Left and Right sides c. Middle

b. Bottom and Top sides d. None
• 29) Which of the following is preferred while placing macros ___?
a. Macros placed center of the die d. Macros placed based on connectivity of

b. Macros placed left and right side of die the I/O
c. Macros placed bottom and top sides of die
• 30) Routing congestion can be avoided by ___.
a. placing cells closer c. Distributing cells

b. Placing cells at corners d. None
• 31) Pitch of the wire is ___.
a. Min width c. Min width - min spacing

b. Min spacing d. Min width + min spacing
• 32) In Physical Design following step is not there ___.
a. Floorplaning c. Design Synthesis

b. Placement d. CTS
• 33) In technology file if 7 metals are there then which metals you will use for power?
a. Metal1 and metal2 c. Metal5 and metal6

b. Metal3 and metal4 d. Metal6 and metal7
• 34) If metal6 and metal7 are used for the power in 7 metal layer process design then
which metals you will use for clock ?
a. Metal1 and metal2 c. Metal4 and metal5

b. Metal3 and metal4 d. Metal6 and metal7
• 35) In a reg to reg timing path Tclocktoq delay is 0.5ns and TCombo delay is 5ns
and Tsetup is 0.5ns then the clock period should be ___.
a. 1ns c. 5ns
b. 3ns d. 6ns
• 36) Difference between Clock buff/inverters and normal buff/inverters is __.
a. Clock buff/inverters are faster than normal buff/inverters

b. Clock buff/inverters are slower than normal buff/inverters
c. Clock buff/inverters are having equal rise and fall times with high drive strengths compare to
normal buff/inverters
d. Normal buff/inverters are having equal rise and fall times with high drive strengths compare to
Clock buff/inverters.
• 37) Which configuration is more preferred during floorplaning ?
a. Double back with flipped rows

b. Double back with non flipped rows
Physical Design 297
c. With channel spacing between rows and no double back

d. With channel spacing between rows and double back
• 38) What is the effect of high drive strength buffer when added in long net ?
a. Delay on the net increases c. Delay on the net decreases

b. Capacitance on the net increases d. Resistance on the net increases
.
• 39) Delay of a cell depends on which factors ?
a. Output transition and input load c. Input transition and Output transition
b. Input transition and Output load d. Input load and Output Load.
• 40) After the final routing the violations in the design ___.
a. There can be no setup, no hold violations

b. There can be only setup violation but no hold
c. There can be only hold violation not Setup violation
d. There can be both violations.
• 41) Utilisation of the chip after placement optimisation will be ___.
a. Constant c. Increase
b. Decrease d. None of the above
• 42) What is routing congestion in the design?
a. Ratio of required routing tracks to available routing tracks

b. Ratio of available routing tracks to required routing tracks
c. Depends on the routing layers available
d. None of the above
• 43) What are preroutes in your design?
a. Power routing c. Power and Signal routing

b. Signal routing d. None of the above.
• 44) Clock tree doesn't contain following cell ___.
a. Clock buffer
b. Clock Inverter
c. AOI cell
d. None of the above
• Answers:
Physical Design 298
1)b 2)c 3)b 4)c 5)b 6)d 7)a 8)c 9)d 10)b 11)d 12)d
13)b 14)c 15)b 16)a 17)c 18)a 19)d 20)a 21)b 22)b 23)d 24)d
25)c 26)b 27)a 28)c 29)d 30)c 31)d 32)c 33)d 34)c 35)d 36)c
37)a 38)c 39)b 40)d 41)c 42)a 43)a 44)c
What is the most challenging job in P&R flow?
o -It may be power planning- because you found more IR drop

o -It may be low power target-because you had more dynamic and leakage power
o -It may be macro placement-because it had more connection with standard cells
or macros
o -It may be CTS-because you needed to handle multiple clocks and clock domain
crossings
o -It may be timing-because sizing cells in ECO flow is not meeting timing
o -It may be library preparation-because you found some inconsistency in libraries.
o -It may be DRC-because you faced thousands of violations
21. ASIC Design Check List
Silicon Process and Library Characteristics

1. What exact process are you using? 1. How many clock domains are in the
2. How many layers can be used for design?
this design? 2. What are the clock frequencies?
3. Are the Cross talk Noise constraints, 3. Is there a target clock skew, latency
Xtalk Analysis configuration, Cell or other clock requirements?
EM & Wire EM available? 4. Does the design have a PLL?
5. If so, is it used to remove clock
Design Characteristics latency?
6. Is there any I/O cell in the feedback
1. What is the design application? path?
2. Number of cells (placeable objects)? 7. Is the PLL used for frequency
3. Is the design Verilog or VHDL? multipliers?
4. Is the netlist flat or hierarchical? 8. Are there derived clocks or complex
5. Is there RTL available? clock generation circuitry?
6. Is there any datapath logic using 9. Are there any gated clocks?
special datapath tools? 10. If yes, do they use simple gating
7. Is the DFT to be considered? elements?
8. Can scan chains be reordered? 11. Is the gate clock used for timing or
9. Is memory BIST, boundary scan power?
used on this design? 12. For gated clocks, can the gating
10. Are static timing analysis elements be sized for timing?
constraints available in SDC 13. Are you muxing in a test clock or
format? using a JTAG clock?
14. Available cells for clock tree?
15. Are there any special clock
Clock Characteristics repeaters in the library?
Physical Design 299
16. Are there any EM, slew or 22. Are the I/Os periphery I/O or area
capacitance limits on these I/O?
repeaters? 23. How many I/Os?
17. How many drive strengths are 24. Is the design pad limited?
available in the standard buffers and 25. Power planning and Power analysis
inverters? for this design?
18. Do any of the buffers have balanced 26. Are layout databases available for
rise and fall delays? hard macros ?
19. Any there special requirements for 27. Timing analysis and correlation?
clock distribution? 28. Physical verification ?
20. Will the clock tree be shielded? If
so, what are the shielding Data Input
requirements?
1. Library information for new library
Floorplan and Package Characteristics 2. .lib for timing information
3. GDSII or LEF for library cells
1. Target die area? including any RAMs
2. Does the area estimate include 4. RTL in Verilog/VHDL format
power/signal routing? 5. Number of logical blocks in the
3. What gates/mm2 has been assumed? RTL
4. Number of routing layers? 6. Constraints for the block in SDC
5. Any special power routing 7. Floorplan information in DEF
requirements? 8. I/O pin location
6. Number of digital I/O pins/pads? 9. Macro locations
7. Number of analog signal pins/pads?
8. Number of power/ground pins/pads?
9. Total number of pins/pads and
Location?
10. Will this chip use a wire bond
package?
11. Will this chip use a flip-chip
package?
12. If Yes, is it I/O bump pitch? Rows
of bumps? Bump allocation?Bump
pad layout guide?
13. Have you already done floor-
planning for this design?
14. If yes, is conformance to the
existing floor-plan required?
15. What is the target die size?
16. What is the expected utilization?
17. Please draw the overall floorplan ?
18. Is there an existing floorplan
available in DEF?
19. What are the number and type of
macros (memory, PLL, etc.)?
20. Are there any analog blocks in the
design?
21. What kind of packaging is used?
Flipchip?
300
22. Companies Interview Questions

Intel
1. Why power stripes routed in the top metal layers?

2. Why do you use alternate routing approach HVH/VHV (Horizontal-Vertical-Horizontal/
Vertical-Horizontal-Vertical)?
3. What are several factors to improve propagation delay of standard cell?
4. How do you compute net delay (interconnect delay) / decode RC values present in tech
file?
5. What are various ways of timing optimization in synthesis tools?
6. What would you do in order not to use certain cells from the library?
7. How delays are characterized using WLM (Wire Load Model)?
8. What are various techniques to resolve congestion/noise?
9. Let’s say there enough routing resources available, timing is fine, can you increase clock
buffers in clock network? If so will there be any impact on other parameters?
10. How do you optimize skew/insertion delays in CTS (Clock Tree Synthesis)?
11. What are pros/cons of latch/FF (Flip Flop)?
12. How you go about fixing timing violations for latch- latch paths?
13. As an engineer, let’s say your manager comes to you and asks for next project die size
estimation/projection, giving data on RTL size, performance requirements. How do you go
about the figuring out and come up with die size considering physical aspects?
14. How will you design inserting voltage island scheme between macro pins crossing core
and are at different power wells? What is the optimal resource solution?
15. What are various formal verification issues you faced and how did you resolve?
16. How do you calculate maximum frequency given setup, hold, clock and clock skew?
17. What are effects of meta-stability?
ST Microelectronics
1 What are the challenges you faced in place and route, FV (Formal Verification), ECO
(Engineering Change Order) areas?
2 How long the design cycle for your designs?
3 What part are your areas of interest in physical design?
4 Explain ECO (Engineering Change Order) methodology.
5 Explain CTS (Clock Tree Synthesis) flow.
Answer: Clock Tree Synthesis
6 What kind of routing issues you faced?

301
7 How does STA (Static Timing Analysis) in OCV (On Chip Variation) conditions
done? How do you set OCV (On Chip Variation) in IC compiler? How is timing
correlation done before and after place and route?
8 If there are too many pins of the logic cells in one place within core, what kind of issues
would you face and how will you resolve?
9 Define hash/ @array in perl.
10 Using TCL (Tool Command Language, Tickle) how do you set variables?
11 What is ICC (IC Compiler) command for setting derate factor/ command to perform
physical synthesis?
12 What are nanoroute options for search and repair?
13 What were your design skew/insertion delay targets?
14 How is IR drop analysis done? What are various statistics available in reports?
15 Explain pin density/ cell density issues, hotspots?
16 How will you relate routing grid with manufacturing grid and judge if the routing grid is
set correctly?
17 What is the command for setting multi cycle path?
18 If hold violation exists in design, is it OK to sign off design? If not, why?
Texas Instruments (TI)
1 How are timing constraints developed?

2 Explain timing closure flow/methodology/issues/fixes.
3 Explain SDF (Standard Delay Format) back annotation/ SPEF (Standard Parasitic
Exchange Format) timing correlation flow.
4 Given a timing path in multi-mode multi-corner, how is STA (Static Timing Analysis)
performed in order to meet timing in both modes and corners, how are PVT (Process-
Voltage-Temperature)/derate factors decided and set in the Primetime flow?
5 With respect to clock gate, what are various issues you faced at various stages in the
physical design flow?
6 What are synthesis strategies to optimize timing?
7 Explain ECO (Engineering Change Order) implementation flow. Given post routed
database and functional fixes, how will you take it to implement ECO (Engineering
Change Order) and what physical and functional checks you need to perform?
Qualcomm
3 In building the timing constraints, do you need to constrain all IO (Input-Output) ports?
4 Can a single port have multi-clocked? How do you set delays for such ports?
5 How is scan DEF (Design Exchange Format) generated?
6 What is purpose of lockup latch in scan chain?
7 How do you set inter clock uncertainty?
8 In DC (Design Compiler), how do you constrain clocks, IO (Input-Output) ports, maxcap,
max tran?
9 What are differences in clock constraints from pre CTS (Clock Tree Synthesis) to post
CTS (Clock Tree Synthesis)?
10 How is clock gating done?
Answer: Clock Gating

302
11 what constraints you add in CTS (Clock Tree Synthesis) for clock gates?
12 What is tradeoff between dynamic power (current) and leakage power (current)?
Answer:
Leakage Power Trends
Dynamic Power
13 How do you reduce standby (leakage) power?
Answer: Low Power Design Techniques
14 Explain top level pin placement flow? What are parameters to decide?
15 Given block level netlists, timing constraints, libraries, macro LEFs (Layout Exchange
Format/Library Exchange Format), how will you start floor planning?
16 With net length of 1000um how will you compute RC values, using equations/tech file
info?
17 What do noise reports represent?
18 What does glitch reports contain?
19 What are CTS (Clock Tree Synthesis) steps in IC compiler?
20 What do clock constraints file contain?
21 How to analyze clock tree reports?
22 What do IR drop Voltagestorm reports represent?
23 Where /when do you use DeCAP (Decoupling Capacitor) cells?
24 What are various power reduction techniques?
Answer: Low Power Design Techniques
Hughes Networks
3 What is setup/hold? What are setup and hold time impacts on timing? How will you fix
setup and hold violations?
4 Explain function of Muxed FF (Multiplexed Flip Flop) /scan FF (Scal Flip Flop).
5 What are tested in DFT (Design for Testability)?
6 In equivalence checking, how do you handle scanen signal?
7 In terms of CMOS (Complimentary Metal Oxide Semiconductor), explain physical
parameters that affect the propagation delay?
8 Why is power signal routed in top metal layers?
Top Metal Layers has Less Resistance and High Current Density.
Avago Technologies (former HP group)
1 How do you minimize clock skew/ balance clock tree?

2 Given 11 minterms and asked to derive the logic function.
3 Given C1= 10pf, C2=1pf connected in series with a switch in between, at t=0 switch is
open and one end having 5v and other end zero voltage; compute the voltage across C2
when the switch is closed?
4 Explain the modes of operation of CMOS (Complimentary Metal Oxide Semiconductor)
inverter? Show IO (Input-Output) characteristics curve.
5 Implement a ring oscillator.
303
6 How to slow down ring oscillator?
Hynix Semiconductor
1 How do you optimize power at various stages in the physical design flow?
2 What timing optimization strategies you employ in pre-layout /post-layout stages?
3 What are process technology challenges in physical design?
4 Design divide by 2, divide by 3, and divide by 1.5 counters. Draw timing diagrams.
5 What are multi-cycle paths, false paths? How to resolve multi-cycle and false paths?
6 Given a flop to flop path with combo delay in between and output of the second flop fed
back to combo logic. Which path is fastest path to have hold violation and how will you
resolve?
7 What are RTL (Register Transfer Level) coding styles to adapt to yield optimal backend
design?
8 Draw timing diagrams to represent the propagation delay, set up, hold, recovery,
removal, minimum pulse width.

Physical Design Concept PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Physical Design Concept PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Physical Design Concept PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Physical Design Concepts 1

1. Inputs and outputs of Physical Design

1. Inputs and outputs of physical design implementation

Data Input Requirements for Physical Design Tool

Input data Required for Physical Design

Output data from Physical Design Tool

Libraries in Physical Design

Technology File Libraries

Standard Cell Libraries, I/O Cell Libraries, Special Cell Libraries

2. Checks and Care About Before Starting the Design

•Inter clock relation ship of the clocks must be aligned together

Multi Voltage design

A top level port of a block cannot be left unconnected

difference in cell depth between two branches of the clocktree

Consistency checks between constraints and netlist.

create_clock #create_generated_clock should be in exceptions set_input_delay set_output_delay

set_clock_latency and set_clock_transition on real clocks should be removed. The flow

•Max transition: maximum slope allowed at leaf pins.

Core limited design:

2. How will we decide chip core area?

Sandard Cell Area

Area of [ Sandard Cell + Macro + ( Pad , PadFiller , CornerPad )]

Best Aspect Ratio:

W Horizontal Routing Re sources

4. What is an HALO? How is it different from the blockage?

4. How will you do floor planning for multi supply design?

4. How to Decide pin/pad location?

4. How much utilization is used in the design?

4. What is the significance of simultaneous switching output (SSO) file?

4. Explain Floor planning, from scratch to end?

• Calculation of Core, Die size and Aspect Ratio.

Figure -3. Different unit tile placement

Number of Module Cells: 70449

Number of Pins: 368936

Number of IO Pins: 298

Number of Nets: 70858

Average Pins Per Net (Signal): 3.20281

Total Standard Cell Area: 559367.77

Core Size: width 949.76, height 947.80; area

Chip Size: width 999.76, height 998.64; area

Cell/Core Ratio: 62.1394%

Cell/Chip Ratio: 56.0264%

Number of Cell Rows: 392

Placement Issues with Different Tile Rows

unit 257792 114353 44.36%

lvt_unit 1071872 702425 65.53%

Corresponding timing summary is provided below:

Setup Hold Num Num

A.PRE -3.491 3293 -3353.9 0.100 10000.000 0 8461 426 00:02:26

A.IPO -0.487 928 -271.5 0.100 10000.000 0 1301 29 00:01:02

A.IPO -0.454 1383 -312.8 0.100 10000.000 0 1765 36 00:01:57

A.PPO -1.405 1607 -590.9 0.100 10000.000 0 2325 32 00:00:58

A.SETUP -1.405 1517 -466.4 0.100 -0.168 6550 2221 31 00:04:10

Aspect Ratio= Horizontal Routing Resources / Vertical Routing Resources

Core Utilization= Standard Cell Area / (Row Area + Channel Area)

How do you place macros in a full chip design?

Differentiate between a Hierarchical Design and flat design?

o Hierarchial design has blocks, subblocks in an hierarchy; Flattened design has no

1. How to do power planning?